[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2025087146A1 - Method for transmitting information on sidelink and communication apparatus - Google Patents

Method for transmitting information on sidelink and communication apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2025087146A1
WO2025087146A1 PCT/CN2024/125553 CN2024125553W WO2025087146A1 WO 2025087146 A1 WO2025087146 A1 WO 2025087146A1 CN 2024125553 W CN2024125553 W CN 2024125553W WO 2025087146 A1 WO2025087146 A1 WO 2025087146A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
reference signal
terminal device
reference signals
measurement result
indication information
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
PCT/CN2024/125553
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
易凤
张懿
苏宏家
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Huawei Technologies Co Ltd filed Critical Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Publication of WO2025087146A1 publication Critical patent/WO2025087146A1/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W28/00Network traffic management; Network resource management
    • H04W28/02Traffic management, e.g. flow control or congestion control
    • H04W28/06Optimizing the usage of the radio link, e.g. header compression, information sizing, discarding information
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/10Scheduling measurement reports ; Arrangements for measurement reports

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communications, and more specifically, to a method and a communication device for transmitting information on a side link.
  • CSI-RS channel state information reference signals
  • MAC CE media access control elements
  • One reference signal corresponds to one beam, or one reference signal is sent using one beam.
  • One reference signal corresponds to one CSI-RS measurement report (CSI-reporting), or one beam corresponds to one CSI-RS measurement report.
  • beams (or beam pairs) also need to be maintained between terminal devices.
  • the receiving device needs to report the measurement results of the reference signal.
  • the amount of data that needs to be fed back is relatively large, which occupies more resources and consumes a lot of communication resources.
  • the present application provides a method and communication device for information transmission on a side link, which aggregates feedback information (i.e., measurement results) corresponding to multiple beams (i.e., multiple beam pairs) and sends them together, and the feedback information of each beam does not directly indicate the measurement result of the beam, but indicates the comparison result of the measurement result of the beam with a threshold, or indicates whether the beam measurement result meets a condition.
  • the amount of data that needs to be fed back can be effectively reduced, the length of the feedback information and the communication resources required for the feedback information can be reduced, and in this way, the amount of data that needs to be fed back can be effectively reduced, thereby reducing the consumption of communication resources.
  • a method for information transmission on a side link may be a first terminal device, or a chip, a chip system, or a processor that supports the first terminal device to implement the method.
  • the method includes: the first terminal device sends K reference signals to the second terminal device on K time-frequency resources respectively, and different time-frequency resources in the K time-frequency resources do not overlap in the time domain, and K is an integer greater than 1; the first terminal device receives feedback information from the second terminal device on the first time-frequency resource, and the feedback information includes: first indication information for indicating whether the measurement results of the K reference signals meet the conditions, or at least one of the second indication information for indicating the comparison results of the measurement results of the K reference signals with the threshold; or, the feedback information includes: indication information for indicating the measurement results corresponding to the K reference signals, and different time-frequency resources in the K time-frequency resources correspond to different beam directions.
  • Each time-frequency resource is used to send a reference signal.
  • the reference signal identifiers corresponding to the
  • the method for information transmission on the side link provided by the first aspect is to receive the comparison results of the measurement results of multiple reference signals (i.e., multiple beams) fed back by the second terminal device within the same time unit (on the first time-frequency resource) and the threshold, or whether the measurement results of multiple reference signals meet the conditions, instead of directly feeding back the measurement results of multiple reference signals, and different reference signals correspond to different beam directions.
  • the length of the information used to indicate whether the comparison result or the measurement result meets the conditions is less than the length of the information used to indicate the measurement result, which can effectively reduce the amount of data that needs to be fed back, reduce the length of the feedback information and the communication resources required for the feedback information, thereby reducing the consumption of communication resources.
  • the reference signal identifiers corresponding to the K reference signals are different, and different beams can be indicated by different reference signal identifiers.
  • the comparison result between the measurement result of the reference signal and the threshold may include a difference value (a value obtained by subtracting the threshold from the measurement result of the reference signal, or a value obtained by subtracting the measurement result of the reference signal from the threshold).
  • the first time-frequency resource may occupy at least one symbol, at least one time slot, or at least one subframe in the time domain.
  • each of the K time-frequency resources may occupy at least one symbol, at least one time slot, or at least one subframe in the time domain.
  • the reference signal includes: at least one of: CSI-RS, SSB, S-SSS, S-PSS or DMRS.
  • the measurement result of the reference signal includes: at least one of RSRP of the reference signal, RSRQ of the reference signal, SNR of the reference signal, or SINR of the reference signal.
  • K reference signals may be sent multiple times in succession.
  • the multiple sending of K reference signals may be understood as: the sending of K reference signals by the first terminal device is regarded as one time or a group of sendings.
  • the first terminal device may send multiple times or groups of sendings in succession.
  • the condition is satisfied including: each measurement result of K reference signals in N consecutive measurements is greater than or equal to a first threshold, and the first indication information indicates: each measurement result of K reference signals in N consecutive measurements is greater than or equal to the first threshold, N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and each measurement result includes the measurement results of K reference signals.
  • the feedback information includes only one first indication information, and the length of the first indication information in the feedback information may be 1 bit, which is used to indicate that each measurement result in N consecutive measurements is greater than or equal to the first threshold (i.e., used to indicate that the condition is satisfied).
  • each measurement result in N consecutive measurements is less than or equal to the first threshold (i.e., used to indicate that the condition is not satisfied).
  • each measurement result includes the measurement results of K reference signals.
  • the amount of data required for feedback can be further reduced, and the feedback information or the first indication information only requires 1 bit, further reducing the consumption of communication resources.
  • the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals satisfies the condition including: the measurement results of the i-th reference signal in m consecutive measurements are all greater than or equal to a threshold value, and the first indication information corresponding to the i-th reference signal can be used to indicate: the measurement results of the i-th reference signal in m consecutive measurements are all greater than or equal to the threshold value (that is, the first indication information is used to indicate that the condition is satisfied).
  • the number of first indication information included in the feedback information may be less than or equal to K.
  • One first indication information needs to carry the reference signal identifier or beam identifier corresponding to the indication information.
  • the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals satisfies the condition including: the comparison result of the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals and the second threshold is within the threshold range, or the comparison result of the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals and the second threshold is greater than or equal to at least one of the third thresholds, i is 1, 2..., K, and the feedback information includes K first indication information, and the first indication information corresponding to the i-th reference signal is used to indicate: the measurement result of the i-th reference signal satisfies the condition or the measurement result of the i-th reference signal does not satisfy the condition.
  • the length of a first indication information can be 1 bit, or can be greater than 1 bit, for example, 2 bits or 3 bits.
  • the amount of data required for feedback can be further reduced, and the feedback information or the first indication information only needs 1 bit, further reducing the consumption of communication resources.
  • the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals satisfies the condition including: the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals is greater than or equal to a fourth threshold value, the value of i is 1, 2..., K, and the feedback information includes K first indication information, and the first indication information corresponding to the measurement result of the i-th reference signal is used to indicate: the measurement result of the i-th reference signal satisfies the condition or the measurement result of the i-th reference signal does not satisfy the condition.
  • the first indication information corresponding to the i-th reference signal is used to indicate: the measurement result of the i-th reference signal satisfies the condition or the measurement result of the i-th reference signal does not satisfy the condition.
  • the length of a first indication information may be 1 bit, or may be greater than 1 bit, for example, 2 bits or 3 bits.
  • the amount of data that needs to be fed back may be further reduced, and the feedback information or the first indication information only requires 1 bit, further reducing the consumption of communication resources.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate that the measurement feedback information of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals includes K second indication information.
  • One second indication information is used to indicate the comparison result of the measurement result of a reference signal with the fifth threshold value, i is 1, 2..., K, and the feedback information includes K second indication information.
  • the length of one first indication information can be 1 bit, or can be greater than 1 bit, for example, 2 bits or 3 bits. The amount of data that needs to be fed back can be further reduced, and the feedback information or the first indication information only needs 1 bit, which further reduces the consumption of communication resources.
  • the length of a second indication information may be 4 bits, and the 4-bit indication information may be used to quantify the difference between a reference signal and the fifth threshold.
  • the threshold range, the first threshold, the second threshold, the third threshold, the fourth threshold, or the fifth threshold may be predefined or may be indicated by the first terminal device to the second terminal device via signaling, or the first threshold may be preconfigured (or configured).
  • the situation that the measurement result of a certain reference signal meets the condition and the situation that the condition is not met can be predefined, preconfigured, or indicated or configured by the network device to the first terminal device and the second terminal device through DCI, RRC signaling, SIB information or MIB information, or indicated or configured by the first terminal device to the second terminal device through SCI or PC5 RRC signaling, or indicated or configured by the second terminal device to the first terminal device through SCI or PC5 RRC signaling.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device have the same understanding of whether the measurement result of a certain reference signal meets the condition.
  • the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource is determined based on a first value and the time domain resource where the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals is located, and the first value is used to indicate: the time domain offset value between the time domain position where the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals is located and the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource, and the value of i is 1, 2..., K.
  • the first terminal device can accurately determine the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource, thereby improving the accuracy and efficiency of receiving feedback information.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device have a consistent understanding of the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource and which reference information is fed back on the first time-frequency resource, thereby ensuring the success rate and effectiveness of sending the feedback information.
  • the first time-frequency resource corresponds to a second beam
  • the second beam is predefined or preconfigured.
  • the second beam may be a receiving beam of the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device sends K reference signals to the second terminal device on K time-frequency resources respectively, including:
  • the first terminal device sends K reference signals and third indication information to the second terminal device on K time-frequency resources respectively, and the third indication information is used to indicate; the cumulative number of reference signals sent by the first terminal device, or the third indication information is used to indicate the sequence number, index or arrangement of the reference signals sent by the first terminal device, or the third indication information is used to indicate which reference signal the current reference signal is in the order of the K reference signals from early to late in the time domain, or the third indication information is used to indicate: the total number of reference signals sent by the first terminal device as of the current reference signal.
  • the first terminal device When the first terminal device sends K reference signals to the second terminal device on K time-frequency resources, a reference signal and a third indication information are sent on each time-frequency resource, and K third indication information need to be sent, and each third indication information corresponds to a reference signal or a beam.
  • the third indication information is used to indicate which beam maintenance the first terminal device and the second terminal device are currently performing, and the third indication information is similar to the function of C-DAI.
  • the second terminal device can effectively determine the possible leakage of a reference signal (or beam) or the problem with the beam, and can quickly adjust the subsequent beam reception. It can also improve the accuracy and efficiency of receiving reference signals, and can accurately determine the measurement results corresponding to each reference signal, thereby ensuring the accuracy of the feedback information.
  • a method for information transmission on a side link is provided, and the execution subject of the method can be a second terminal device, or a chip, a chip system, or a processor that supports the second terminal device to implement the method, and the method includes: the second terminal device receives K reference signals from the first terminal device on K time-frequency resources respectively, and different time-frequency resources in the K time-frequency resources do not overlap in the time domain, and K is an integer greater than 1; the second terminal device sends feedback information to the first terminal device on the first time-frequency resource, and the feedback information includes: first indication information for indicating whether the measurement result of the second terminal device measuring the K reference signals on the K time-frequency resources meets the condition, or second indication information for indicating the comparison result of the measurement result of the K reference signals with the threshold value.
  • the feedback information includes: indication information for indicating the measurement result corresponding to the K reference signals, and different time-frequency resources in the K time-frequency resources correspond to different beam directions. Each time-frequency resource is used to send a reference signal.
  • the method for information transmission on the side link provided in the second aspect is to feed back to the first terminal device within the same time unit (on the first time-frequency resource) the comparison results of the measurement results of multiple reference signals (i.e., multiple beams) with the threshold, or whether the measurement results of multiple reference signals meet the conditions, rather than directly feeding back the measurement results of multiple reference signals, and different reference signals correspond to different beam directions.
  • the length of the information used to indicate whether the comparison result or the measurement result meets the conditions is less than the length of the information used to indicate the measurement result, which can effectively reduce the amount of data that needs to be fed back, reduce the length of the feedback information and the communication resources required for the feedback information, thereby reducing the consumption of communication resources.
  • the K reference signals may be sent multiple times in succession, and the multiple sending of the K reference signals may be understood as: the sending of the K reference signals by the first terminal device is regarded as one time or a group of sendings, and the first terminal device may To send multiple times or groups continuously.
  • the condition is satisfied including: each measurement result of K reference signals in N consecutive measurements is greater than or equal to a first threshold, and the first indication information indicates: each measurement result of K reference signals in N consecutive measurements is greater than or equal to the first threshold, N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and each measurement result includes the measurement results of K reference signals.
  • the feedback information includes only one first indication information, and the length of the first indication information in the feedback information may be 1 bit, which is used to indicate that each measurement result in N consecutive measurements is greater than or equal to the first threshold (i.e., used to indicate that the condition is satisfied).
  • each measurement result in N consecutive measurements is less than or equal to the first threshold (i.e., used to indicate that the condition is not satisfied).
  • each measurement result includes the measurement results of K reference signals.
  • the amount of data required for feedback can be further reduced, and the feedback information or the first indication information only requires 1 bit, further reducing the consumption of communication resources.
  • the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals satisfies the condition including: the comparison result of the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals and the second threshold is within the threshold range, or the comparison result of the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals and the second threshold is greater than or equal to at least one of the third thresholds, i is 1, 2..., K, and the feedback information includes K first indication information, and the first indication information corresponding to the i-th reference signal is used to indicate: the measurement result of the i-th reference signal satisfies the condition or the measurement result of the i-th reference signal does not satisfy the condition.
  • the length of a first indication information can be 1 bit, or can be greater than 1 bit, for example, 2 bits or 3 bits, etc.
  • the amount of data required for feedback can be further reduced, and the feedback information or the first indication information only needs 1 bit, further reducing the consumption of communication resources.
  • the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals satisfies the condition including: the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals is greater than or equal to a fourth threshold value, the value of i is 1, 2..., K, and the feedback information includes K first indication information, and the first indication information corresponding to the measurement result of the i-th reference signal is used to indicate: the measurement result of the i-th reference signal satisfies the condition or the measurement result of the i-th reference signal does not satisfy the condition.
  • the first indication information corresponding to the i-th reference signal is used to indicate: the measurement result of the i-th reference signal satisfies the condition or the measurement result of the i-th reference signal does not satisfy the condition.
  • the length of a first indication information may be 1 bit, or may be greater than 1 bit, for example, 2 bits or 3 bits, etc.
  • the amount of data that needs to be fed back may be further reduced, and the feedback information or the first indication information only requires 1 bit, further reducing the consumption of communication resources.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate that the measurement feedback information of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals includes K second indication information.
  • One second indication information is used to indicate the comparison result of the measurement result of a reference signal with the fifth threshold value, i is 1, 2..., K, and the feedback information includes K second indication information.
  • the length of one first indication information can be 1 bit, or can be greater than 1 bit, for example, 2 bits or 3 bits. The amount of data that needs to be fed back can be further reduced, and the feedback information or the first indication information only needs 1 bit, which further reduces the consumption of communication resources.
  • At least one of the threshold range, the first threshold, the second threshold, the third threshold, the fourth threshold or the fifth threshold may be predefined, or may be indicated by the first terminal device to the second terminal device via signaling, or the first threshold may be preconfigured (or configured).
  • the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource is determined based on a first value and the time domain resource where the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals is located, and the first value is used to indicate: the time domain offset value between the time domain position where the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals is located and the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource, and the value of i is 1, 2..., K.
  • the second terminal device can accurately determine the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource, thereby improving the accuracy and efficiency of receiving feedback information.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device have a consistent understanding of the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource and which reference information is fed back on the first time-frequency resource, thereby ensuring the success rate and effectiveness of sending feedback information.
  • the first time-frequency resource corresponds to a third beam
  • the second beam is predefined or preconfigured.
  • the third beam may be a transmitting beam of the second terminal device.
  • the second terminal device receives K reference signals from the first terminal device on K time-frequency resources respectively, including: the second terminal device receives K reference signals and third indication information from the first terminal device on the K time-frequency resources respectively, where the third indication information is used to indicate; a cumulative number of reference signals received by the second terminal device, Or the third indication information is used to indicate the sequence number, index or arrangement of the reference signal received by the second terminal device. Or the third indication information is used to indicate which reference signal the current reference signal is in the order of the K reference signals from early to late in the time domain, or the third indication information is used to indicate: the total number of reference signals sent by the first terminal device as of the current reference signal.
  • the second terminal device When the second terminal device receives K reference signals on K time-frequency resources, it receives a reference signal and a third indication information on each time-frequency resource.
  • the second terminal device needs to receive K third indication information, and each third indication information corresponds to a reference signal or a beam.
  • the third indication information is used to indicate which beam maintenance the first terminal device and the second terminal device are currently performing, and the third indication information is similar to the role of C-DAI.
  • the second terminal device can effectively determine the possible leakage of a reference signal (or beam) or the problem with the beam, and the subsequent beam reception can be quickly adjusted, and the accuracy and efficiency of the received reference signal can be improved.
  • the measurement result corresponding to each reference signal can be accurately determined, and the accuracy of the feedback information is guaranteed.
  • a communication device comprising: a module for executing each step in the above first aspect or any possible implementation of the first aspect (for example, including a processing module and an interface module), or a module for executing each step in the above second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect (for example, including a processing module and an interface module).
  • the device may be a terminal device, or a chip, a chip system, or a processor in the terminal device.
  • the technical effects corresponding to the third aspect and any possible implementation method of the third aspect can be referred to the technical effects corresponding to the first aspect and any implementation method of the first aspect, or the technical effects corresponding to the second aspect and any implementation method of the second aspect, and will not be repeated here.
  • a communication device comprising at least one processor and a memory, the at least one processor being configured to execute: the method in the first aspect or any possible implementation of the first aspect, or the method in the second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect.
  • the device may be a terminal device, or a chip, a chip system, or a processor in the terminal device.
  • the technical effects corresponding to the fourth aspect and any possible implementation method of the fourth aspect can be referred to the technical effects corresponding to the above-mentioned first aspect and any implementation method of the first aspect, or the technical effects corresponding to the second aspect and any implementation method of the second aspect, and will not be repeated here.
  • a communication device comprising at least one processor and an interface circuit, the at least one processor being used to execute: the method in the first aspect or any possible implementation of the first aspect, or the method in the second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect.
  • the device may be a terminal device, or a chip, a chip system, or a processor in the terminal device.
  • the technical effects corresponding to the fifth aspect and any possible implementation method of the fifth aspect can be referred to the technical effects corresponding to the above-mentioned first aspect and any implementation method of the first aspect, or the technical effects corresponding to the second aspect and any implementation method of the second aspect, and will not be repeated here.
  • a terminal device which includes the communication device provided in the third aspect, or the terminal device includes the communication device provided in the fourth aspect, or the terminal device includes the communication device provided in the fifth aspect.
  • the technical effects corresponding to the sixth aspect and any possible implementation method of the sixth aspect can be referred to the technical effects corresponding to the above-mentioned first aspect and any implementation method of the first aspect, or the technical effects corresponding to the second aspect and any implementation method of the second aspect, and will not be repeated here.
  • a computer program product which includes a computer program, which, when executed by a processor, is used to execute the method in the above first aspect or any possible implementation of the first aspect, or the above second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect.
  • the technical effects corresponding to the seventh aspect and any possible implementation method of the seventh aspect can be referred to the technical effects corresponding to the above-mentioned first aspect and any implementation method of the first aspect, or the technical effects corresponding to the second aspect and any implementation method of the second aspect, and will not be repeated here.
  • a computer-readable storage medium in which a computer program is stored.
  • the computer program When the computer program is executed, it is used to execute the method in the above first aspect or any possible implementation of the first aspect, or the above second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect.
  • the technical effects corresponding to the eighth aspect and any possible implementation method of the eighth aspect can be found in the first aspect above.
  • the technical effects corresponding to any one of the implementation methods in the first aspect, or the technical effects corresponding to the second aspect and any one of the implementation methods in the second aspect, will not be repeated here.
  • a chip which includes: a processor, used to call and run a computer program from a memory, so that a communication device equipped with the chip executes: the method in the above first aspect or any possible implementation of the first aspect, or the above second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect.
  • the technical effects corresponding to the ninth aspect and any possible implementation method of the ninth aspect can be referred to the technical effects corresponding to the above-mentioned first aspect and any implementation method of the first aspect, or the technical effects corresponding to the second aspect and any implementation method of the second aspect, and will not be repeated here.
  • FIG1 is a schematic diagram of an example in which a base station uses SSB wide beam scanning and a UE uses wide beam scanning.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing an example in which different beams have different directions and different RSRPs corresponding to different beams.
  • FIG3 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the correspondence between an SSB index (index) and a PRACH channel (PRACH time-frequency resource).
  • FIG4 is a schematic diagram of an example in which a base station uses the optimal CSI-RS for BM beam to send a downlink signal to a UE.
  • FIG5 is a schematic diagram of an example of an offset value between a time slot where PDSCH data is located and a time slot where HARQ feedback of the PDSCH is located.
  • FIG6 is a schematic diagram of an example of an offset value between a time slot where a HARQ feedback is located and a time slot where all PDSCH data corresponding to the HARQ feedback are located.
  • FIG7 is a schematic diagram of an example of a semi-static codebook.
  • FIG8 is a schematic diagram of an example of a DAI value in downlink data transmission.
  • FIG9 is a schematic diagram of an example of using a semi-static codebook and a dynamic codebook.
  • FIG10 is a schematic diagram of another communication system provided in an embodiment of the present application to which the method provided in the present application can be applied.
  • FIG11 is a schematic interaction diagram of a method for transmitting information on a side link provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 12 is a schematic diagram of an example of K time-frequency resources and a first time-frequency resource provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG13 is a schematic diagram of an example of periodic transmission of K reference signals provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of an example of the content included in feedback information sent by a second terminal device to a first terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of another example of the content included in feedback information sent by a second terminal device to a first terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 16 is a schematic diagram of an example in which K time-frequency resources are periodic, provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 17 is a schematic diagram of an example provided by an embodiment of the present application in which a first terminal device sends a reference signal and a third indication information on each of K time-frequency resources.
  • FIG18 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 19 is a schematic block diagram of another communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 20 is a schematic block diagram of a terminal device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • first and second are used for descriptive purposes only and are not to be understood as indicating or implying relative importance or implicitly indicating the number of the indicated technical features.
  • a feature defined as “first” or “second” may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of the features.
  • plural means two or more.
  • the terminal device or network device includes a hardware layer, an operating system layer running on the hardware layer, and an application layer running on the operating system layer.
  • the hardware layer includes hardware such as a central processing unit (CPU), a memory management unit (MMU), and a memory (also called main memory).
  • the operating system can be any one or more computer operating systems that implement business processing through processes, such as the Linux operating system, Unix operating system, Android operating system, iOS operating system or windows operating system, etc.
  • the application layer includes applications such as browsers, address books, word processing software, instant messaging software, etc.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not specifically limit the specific structure of the execution subject of the method provided in the embodiments of the present application, as long as it is possible to communicate according to the method provided in the embodiments of the present application by running a program that records the code of the method provided in the embodiments of the present application, for example, the execution subject of the method provided in the embodiments of the present application may be a terminal device or a network device, or a functional module in a terminal device or a network device that can call and execute a program.
  • computer-readable media may include, but are not limited to: magnetic storage devices (e.g., hard disks, floppy disks or tapes, etc.), optical disks (e.g., compact discs (CDs), digital versatile discs (DVDs), etc.), smart cards and flash memory devices (e.g., erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), cards, sticks or key drives, etc.).
  • the various storage media described herein may represent one or more devices and/or other machine-readable media for storing information.
  • machine-readable medium may include, but is not limited to, wireless channels and various other media capable of storing, containing and/or carrying instructions and/or data.
  • Wireless communication technology has experienced rapid development in the past few decades, from the first generation of wireless communication systems based on analog communication systems, to the second generation (2G) wireless communication systems represented by the global system for mobile communication (GSM), to the 3G wireless communication systems represented by wideband code division multiple access (WCDMA), to the long-term evolution (LTE) 4G wireless communication systems and 5G wireless communication systems that have been widely used and achieved great success in the world.
  • 2G wireless communication systems represented by the global system for mobile communication (GSM)
  • WCDMA wideband code division multiple access
  • LTE long-term evolution
  • 4G wireless communication systems 5G wireless communication systems that have been widely used and achieved great success in the world.
  • the services supported by wireless communication systems have also evolved from the initial voice and text messages to the current support for wireless high-speed data communications.
  • D2D device-to-device
  • D2D communication technology refers to the technology of direct communication between two user equipments (user equipment can be called terminal equipment) or multiple user equipments (user equipment, UE).
  • Typical D2D technologies include: Bluetooth, wireless fidelity (wireless fidelity, WiFi), WiFi direct connection (WiFi-Direct), etc.
  • the air interface for direct communication between user equipment and user equipment is called PC5 interface, so the direct communication between user equipment and user equipment is also called PC5 communication.
  • the link between user equipment and user equipment can be called sidelink (SL), which corresponds to the uplink (UL) and downlink (DL) in the current communication system.
  • V2X vehicle to everything
  • V2X also known as “Internet of Vehicles”
  • V2V vehicle to vehicle
  • V2P vehicle to pedestrian
  • V2I vehicle to infrastructure
  • V2N vehicle to network
  • Typical scenarios of communication between smart terminals include: communication between mobile phones and wearable devices, communication between augmented reality (AR)/virtual reality (VR) helmets or glasses and smart screens, communication between sensors, etc.
  • AR augmented reality
  • VR virtual reality
  • wireless communication systems In wireless communication systems, according to the different frequency bands used, they can be divided into licensed bands and unlicensed bands.
  • the licensed band the user equipment uses spectrum resources based on the scheduling of the central node (such as the base station).
  • the central node such as the base station.
  • LTE communication system cellular mobile communications began to study the unlicensed band, giving rise to technologies such as LTE in unlicensed spectrum (LTE-U), Licensed Assisted Access (LAA), and Multi-line (Multe Fire).
  • LTE-U unlicensed spectrum
  • LAA Licensed Assisted Access
  • Multe Fire Multi-line
  • the unlicensed band has been used by some wireless communication devices, such as Wi-Fi.
  • the LTE system introduces a listen-before-talk (LBT) mechanism to enable it to coexist with Wi-Fi devices, while enabling LTE Uu interface communication on the unlicensed band.
  • LBT listen-before-talk
  • the Uu interface can also be understood as the interface for communication between the user equipment and the wireless access network equipment (such as the base station).
  • the Uu interface there is also a PC5 interface, which is the communication interface between UE and UE.
  • Enabling SL communication in the unlicensed band in the local area is An important evolution direction, the corresponding protocol technology can be collectively referred to as SL communication in the unlicensed frequency band (sidelink in Unlicensed spectrum, SL-U). Similar to the Uu interface, UE working through SL-U also needs to coexist with nearby Wi-Fi devices based on the LBT mechanism.
  • user devices using D2D technology are generally half-duplex devices, that is, the user device can only receive or send information at the same time and does not have the ability to send and receive at the same time.
  • a beam is a communication resource.
  • a beam can be a wide beam, a narrow beam, or other types of beams.
  • the technology for forming a beam can be beam forming technology or other technical means.
  • the beam forming technology can be specifically digital beam forming technology, analog beam forming technology, and hybrid digital/analog beam forming technology. Different beams can be considered as different resources.
  • the same information or different information can be sent through different beams.
  • multiple beams with the same or similar communication characteristics can be regarded as one beam.
  • a beam can include one or more antenna ports for transmitting data channels, control channels, and detection signals, etc.
  • Beam which can also be understood as a spatial resource, can refer to a transmit or receive precoding vector with energy transmission directivity.
  • Energy transmission directivity can refer to the fact that within a certain spatial position, the signal received after precoding processing by the precoding vector has better receiving power, such as satisfying the receiving demodulation signal-to-noise ratio, etc.
  • Energy transmission directivity can also refer to the fact that the same signal sent from different spatial positions received through the precoding vector has different receiving powers.
  • the same device (such as a network device or a terminal device) can have different precoding vectors, and different devices can also have different precoding vectors, that is, corresponding to different beams.
  • a device can use one or more of multiple different precoding vectors at the same time, that is, it can form one beam or multiple beams at the same time. From the perspective of transmission and reception, beams can be divided into transmitting beams and receiving beams.
  • the transmitting end device (also called the transmitting end device) sends a signal with a certain beamforming weight, so that the transmitted signal forms a beam with spatial directivity.
  • the transmitting end device can be a terminal device (the terminal device can also be called a user device); in the downlink direction, the transmitting end device can be a network device (the network device can also be called a wireless access network device).
  • the transmit beam refers to the use of multiple antennas to transmit a directional beam using beamforming technology.
  • Receive beam The receiving device receives the signal with a certain beamforming weight, so that the received signal forms a beam with spatial directivity.
  • the receiving device can be a network device; in the downlink direction, the receiving device can be a terminal.
  • the receive beam means that the direction of the received signal is also directional, pointing as much as possible to the direction of the transmitted beam, so as to further improve the received signal-to-noise ratio and avoid interference between users.
  • Transmit beamforming When a transmitting device with an antenna array sends a signal, a specific amplitude and phase are set on each antenna element of the antenna array so that the transmitted signal has a certain spatial directivity, that is, the signal power is high in some directions and low in some directions. The direction with the highest signal power is the direction of the transmit beam.
  • the antenna array includes multiple antenna elements, and the specific amplitude and phase attached are the beamforming weights.
  • Receive beamforming When a receiving device with an antenna array receives a signal, a specific amplitude and phase are set on each antenna element of the antenna array so that the power gain of the received signal has directionality, that is, the power gain is high when receiving signals in certain directions, and low when receiving signals in other directions.
  • the direction with the highest power gain when receiving a signal is the direction of the receive beam.
  • the antenna array includes multiple antenna elements, and the specific amplitude and phase added are the beamforming weights.
  • sending a signal using a certain transmit beam may also be expressed as: sending a signal using a certain beamforming weight.
  • “Receiving a signal using a certain receive beam” may also be expressed as: receiving a signal using a certain beamforming weight.
  • beam may also be called a spatial filter, or a spatial filter or spatial parameters
  • the transmitting beam may also be called a spatial transmitting filter
  • the receiving beam may also be called a spatial receiving filter.
  • a beam pair is based on the concept of beams, i.e., a transmit beam and a receive beam that have a beam pairing relationship.
  • a beam pair usually includes a transmit beam of a transmitting device and a receive beam of a receiving device.
  • both network equipment and terminal equipment can generate one or Multiple transmit beams, and one or more receive beams. Before transmitting data, beam alignment is required.
  • NR new radio
  • Reference signals can be used for channel measurement or channel estimation, etc.
  • Reference signal resources can be used to configure transmission properties of reference signals, such as time-frequency resource locations, port mapping relationships, power factors, and scrambling codes, etc.
  • a transmitting device can send reference signals based on reference signal resources, and a receiving device can receive reference signals based on reference signal resources.
  • the channel measurement involved in this application also includes beam measurement, that is, obtaining beam quality information by measuring the reference signal, and the parameters used to measure the beam quality include reference signal receiving power (RSRP), but are not limited to this.
  • RSRP reference signal receiving power
  • the beam quality can also be measured by reference signal receiving quality (RSRQ), signal-noise ratio (SNR), signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR), block error rate (BLER), channel quality indicator (CQI) and other parameters.
  • RSRQ reference signal receiving quality
  • SNR signal-noise ratio
  • SINR signal to interference plus noise ratio
  • BLER block error rate
  • CQI channel quality indicator
  • Reference signals may include, for example, CSI-RS, synchronization signal block (SSB), sounding reference signal (SRS), demodulation reference signal (DMRS), etc.
  • reference signal resources may include CSI-RS resources (CSI-RS resource), SSB resources, and SRS resources (SRS resource).
  • SSB can also be called synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block (synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block, SS/PBCH block), and the corresponding SSB resource can also be called synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block resource (SS/PBCH block resource), which can be abbreviated as SSB resource.
  • SS/PBCH block resource synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block resource
  • each reference signal resource may correspond to a reference signal resource identifier, for example, a CSI-RS resource indicator (CSI-RS resource indicator, CRI), an SSB resource indicator (SSBRI), or an SRS resource index (SRS resource index, SRI).
  • CSI-RS resource indicator CRI
  • SSBRI SSB resource indicator
  • SRS resource index SRI
  • the SSB resource identifier may also be referred to as an SSB index.
  • NR Uu can be understood as the communication between terminal equipment and network equipment (such as base stations) in 5G.
  • the NR Uu downlink beam management process is described in detail below. It includes three processes, namely, P1 process: coarse alignment process of base station and user equipment; P2 process: base station fine adjustment process; P3 process: UE fine adjustment process.
  • the base station uses SSB wide beam scanning, and the UE uses wide beam scanning.
  • Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of a base station using SSB wide beam scanning and a UE using wide beam scanning.
  • the base station sends SSB in different directions using different beams (the four beams in four different directions shown in Figure 1).
  • each SSB is sent using a different beam, and each SSB corresponds to a beam.
  • the UE measures the SSB after receiving the SSB through a receiving beam (or a wide beam), thereby obtaining a measurement result (such as RSRP) for each SSB.
  • the base station changes the direction of the SSB beam at different times, and the UE measures the receiving strength of the SSB in different directions, thereby determining the best SSB beam at this time.
  • the directions of the four different beams are different.
  • the RSRPs corresponding to different beams are different.
  • the following describes the SSB beam determination process of the base station side sending the downlink signal according to the two states of the UE:
  • the first type If the UE is in the initial access phase of the idle state, the UE feeds back to the base station by including the SSB index information of the optimal SSB beam (i.e., the beam corresponding to the SSB with the greatest reception intensity) in the preamble of random access.
  • the base station confirms the SSB beam (Tx beam) used for subsequent downlink signal transmission based on the SSB index (there is a mapping relationship between the SSB index and the beam).
  • the base station can directly reuse the beam when receiving the uplink signal.
  • the wide beam receiving downlink signal at the UE side is determined as follows:
  • the UE When the UE receives an SSB signal, it receives the signal by beam scanning according to the SSB time-frequency resource location informed in the system message (initial access phase in idle state) or the RRC reconfiguration message (data transmission phase in connected state), and can determine the wide beam for the UE to receive the downlink signal.
  • the UE can directly reuse the beam when sending an uplink signal.
  • the UE needs to match the measured RSRP of the SSB with the 6-bit SSB index. Therefore, the UE demodulates the DMRS from the physical broadcast channel (PBCH) to obtain the lowest 3 bits, and also obtains the highest 3 bits from the PBCH payload bits. After combining them, the received SSB index (ie, SSB index) is obtained.
  • PBCH physical broadcast channel
  • the UE since there is a corresponding relationship between the SSB index and the PRACH channel (i.e., the PRACH time-frequency resource), the UE determines the corresponding PRACH time-frequency resource based on the detected SSB index, and then sends a preamble to the base station on the determined PRACH time-frequency resource.
  • the base station can determine the corresponding SSB index by receiving the preamble on the corresponding PRACH channel, and thus determine the corresponding beam based on the SSB index.
  • the UE can obtain the best beam information by measuring the RSRP of the SSB, and then provide feedback on the corresponding PRACH time-frequency resource.
  • the base station can obtain the best beam information reported by the UE based on the PRACH channel.
  • the base station can determine the optimal SSB beam.
  • CSI-RS for BM beam can be understood as: the optimal beam obtained by beam measurement using CSI-RS.
  • the base station scans again with a narrower CSI-RS for BM beam near the optimal SSB beam.
  • the base station can map the CSI-RS time-frequency resources to the optimal SSB beam through the beam identifier (Identity, ID).
  • ID the beam identifier
  • the base station determines multiple beams near the optimal SSB beam, and then uses these beams to send CSI-RS to the UE respectively.
  • the UE measures the CSI-RS on different beams and feeds back the CSI-RS measurement results to the base station through the measurement report.
  • the base station determines the optimal CSI-RS beam (i.e., the beam corresponding to the CSI-RS with the greatest receiving intensity) as the transmit beam (Tx beam) used for subsequent downlink signal transmission.
  • the base station can directly reuse this beam when receiving uplink signals.
  • the base station can determine the optimal CSI-RS for BM beam.
  • P3 process UE fine tuning process.
  • the base station uses the optimal CSI-RS for BM beam (i.e., the CSI-RS for BM beam is fixed) to send a downlink signal to the UE. That is, the base station sends CSI-RS to the UE on the optimal beam determined by CSI-RS.
  • the UE uses beam scanning to receive the signal according to the CSI-RS for BM time-frequency resource position informed in the RRC configuration message sent by the base station, so as to determine the narrow beam in which the UE receives the downlink signal.
  • the UE can directly reuse the beam when sending an uplink signal.
  • the UE can determine the optimal beam.
  • a beam pair includes a transmit beam and a receive beam.
  • NR Uu measures the pairing between corresponding beam pairs through the beam maintenance process.
  • the base station sends CSI-RS signals by using different beams, and then the terminal measures the CSI-RS and reports the measurement results (such as RSRP, etc.) to the base station through the media access control element (MAC CE).
  • MAC CE media access control element
  • the above-mentioned P1-P3 process can be referred to.
  • the UEs first use the sidelink SSB (SL-SSB) synchronization signal to complete the coarse beam alignment process, and then complete the P2 and P3 processes (fine beam alignment) through the sidelink CSI-RS (SL CSI-RS).
  • SL-SSB sidelink SSB
  • P2 and P3 processes fine beam alignment
  • SL CSI-RS sidelink CSI-RS
  • the HARQ codebook can be understood as an arrangement of the positive acknowledgement (ACK)/negative acknowledgement (NACK) information corresponding to the PDSCH that needs to be fed back in a certain uplink time unit, which contains two meanings: First: which PDSCH ACK/NACKs are included in the HARQ codebook. Second: the order in which these PDSCH ACK/NACKs are arranged in the codebook. In other words, the feedback information ACK/NACKs of multiple PDSCHs that need to be sent in the same uplink time unit are arranged in a certain order as a string of continuous bits to form a HARQ codebook. Based on the HARQ codebook, the UE feeds back the HARQ feedback information of multiple bits corresponding to multiple downlink transport blocks (TB) or code block groups (CBG) to the base station at one time, effectively improving the efficiency of HARQ feedback.
  • TB downlink transport blocks
  • CBG code block groups
  • the base station defines the HARQ feedback status based on the information fed back by the UE (bit value is 1 or 0).
  • the HARQ feedback status includes ACK, NACK and discontinuous transmission (DTX).
  • ACK is a state defined by the base station based on the bit value of 1 (indicating correct reception) fed back by the UE, indicating that the transmission is successful;
  • NACK is a state defined by the base station based on the bit value of 0 (indicating erroneous reception) fed back by the UE, indicating that the transmission has failed;
  • DTX is a state defined when the base station does not receive feedback information from the UE, indicating that the transmission has failed.
  • the receiver (UE) needs to send HARQ feedback to the transmitter (base station).
  • the receiver and the scheduler are both on the base station side, when the base station side finds a decoding error, it can directly notify the UE to perform uplink retransmission without instructing the UE through HARQ feedback.
  • the base station can control the sending timing through the value K1 indicated by the HARQ feedback timing field (PDSCH-to-HARQ-timing field) in the downlink control information (DCI).
  • the HARQ feedback timing field K1 represents the time slot offset value between the PDSCH data and the UE sending the HARQ feedback information.
  • the base station can control the sending timing through the HARQ feedback timing field K1 in the DCI. If the UE receives PDSCH data in time slot n, the UE will send the corresponding HARQ feedback information in time slot n+K1. For example, as shown in Figure 5, assuming that the UE receives PDSCH data in time slot 0 and the value of K1 is 6, the UE needs to feedback the HARQ feedback of the PDSCH to the base station in time slot 6.
  • the HARQ feedback sequence sent at the same time domain position is called a HARQ codebook (HARQ-ACK codebook).
  • the HARQ codebook may contain one or more HARQ feedbacks, which may include TB-level HARQ feedback or CBG-level HARQ feedback. In the carrier aggregation scenario, it may also include HARQ feedback of multiple subcarriers.
  • the UE needs to feed back to the base station HARQ feedback corresponding to PDSCH1 (downlink data 1) on time slot 0, PDSCH2 (downlink data 2) on time slot 1, and PDSCH3 (downlink data 3) on time slot 2 in time slot 6.
  • the K1 value corresponding to time slot 0 is 6, the K1 value corresponding to time slot 0 is 5, and the K1 value corresponding to time slot 0 is 4.
  • the HARQ codebook includes a dynamic codebook mode and a semi-static codebook mode.
  • the HARQ-ACK codebook is generated differently in different codebook modes, which will be briefly introduced below.
  • Semi-static codebook also known as Type 1 HARQ Codebook.
  • the process of determining the semi-static codebook is divided into the following steps: 1) The terminal device determines that the time slot for sending ACK/NACK feedback information is the i-th time slot.
  • the specific time slot i is determined based on the physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) corresponding to the PDSCH. Assuming that there is a PDCCH in time slot n scheduling PDSCH to send PDSCH in time slot n+K0, and indicating that the ACK/NACK feedback information corresponding to the PDSCH is in time slot n+K0+K1, then the time slot n+K0+K1 is time slot i.
  • PDCCH physical downlink control channel
  • the terminal device determines the time slots where all PDSCHs that are to send feedback information in the i-th time slot are located. 3) The ACK/NACK corresponding to the PDSCH in each time slot of all the time slots where the PDSCH is located is connected in series in the order from front to back in the time domain, and all time slots are connected in the order of carrier frequency or serving cell index to generate a HARQ codebook and feedback it in time slot n+K0+K1.
  • the UE will feedback the HARQ information of the time slots that may transmit data corresponding to each K1 value included in the K1 set before the current time slot in each uplink time slot, unless the following situations occur:
  • time slots are uplink time slots themselves, and the HARQ information of the time slots is not fed back.
  • bandwidth part (BWP) switching occurs in UE, feedback starts from the downlink time slot after the BWP switching is completed, and the HARQ information of the time slot before the switching is discarded.
  • FIG7 shows a schematic diagram of a semi-static codebook.
  • “D” represents a downlink time slot
  • "U” represents an uplink slot
  • “S” represents an uplink and downlink coexistence slot.
  • the UE can receive data from up to 3 carriers (component carriers, CCs) at the same time, and the K1 set received by the UE is ⁇ 1, 3, 4, 6 ⁇ , then for the target HARQ feedback time slot (taking slot 8 as an example), the UE will feedback the HARQ information on slot 2, slot 4, slot 5 and slot 7 on slot 8, and whether the UE has received data on these time slots.
  • CCs component carriers
  • Carrier 1 transmits and feedbacks based on a single TB. And there is data transmission on slot 2, slot 4, slot 5 and slot 7.
  • Carrier 2 transmits and feedbacks based on TB, and a time slot can transmit up to 2 TB.
  • One TB is transmitted on slot 2
  • 2 TB are transmitted on slot 5
  • no data is transmitted on the remaining two time slots (slot 4 and slot 7).
  • Carrier 3 transmits and feedbacks based on CBG, and a time slot can transmit up to 4 CBGs.
  • Four CBGs are transmitted on slot 2, two CBGs are transmitted on slot 5, and no data is transmitted on the remaining two time slots (slot 4 and slot 7).
  • the HARQ information that needs to be fed back on slot 8 is a bit sequence composed of the feedback sequence of carrier 1, the feedback sequence of carrier 2, and the feedback sequence of carrier 3. Specifically, it includes:
  • the UE receives only one TB on carrier 1, so for each downlink transmission on carrier 1 (i.e. slot 2, slot 4, slot 5).
  • the HARQ information fed back in each time slot of slot 2, slot 4, slot 5 and slot 7 is 1 bit, which is indicated as "1".
  • the UE can receive up to 2 TBs simultaneously on carrier 2, so the HARQ information fed back for each downlink transmission on carrier 2 is 2 bits. Even if only one TB is received on slot 2, the bit corresponding to the other TB that has not been received will also feed back NACK. For carrier 2, 2 bits need to be fed back for each time slot in slot 2, slot 4, slot 5, and slot 7, respectively, as "23". The feedback sequence on carrier 2 requires 8 bits.
  • Carrier 3 is based on CBG transmission, and the maximum number of CBGs that can be transmitted is 4. Therefore, the HARQ information fed back for each downlink transmission on carrier 3 is 4 bits. Although only 2 CBG data are received on slot 5, NACK will also be fed back on the bit corresponding to the CBG that did not receive data. For carrier 3, 4 bits need to be fed back for each time slot in slot 2, slot 4, slot 5, and slot 7, respectively, represented as "4567". The feedback sequence on carrier 3 requires 16 bits.
  • slot 4 For each time slot in slot 2, slot 4, slot 5 and slot 7, 7 bits need to be fed back in time slot 8 (corresponding to carriers 1 to 3, different TBs or different CBGs), where the feedback information of each time slot is in the order from early to late: 1234567.
  • the Type 1 semi-static codebook feedback sequence contains 28 bits, but in fact only 13 bits are valid feedback. It can be seen that the disadvantage of the Type 1 semi-static codebook is that it occupies more resources, because HARQ feedback is required regardless of whether the corresponding TB or CBG has data transmission.
  • Dynamic codebook also known as Type 2 HARQ Codebook.
  • the terminal device detects PDCCH at each PDCCH monitoring occasion, and uses the time domain resource allocation field and PDSCH-to-HARQ-timing field in the detected PDCCH to first determine the time slot number of the PDSCH according to the time slot offset value K0 from PDCCH to PDSCH contained in the Time Domain Resource Allocation field and the time slot number of the PDCCH.
  • the PDCCH is numbered in time slot n. According to K0, the time slot number of the PDSCH can be determined as n+K0.
  • the HARQ-ACK timing is obtained according to the PDSCH-to-HARQ-timing field, that is, the time slot offset value K1 from PDSCH to the corresponding ACK/NACK feedback, so as to know the time slot number of the corresponding ACK/NACK feedback. For example, if the time slot number of the PDSCH is n+K0, the time slot number of the ACK/NACK feedback corresponding to the PDSCH is determined to be n+K0+K1. All ACK/NACKs that need to be sent in the same time slot are concatenated in the order of the PDCCH of the PDSCH corresponding to the ACK/NACK from front to back in the time domain to generate a HARQ-ACK codebook.
  • ACK/NACK feedback information corresponding to 4 data PDSCH 1 to PDSCH 4 is to be sent, and the PDCCH corresponding to PDSCH 1 to PDSCH 4 is PDCCH 1 to PDCCH 4, and PDCCH 1 to PDCCH 4 is in the order from front to back in the time domain, then the feedback information of PDSCH 1 to PDSCH 4 is concatenated in sequence to generate a HARQ codebook.
  • the dynamic codebook is different from the semi-static codebook.
  • the UE will only send HARQ feedback information to the location where data is transmitted, that is, the codebook size changes dynamically with the number of scheduled carriers, TBs or CBGs.
  • the HARQ feedback sequence only needs 13 bits (all feedback is ACK).
  • the dynamic codebook has obvious advantages in resource consumption. However, if DCI reception is abnormal, the number of HARQ feedback information sent by the UE may be inconsistent with the number of TBs or CBGs sent by the base station, which will cause all feedback contained in the current codebook to fail to be received correctly.
  • the NR protocol uses the downlink assignment index (DAI) field in the DCI to indicate the number of HARQ feedback messages that the UE needs to send.
  • DAI downlink assignment index
  • Counter DAI indicates the number of downlink scheduled transmissions of TB or CBG from the moment the DCI is received to the current moment.
  • C-DAI is used to indicate the number of downlink transmissions scheduled up to the DCI.
  • C-DAI counts in the carrier dimension first and then in the time domain dimension.
  • Total DAI (T-DAI) in carrier aggregation configuration indicates the total number of downlink transmissions on all carriers so far.
  • T-DAI indicates the total number of downlink transmissions on all carriers up to the monitoring occasion (MO) where the DCI is located.
  • Both C-DAI and T-DAI are decimal, but are actually represented by 2-bit loopback, that is, the signaling uses the modulo 4 modulus of the decimal count value.
  • FIG8 is a schematic diagram of a DAI value in downlink data transmission.
  • each box in Figure 8 represents a time slot, and each time slot transmits a TB (i.e., a data packet).
  • DAI is (x, y) means: the value of C-DAI is x, and the value of T-DAI is y.
  • DAI is (0, 1) means that the current transmission is the first data packet, and a total of 2 data packets have been transmitted so far.
  • DAI is (5, 5) means that the current transmission is the sixth data packet, and a total of 6 data packets have been transmitted so far.
  • DAI is (7, 7) means that the current transmission is the eighth data packet, and a total of 8 data packets have been transmitted so far. Assume that when packet loss occurs in time slot 3 on carrier 1, the UE will not receive the data packet with DAI (6, 7), that is, after receiving the data packet with DAI (5, 5), the UE skips receiving the data packet with DAI (6, 7) and receives the data packet with DAI (7, 7).
  • the UE can know that 8 confirmation messages need to be fed back based on the DAI of (7, 7), and can determine that the 7th data is lost based on the received data packets with DAI of (5, 5) and the data packets with DAI of (7, 7) and the value of C-DAI (the value of C-DAI is 7, indicating that the 8th data packet is currently being transmitted).
  • the dynamic codebook requires 8 bits of feedback information.
  • a semi-static codebook is used, as shown in FIG9, in the manner of first increasing the time slot and then increasing the carrier, the semi-static codebook requires 12 bits of feedback information.
  • the base station and UE maintain beams (or beam pairs) through CSI-RS reference signals, and report the measured CSI-RS RSRP and other measurement results through MAC CE.
  • a beam pair uses 7-bit quantization to measure the reference signal. Since multiple sets of beam pairs need to be maintained between a communication pair (a communication pair is a communication pair consisting of a UE and another UE), each (each set of) beam pairs needs 7-bit quantization to measure the reference signal, resulting in a communication pair using a lot of communication resources to feedback the measurement results of the reference signal (i.e., beam).
  • the amount of data that needs to be fed back is very large, and the communication resource consumption is serious.
  • a UE can also establish communication pairs with multiple other UEs. In this case, the amount of data that needs to be fed back will be very large, and the communication resource consumption will be even more serious.
  • the present application provides a method for information transmission on a side link, in which feedback information (i.e., measurement results) corresponding to multiple beams (i.e., multiple beam pairs) are aggregated and sent together, and the feedback information of each beam does not directly indicate the measurement result of the beam, for example, the measurement result includes: at least one of RSRP, RSRQ, SNR, BLER or SINR, but indicates the comparison result of the measurement result of the beam with a threshold, or indicates whether the beam measurement result meets the condition.
  • the information length required to indicate whether the measurement result meets the condition or the comparison result is less than the information length used to directly indicate the measurement result, which can effectively reduce the amount of data that needs to be fed back.
  • the comparison results of the measurement results of multiple reference signals with the threshold, or the feedback of whether the measurement results of multiple reference signals meet the conditions are fed back in the same time unit, instead of directly feeding back the measurement results of multiple reference signals, and different reference signals correspond to different beam directions (different reference signals are sent using different beams).
  • the length of information used to indicate whether the comparison result or measurement result meets the conditions is less than the length of information used to directly indicate the measurement result, which can effectively reduce the amount of data required for feedback, reduce the length of the feedback information and the communication resources required for the feedback information. In this way, the amount of data required for feedback can be effectively reduced, thereby reducing the consumption of communication resources.
  • the method provided in the present application can be applied in the scenario of side link communication.
  • FIG10 is a schematic diagram of a communication system to which the method provided in the present application can be applied.
  • terminal device 1 and terminal device 2 are both within the coverage of the same network device.
  • terminal device 1 is within the coverage of the network device, and terminal device 2 is not within the coverage of the network device.
  • terminal device 1 is within the coverage of network device 1, and terminal device 2 is within the coverage of network device 2.
  • Terminal device 1 can communicate with terminal device 2 using sidelink communication resources in a manner of base station scheduling, and the communication resources may include authorized frequency bands and unauthorized frequency bands.
  • terminal device 1 may communicate without adopting the base station scheduling mode, and terminal device 1 may select resources from the resource pool, that is, select resources for sidelink communication from the resource pool, and the resources may include unauthorized frequency bands and unauthorized frequency bands.
  • terminal device 1 and terminal device 2 are not within the same Within the coverage range of a network device, that is, they are all within the non-coverage range, so the terminal device 1 and the terminal device 2 can use the resource self-selection method to build a side link for communication.
  • the spectrum used for communication on the side link may be an unlicensed frequency band, a licensed frequency band, or a dedicated frequency band, etc.
  • channel access needs to meet certain requirements, such as the need to perform LBT, etc.
  • the embodiments of the present application are not limited here.
  • the network device may also be referred to as: access network device, wireless access network device, wireless access network (RAN) node, RAN entity or access node, etc., constituting a part of the communication system to help terminal devices (including low-speed terminal devices and high-speed terminal devices) achieve wireless access.
  • access network device wireless access network device
  • RAN wireless access network
  • RAN entity or access node constituting a part of the communication system to help terminal devices (including low-speed terminal devices and high-speed terminal devices) achieve wireless access.
  • the network device can be any device with wireless transceiver functions.
  • it includes: traditional macro base stations (evolved node B, eNB) in traditional universal mobile telecommunications systems (UMTS) and LTE communication systems, micro base stations (eNB) in heterogeneous networks (HetNet) scenarios, baseband processing units (BBU) and remote radio units (RRU) in distributed base station scenarios, baseband pools (BBU pool) RRU in cloud radio access networks (CRAN) scenarios, gNBs in future wireless communication systems, base stations of subsequent evolution of 3GPP, access nodes in WiFi systems, wireless relay nodes, wireless backhaul nodes, etc.
  • Base stations can be: macro base stations, micro base stations, micro-micro base stations, small stations, relay stations, or balloon stations, etc.
  • Network devices can also be servers, wearable devices, or vehicle-mounted devices, etc.
  • the network device may be a base station, an evolved NodeB (eNodeB), an access point (AP), a transmission reception point (TRP), a next-generation base station in a sixth-generation (6G) mobile communication system, a base station in a future mobile communication system, etc.
  • the network device may also be a relay node or a host node, or a wireless controller in a CRAN scenario.
  • the network device may also be an access network device in V2X technology, such as a road side unit (RSU). All or part of the functions of the network device in this application may also be implemented by software functions running on hardware, or by virtualization functions instantiated on a platform (such as a cloud platform).
  • the network device in this application may also be a logical node, a logical module or software that can implement all or part of the functions of a wireless access network device.
  • a network device e.g., gNB
  • a network device can consist of a gNB centralized unit (CU) and one or more gNB distributed units (DU).
  • the gNB-CU and gNB-DU are different logical nodes and can be deployed on different physical devices or on the same physical device.
  • the terminal device may also be referred to as a terminal, a user equipment (UE), a mobile station, a mobile terminal, etc.
  • the terminal can be widely used in various scenarios, for example, D2D, V2X communication, machine-type communication (MTC), Internet of Things (IOT), virtual reality, augmented reality, industrial control, automatic driving, telemedicine, smart grid, smart furniture, smart office, smart wear, smart transportation, smart city, etc.
  • the terminal may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a computer with wireless transceiver function, a wearable device, a vehicle, a drone, a helicopter, an airplane, a ship, a robot, a mechanical arm, a smart home device, etc.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the device form of the terminal.
  • the communication system shown in FIG10 is merely exemplary and should not impose any limitation on the communication system applicable to the embodiments of the present application.
  • the communication system shown in FIG10 may also include more or smaller terminal devices, and the network device or terminal device included in the communication system shown in FIG10 may be the various forms of network devices or terminal devices described above.
  • the embodiments of the present application are no longer shown one by one in the figures.
  • the method is described by taking the terminal device as the execution subject of the execution method as an example.
  • the terminal device in the present application may also be a chip, a chip system, or a processor that supports the terminal device to implement the method.
  • the embodiments of the present application are not limited here.
  • Figure 11 is a schematic interactive diagram of a method for information transmission on a side link provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method 1100 can be applied in the scenario shown in Figure 10, and of course can also be applied in other side link communication scenarios, and the embodiment of the present application is not limited here.
  • the method 1100 shown in Fig. 11 may include S1110 to S1130. The steps in the method 1100 are described in detail below in conjunction with Fig. 11 .
  • the first terminal device sends K reference signals to the second terminal device on K time-frequency resources respectively, different time-frequency resources among the K time-frequency resources do not overlap in the time domain, and K is an integer greater than 1.
  • the second terminal device receives K reference signals from the first terminal device on K time-frequency resources respectively.
  • the K reference signals correspond to different beams, that is, the K reference signals are sent by the first terminal device using different beams, and the directions of different beams (i.e., K beams) are different.
  • different time-frequency resources among the K time-frequency resources correspond to different beam directions.
  • the first terminal device sends K reference signals to the second terminal device on the K time-frequency resources using different beams, and each time-frequency resource is used to send a reference signal.
  • the first terminal device sends a total of K reference signals to the second terminal device on the K time-frequency resources.
  • the reference signal identifiers corresponding to the K reference signals are different, and different beams can be indicated by different reference signal identifiers.
  • different time-frequency resources among the K time-frequency resources do not overlap in the time domain.
  • the K time-frequency resources are arranged in order from early to late in the time domain.
  • the value of K is 3, the first time-frequency resource can occupy time slot n, the second time-frequency resource can occupy time slot n+1, and the third time-frequency resource can occupy time slot n+3.
  • the K time-frequency resources can be continuous or discontinuous in the time domain.
  • the value of K is 3
  • the second time-frequency resource can occupy time slot n+1
  • the third time-frequency resource can occupy time slot n+2
  • this situation is continuous in the time domain.
  • the first time-frequency resource can occupy time slot n
  • the second time-frequency resource can occupy time slot n+2
  • the third time-frequency resource can occupy time slot n+5
  • each time-frequency resource may occupy at least one symbol, at least one time slot, or at least one subframe in the time domain, etc.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the time domain length of each time-frequency resource.
  • a symbol is also called a time domain symbol, which may be an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (orthogonal frequency division multiplexing, OFDM) symbol or a single carrier frequency division multiple access (single carrier frequency division multiple access, SC-FDMA) symbol, wherein SC-FDMA is also called orthogonal frequency division multiplexing with transform precoding (orthogonal frequency division multiplexing with transform precoding, OFDM with TP).
  • OFDM orthogonal frequency division multiplexing
  • SC-FDMA single carrier frequency division multiple access
  • different time-frequency resources may or may not overlap in the frequency domain.
  • the frequency domain resources in the K time-frequency resources may include: a licensed frequency band, an unlicensed frequency band, or a dedicated frequency band, etc.
  • the embodiment of the present application is not limited here.
  • S1110 can also be expressed as: the first terminal device sends a reference signal to the second terminal device on each of the K time-frequency resources, and different time-frequency resources in the K time-frequency resources correspond to different beam directions. Alternatively, the first terminal device sends a reference signal to the second terminal device on each of the K time-frequency resources using different beams.
  • the second terminal device measures the reference signal on K time-frequency resources respectively, obtains the measurement results of the K reference signals, and determines whether the measurement results of the K reference signals meet the conditions, or determines the comparison results of the measurement results of the K reference signals with the threshold.
  • the second terminal device can detect the reference signal on K time-frequency resources respectively, and obtain the measurement result of the reference signal on each time-frequency resource. Since each time-frequency resource corresponds to a different beam, or each reference signal corresponds to a different beam, the measurement result of K reference signals can also be called the measurement result of K beams.
  • the reference signal sent by the first terminal device to the second terminal device in K time-frequency resources may include: CSI-RS, SSB, sidelink secondary synchronization signal (S-SSS), sidelink primary synchronization signal (S-SSS), or at least one of DMRS.
  • the reference signal may also include other reference signals, as long as the reference signal can be used for beam measurement, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit this.
  • the measurement result of the reference signal may include: at least one of the value of RSRP of the reference signal, the value of RSRQ of the reference signal, the value of SNR of the reference signal, or the value of SINR of the reference signal.
  • the measurement result of the reference signal may also include other measurement values, which are not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • reference signals all refer to reference signals sent by the first terminal device to the second terminal device, that is, reference signals on the side link, and these reference signals can all be used for beam measurement on the side link.
  • the second terminal device obtains the measurement results of K reference signals.
  • determine whether the measurement results of the K reference signals i.e., the measurement results of the K beams
  • generate indication information i.e., first indication information
  • the first indication information is used to indicate whether the measurement results of the K reference signals meet the conditions.
  • the second terminal device after the second terminal device obtains the measurement results of the K reference signals, it further determines the comparison results of the measurement results of the K reference signals with the threshold (the comparison results, for example, include differences, etc.), and generates indication information (i.e., second indication information) based on the comparison results.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate: the comparison results of the measurement results of the K reference signals with the threshold.
  • the second terminal device can obtain indication information corresponding to each reference signal measurement result. That is, each reference signal (each beam) corresponds to an indication information (first indication information or second indication information), and a first indication information is used to indicate whether the measurement result of a reference signal (or a beam) meets the condition, or a second indication information is used to indicate the comparison result of the measurement result of a reference signal (or a beam) with a threshold.
  • the second terminal device may determine whether the measurement results of the K reference signals meet the conditions, and obtain indication information corresponding to the measurement results of the K reference signals.
  • the measurement results of the K reference signals correspond to one indication information (first indication information)
  • the first indication information is used to indicate whether the measurement results of the K reference signals (the measurement results of the K beams) meet the conditions.
  • the second terminal device sends feedback information to the first terminal device in the first time-frequency resource, and the feedback information includes: first indication information for indicating whether the measurement results of the K reference signals meet the conditions, or at least one of second indication information for indicating the comparison results of the measurement results of the K reference signals with the threshold.
  • the first terminal device receives feedback information from the second terminal device on the first time-frequency resource.
  • the second terminal device may feed back first indication information for indicating whether the measurement results of K reference signals meet the conditions to the first terminal device on the first time-frequency resource.
  • the second terminal device feeds back the feedback information (or also referred to as a beam report) on whether the measurement results of K beams meet the conditions to the first terminal device in the same time unit, that is, the feedback information on whether the measurement results of multiple beams meet the conditions is aggregated in one time unit (time domain resource) for feedback.
  • the feedback information of each beam does not directly indicate the measurement result of the beam, but indicates whether the measurement result of the beam meets the conditions.
  • the length of the information used to indicate whether the measurement result meets the conditions is less than the length of the information used to indicate the measurement result, which can effectively reduce the amount of data that needs to be fed back, reduce the length of the feedback information and the communication resources required for the feedback information, thereby reducing the consumption of communication resources.
  • the second terminal device may feed back second indication information for indicating the comparison result between the measurement result of K reference signals and the threshold (the comparison result includes, for example, a difference, etc.) to the first terminal device on the first time-frequency resource.
  • the second terminal device feeds back the comparison result between the measurement results of K beams and the threshold to the first terminal device in the same time unit, that is, the comparison result between the measurement result of each beam in the multiple beams and the threshold is aggregated in one time unit (time domain resource) for feedback.
  • the feedback information of each beam does not directly indicate the measurement result of the beam, but indicates the comparison result between the measurement result of the beam and the threshold.
  • the length of the information used to indicate the comparison result is less than the length of the information used to indicate the measurement result, which can effectively reduce the amount of data that needs to be fed back, reduce the length of the feedback information and the communication resources required for the feedback information, thereby reducing the consumption of communication resources.
  • the first time-frequency resource in S1130 is different from the K time-frequency resources. Moreover, the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource is after the time domain positions corresponding to the K time-frequency resources.
  • the first time-frequency resource may occupy at least one symbol, at least one time slot, or at least one subframe in the time domain, etc.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the time domain length of the first time-frequency resource.
  • FIG12 shows a schematic diagram of K time-frequency resources and a first time-frequency resource.
  • the value of K is 4, and the time domain positions corresponding to the four time-frequency resources are: time slot 1 (slot 1), time slot 3, time slot 5, and time slot 7, respectively.
  • the first terminal device sends reference signals on these four time-frequency resources.
  • reference signal 1 on time slot 1 corresponds to beam 1 (reference signal 1 on time slot 1 is sent using beam 1)
  • reference signal 2 on time slot 3 corresponds to beam 2
  • reference signal 3 on time slot 5 corresponds to beam 3
  • reference signal 4 on time slot 7 corresponds to beam 4 (reference signal 4 on time slot 7 is sent using beam 4).
  • the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource is time slot 9. In other words, the beam feedback information on time slot 1, time slot 3, time slot 5, and time slot 7 is fed back on time slot 9.
  • the second terminal device detects the reference signals in time slot 1, time slot 3, time slot 5 and time slot 7 respectively, obtains the measurement results of the reference signals, and then sends the first indication information indicating whether the measurement results of the four reference signals meet the conditions, or the second indication information indicating the comparison results of the measurement results of the four reference signals with the threshold, to the first terminal device in time slot 9.
  • the second terminal device feeds back the feedback information (or beam report) of the four beams to the first terminal device in time slot 9. That is, the feedback information of multiple beams is aggregated in one time unit (time slot 9) for feedback.
  • the first indication information or second indication information corresponding to the reference signals on time slot 1, time slot 3, time slot 5 and time slot 7 may be positioned from early to late in the time domain as follows: the first indication information or second indication information corresponding to the reference signal on time slot 1, the first indication information or second indication information corresponding to the reference signal on time slot 3, the first indication information or second indication information corresponding to the reference signal on time slot 5, and the first indication information or second indication information corresponding to the reference signal on time slot 7. That is, in the feedback information sent by the second terminal device to the first terminal device, the first indication information or second indication information corresponding to each reference signal may be arranged in the order of the reference signals (the order of the beams).
  • S1130 can also be expressed as: the second terminal device sends indication information to the first terminal device on the first time-frequency resource, and the indication information is used to indicate the measurement results corresponding to the K reference signals.
  • the first terminal device receives indication information from the second terminal device on the first time-frequency resource, and the indication information is used to indicate the measurement results corresponding to the K reference signals.
  • the indication information may include: at least one of the first indication information or the second indication information mentioned above.
  • K reference signals may be sent multiple times in succession, and the multiple sending of K reference signals may be understood as: the sending of K reference signals by the first terminal device is regarded as one time or a group of sending, and the first terminal device may send multiple times or multiple groups continuously, for example, the first terminal device may send N times in succession, each time sending K reference signals, and N is an integer greater than or equal to 1. Then the first terminal device sends a total of N ⁇ K reference signals.
  • the “continuous” here may be understood as: taking the K reference signals as a whole or a group, after the first terminal device sends a group of reference signals (including K reference signals), after a period of time, the first terminal device sends another group of reference signals (also including K reference signals), then these two times are two consecutive sending of reference signals.
  • the time interval between any two sendings (that is, the time interval between the time of sending the last reference signal in the previous time and the time interval between sending the first reference signal in the next time) may be the same or different.
  • the same situation is the situation of periodically sending K reference signals. For any two reference signals sent, the number of reference signals is the same, and the beams used by the corresponding reference signals are also the same.
  • the order of the K reference signals may be the same or different. It is understandable that there is a correspondence between the beam and the resource identifier or the reference signal identifier, and the beams between the two groups can be associated or corresponded through the correspondence.
  • the second terminal device needs to detect N times and obtain the measurement results of the K reference signals each time. That is, the second terminal device needs to detect the measurement results of N ⁇ K reference signals.
  • FIG. 13 shows an example of a situation where K reference signals are periodically sent.
  • the time interval between two adjacent transmissions is ⁇ T.
  • Four reference signals are sent each time, namely reference signal 1 to reference signal 4.
  • Reference signal 1 corresponds to beam 1 (reference signal 1 is sent using beam 1)
  • reference signal 2 corresponds to beam 2 (reference signal 2 is sent using beam 2)
  • reference signal 3 corresponds to beam 3 (reference signal 3 is sent using beam 3)
  • reference signal 4 corresponds to beam 4 (reference signal 1 is sent using beam 4).
  • the reference signals sent for the second time also include reference signals 1 to reference signals 4.
  • Reference signal 1 corresponds to beam 1 (reference signal 1 is sent using beam 1)
  • reference signal 2 corresponds to beam 2 (reference signal 2 is sent using beam 2)
  • reference signal 3 corresponds to beam 3 (reference signal 3 is sent using beam 3)
  • reference signal 4 corresponds to beam 4 (reference signal 1 is sent using beam 4).
  • Reference signals 1 to 4 are also sent each subsequent time.
  • FIG. 13 a shows a case where the order of the K reference signals (i.e., the order of the K beams) is the same during two groups (twice) of transmissions.
  • FIG. 13 b shows a case where the order of the K reference signals (i.e., the order of the K beams) is different during two groups (twice) of transmissions.
  • the second terminal device needs to detect the measurement results of 12 reference signals, that is, it needs to detect the measurement results of 12 beams.
  • the second terminal device can respectively detect the measurement results of the reference signals sent each time, and each time it is necessary to detect the measurement results of K reference signals (ie, K beams).
  • the first terminal device when the first terminal device sends K reference signals multiple times (for example, N times) in succession Under this condition, if the measurement results of N ⁇ K reference signals are all greater than or equal to the first threshold (i.e., the condition is met), that is, the measurement results of the K reference signals in each of N consecutive measurements are greater than or equal to the first threshold.
  • the first threshold i.e., the condition is met
  • the second terminal device can generate a first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate that the measurement results of these N ⁇ K reference signals are greater than or equal to the first threshold (i.e., used to indicate that the condition is met), or used to indicate that the measurement results of the K reference signals in each of N consecutive measurements are greater than or equal to the first threshold (i.e., used to indicate that the condition is met).
  • a first indication information can indicate that the measurement results of N ⁇ K reference signals (the measurement results of N ⁇ K beams) meet the condition.
  • the length of the first indication information can be 1 bit, that is, in S1130, the feedback information includes only one first indication information, the length of the first indication information in the feedback information is 1 bit, and the value is a first value (for example, 0 or 1; or the indicated state is ACK or NACK), which is used to indicate that each measurement result in N consecutive measurements is greater than or equal to the first threshold (that is, used to indicate that the condition is met).
  • each measurement result includes the measurement results of K reference signals. In this way, the amount of data that needs to be fed back can be further reduced, and the communication resources required for the first indication information are less (the feedback information or the first indication information only needs 1 bit), further reducing the consumption of communication resources.
  • the length of the first indication information may also be 1 bit, that is, in S1130, the feedback information includes only one first indication information, the length of the first indication information in the feedback information is 1 bit, and the value is the second value (for example, 1 or 0; or the indicated state is NACK or ACK) used to indicate that each measurement result in N consecutive measurements is less than or equal to the threshold (i.e., used to indicate that the condition is not met), or used to indicate: each measurement result of the K reference signals in N consecutive measurements is less than or equal to the first threshold (i.e., used to indicate that the condition is not met).
  • the communication resources required for the first indication information are less (the feedback information or the first indication information only requires 1
  • the first indication information can be used to indicate that the measurement results of the N ⁇ K reference signals are all greater than or equal to the first threshold (i.e., used to indicate that the condition is met), or used to indicate that the measurement results of the N ⁇ K reference signals are all less than or equal to the first threshold (i.e., used to indicate that the condition is not met).
  • the feedback information in S1130 includes a first indication information.
  • the length of a first indication information can be 1 bit, or can be greater than 1 bit, such as 2 bits or 3 bits. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the length of the first indication information.
  • the second terminal device may not send the first indication information or feedback information to the first terminal device on the first time-frequency resource. If the measurement results of the N ⁇ K reference signals are all greater than or equal to the first threshold (that is, the condition is met), the second terminal device sends the first indication information or feedback information to the first terminal device on the first time-frequency resource.
  • the length of the first indication information can be 1 bit, that is, in S1130, the feedback information includes only one first indication information.
  • the first terminal device can determine that when the first terminal device sends K reference signals for multiple times (for example, N times), the measurement results of the N ⁇ K reference signals are all less than or equal to the threshold, that is, the condition is not met. If the first terminal device receives feedback information or first indication information sent by the second terminal device on the first time-frequency resource, it can be determined that when the first terminal device sends K reference signals multiple times (for example, N times) in succession, the measurement results of the N ⁇ K reference signals are all greater than or equal to the threshold, that is, the first indication information is used to indicate that the condition is met.
  • the second terminal device may also send the first indication information or feedback information to the first terminal device on the first time-frequency resource.
  • the length of the first indication information may be 1 bit, that is, in S1130, the feedback information only includes one first indication information. If the measurement results of the N ⁇ K reference signals are all greater than or equal to the first threshold (that is, the condition is met), the second terminal device does not send the first indication information or feedback information to the first terminal device on the first time-frequency resource.
  • the first terminal device can determine that: when the first terminal device sends K reference signals multiple times (for example, N times), the measurement results of the N ⁇ K reference signals are all greater than or equal to the first threshold, that is, the condition is met. If the first terminal device receives the feedback information or the first indication information from the second terminal device on the first time-frequency resource, the first terminal device can determine that: when the first terminal device sends K reference signals multiple times (for example, N times), the measurement results of the N ⁇ K reference signals are all greater than or equal to the first threshold, that is, the condition is met.
  • the terminal device sends feedback information or first indication information, it can be determined that when the first terminal device sends K reference signals multiple times (for example, N times) in succession, the measurement results of N ⁇ K reference signals are all less than or equal to the first threshold, that is, the first indication information is used to indicate that the condition is not met.
  • the length of the first indication information may also be greater than 1 bit, such as 2 bits or 3 bits, etc.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the measurement results of N ⁇ K reference signals are all less than or equal to the first threshold (i.e., the condition is met), or used to indicate that the measurement results of N ⁇ K reference signals are all greater than or equal to the first threshold (i.e., the condition is not met).
  • the feedback information in S1130 includes only one first indication information, and the length of the feedback information may be the same as the length of one first indication information. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the length of the first indication information.
  • the first terminal device when the first terminal device sends K reference signals for multiple consecutive times (for example, N times), in the N measurements, if the measurement results of the i-th reference signal in the K reference signals are greater than or equal to a threshold value (for example, a first threshold value) in consecutive m measurements of the second terminal device, then the first indication information corresponding to the i-th reference signal can be used to indicate: the measurement results of the i-th reference signal in consecutive m measurements are greater than or equal to the threshold value (that is, the first indication information is used to indicate that the condition is met).
  • a threshold value for example, a first threshold value
  • the first indication information corresponding to the i-th reference signal can be used to indicate: the measurement results of the i-th reference signal in consecutive m measurements are greater than or equal to the threshold value (that is, the first indication information is used to indicate that the condition is met).
  • the value of i is 1, 2..., K, and the value of m is an integer less than or equal to N.
  • the length of a first indication information can be 1 bit, and the value is a first value (for example, 0 or 1; or the indicated state is ACK), which is used to indicate that the measurement results of this reference signal in consecutive m measurements are greater than or equal to the threshold value (that is, used to indicate that the condition is met).
  • the feedback information includes several first indication information.
  • a first indication information needs to carry the reference signal identifier or beam identifier corresponding to the indication information.
  • the number of first indication information included in the feedback information may be less than or equal to K.
  • the first indication information corresponding to the i-th reference signal can be used to indicate that: the measurement results of the i-th reference signal in consecutive m measurements are all less than or equal to the threshold value (that is, used to indicate that the condition is not met).
  • the length of one first indication information can be 1 bit, and the value is a first value (for example, 1 or 0; or the indicated state is NACK), which is used to indicate that the measurement results of this reference signal in consecutive m measurements are all less than or equal to the threshold value (that is, used to indicate that the condition is not met).
  • the feedback information includes several first indication information.
  • One first indication information needs to carry the reference signal identifier or beam identifier corresponding to the indication information, and the number of first indication information included in the feedback information can be less than or equal to K.
  • the first indication information corresponding to the ith reference signal can be used to indicate that the measurement results of the ith reference signal in m consecutive measurements are all less than or equal to the threshold (that is, the condition is not met), or used to indicate that the measurement results of the ith reference signal in m consecutive measurements are all greater than or equal to the threshold (that is, the condition is met).
  • the feedback information in S1130 includes several first indication information.
  • the length of a first indication information can be 1 bit, or it can be greater than 1 bit, for example, 2 bits or 3 bits. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the length of the first indication information.
  • a first indication information needs to carry the reference signal identifier or beam identifier corresponding to the indication information.
  • the number of first indication information included in the feedback information may be less than or equal to K.
  • the above threshold (eg, the first threshold) may be predefined, or may be indicated by the first terminal device to the second terminal device via signaling, or the first threshold may be preconfigured (or configured).
  • the present application embodiment does not limit this.
  • predefined content or thresholds can be understood as information defined by standards, which does not require other equipment configurations and is recorded/written in advance in the hardware and/or software of the terminal device itself, or can be understood as information that cannot be changed by network equipment or other terminal devices.
  • Preconfigured content or thresholds can be understood as information recorded/written in advance in the hardware and/or software of the terminal device itself, which is determined by the manufacturer of the equipment and can be changed through software or hardware.
  • (pre)configuration can be divided into network equipment (pre)configuration and terminal equipment (pre)configuration. If it is network equipment (pre)configuration, it can be performed through system information block (SIB) or RRC signaling; if it is terminal equipment (pre)configuration, it can be performed through PC5-RRC signaling.
  • SIB system information block
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the first terminal device after the first terminal device detects the measurement result of a reference signal (assuming it is the i-th reference signal), it can also compare the measurement result of the i-th reference signal with a threshold to determine whether the measurement result of the i-th reference signal meets a condition.
  • the first indication information corresponding to the measurement result of the i-th reference signal can be used to indicate that the measurement result of the i-th reference signal meets the condition; or to indicate that the measurement result of the i-th reference signal does not meet the condition.
  • each reference signal (or each beam) corresponds to a first indication information, and a first indication information is used to indicate whether the measurement result of a reference signal (or a beam) meets or does not meet the condition.
  • the value of i is 1, 2..., K.
  • the feedback information in S1130 may include K first indication information.
  • the length of a first indication information may be 1 bit.
  • the feedback information includes K first indication information, and the length of the feedback information may be K bits. This can further reduce the amount of data that needs to be fed back, and the first indication information requires fewer communication resources (the feedback information only requires K bits), further reducing the consumption of communication resources.
  • the measurement result of the i-th reference signal may satisfy the condition that:
  • the comparison result of the measurement result of the i-th reference signal and the second threshold is within the threshold range, the comparison result of the measurement result of the i-th reference signal and the second threshold is greater than or equal to the third threshold, or the measurement result of the i-th reference signal is greater than or equal to the fourth threshold.
  • the above-mentioned threshold range, second threshold, third threshold or fourth threshold may be: a measurement value of a reference signal on the current best beam pair between the first terminal device and the second terminal device (for example, RSRP, SINR, BLER, etc.).
  • a measurement value of a reference signal on the current best beam pair between the first terminal device and the second terminal device for example, RSRP, SINR, BLER, etc.
  • At least one of the above-mentioned threshold range, the second threshold, the third threshold or the fourth threshold may also be predefined, preconfigured, or indicated or configured by the network device to the first terminal device and the second terminal device through information such as DCI, RRC signaling, SIB information or MIB, or indicated or configured by the first terminal device to the second terminal device through signaling such as side link control information (SCI) or PC5 RRC, or indicated or configured by the second terminal device to the first terminal device through signaling such as SCI or PC5 RRC.
  • SCI side link control information
  • PC5 RRC PC5 RRC
  • the measurement result of the i-th reference signal not satisfying the condition may include:
  • At least one of the comparison result of the measurement result of the i-th reference signal and the second threshold is less than or equal to the third threshold, or the measurement result of the i-th reference signal is less than or equal to the fourth threshold.
  • the comparison result between the measurement result of the reference signal and the threshold may include a difference (a value obtained by subtracting the threshold from the measurement result of the reference signal, or a value obtained by subtracting the measurement result of the reference signal from the threshold), etc.
  • a difference a value obtained by subtracting the threshold from the measurement result of the reference signal, or a value obtained by subtracting the measurement result of the reference signal from the threshold.
  • the measurement result corresponding to the i-th reference signal is RSRP i
  • the second threshold is TH2
  • the threshold range is ( ⁇ , ⁇ )
  • the value of ⁇ is greater than ⁇
  • can be a positive number or
  • the third threshold is ⁇
  • is greater than or equal to zero
  • the fourth threshold is TH4. If at least one of the following formulas (1) to (3) is satisfied, it is determined that the measurement result of the i-th reference signal satisfies the condition:
  • n ⁇ ⁇ 0 ⁇ n, (2), for example, n 1/2, 2.
  • n ⁇ ⁇ 0 ⁇ n, (4), for example, n 1/2, 2.
  • the situations in which the measurement result of a certain reference signal meets the conditions and the situations in which the conditions are not met may be predefined by the protocol, preconfigured, or indicated or configured to the first terminal device and the second terminal device by the network device through DCI, RRC signaling, SIB information or MIB information, or indicated or configured to the second terminal device by the first terminal device through SCI or PC5 RRC signaling, or indicated or configured to the first terminal device by the second terminal device through SCI or PC5 RRC signaling.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device have the same understanding of whether the measurement result of a certain reference signal meets the conditions.
  • the embodiments of the present application are not limited here.
  • the first indication information corresponding to the i-th reference signal may indicate ACK. If the measurement result of the i-th reference signal does not meet the condition, the first indication information corresponding to the i-th reference signal may indicate NACK.
  • the content included in the feedback information sent by the second terminal device to the first terminal device can be as shown in FIG14, reference signal 1
  • the first indication information corresponding to reference signal 3 (beam 3) and reference signal 4 (beam 4) respectively may indicate ACK
  • the first indication information corresponding to reference signal 3 (beam 3) may indicate NACK.
  • each reference signal corresponds to a first indication information
  • a first indication information is used to indicate whether the measurement result of a reference signal (or a beam) meets or does not meet the condition
  • the length of a first indication information may also be greater than 1 bit, such as 2 bits or 3 bits, etc., to indicate: indicating that the measurement result of a reference signal (or a beam) meets or does not meet the condition.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the length of the first indication information.
  • the first terminal device after the first terminal device detects the measurement result of a certain reference signal (assuming it is the i-th reference signal), it can also compare the measurement result of the i-th reference signal with the threshold to obtain a comparison result, and then send the comparison result to the first terminal device through the second indication information.
  • a certain reference signal assuming it is the i-th reference signal
  • the comparison result may include: the difference, difference range or difference interval between the measurement result of the i-th reference signal and the threshold (for example, the fifth threshold), that is, the interval where the value obtained by subtracting the fifth threshold from the measurement result of the i-th reference signal, or the interval where the value obtained by subtracting the fifth threshold from the measurement result of the i-th reference signal, or the interval where the value obtained by subtracting the measurement result of the i-th reference signal from the fifth threshold, or the interval where the value obtained by subtracting the measurement result of the i-th reference signal from the fifth threshold.
  • the threshold for example, the fifth threshold
  • the second indication information corresponding to the measurement result of the i-th reference signal can be used to indicate: the comparison result of the measurement result of the i-th reference signal and the fifth threshold (taking the difference as an example).
  • the feedback information in S1130 includes K second indication information. Each piece of second indication information is used to indicate a comparison result between a measurement result of a reference signal and a fifth threshold.
  • the fifth threshold may be: a measurement value of a reference signal corresponding to the current best beam pair between the first terminal device and the second terminal device (eg, RSRP, SINR, BLER, etc.)
  • a measurement value of a reference signal corresponding to the current best beam pair between the first terminal device and the second terminal device eg, RSRP, SINR, BLER, etc.
  • the fifth threshold may be predefined, preconfigured, or indicated or configured by the network device to the first terminal device and the second terminal device through DCI, RRC signaling, SIB information or MIB information, or indicated or configured by the first terminal device to the second terminal device through SCI or PC5 RRC signaling, or indicated or configured by the second terminal device to the first terminal device through SCI or PC5 RRC signaling.
  • the length of a second indication information may be X bits.
  • the feedback information includes K second indication information, and the length of the feedback information may be K ⁇ X bits. In this way, the amount of data that needs to be fed back can be further reduced, and the second indication information requires fewer communication resources.
  • the feedback information only requires K ⁇ X bits, which reduces the length of the feedback information and further reduces the consumption of communication resources.
  • the length of a second indication information may be 4 bits, and the 4-bit indication information may be used to quantify the difference between a measurement result of a reference signal and the fifth threshold.
  • the length of a second indication information is 4 bits, then these 4 bits can have 16 different states or values. Assume that: the measurement result of the i-th reference signal is RSRP i , the fifth threshold is RSRP t , and in the 4-bit indication information, the difference or step size of the results indicated by two adjacent bit states (converted to decimal, that is, two adjacent numerical values) is 1 dB.
  • bit states of the 4-bit second indication information can be used to represent (or indicate) a threshold set ⁇ -8dB, -7dB, ... 7dB, 8dB ⁇ .
  • the step size between two adjacent difference values may be (pre)configured or predefined, for example, the difference between the two difference values is 1 dB.
  • the difference of the fifth threshold of the measurement result of reference signal 1 is ⁇ 1
  • the difference of the fifth threshold of the measurement result of reference signal 2 is ⁇ 2
  • the difference of the fifth threshold of the measurement result of reference signal 3 is ⁇ 3
  • the difference of the fifth threshold of the measurement result of reference signal 4 is ⁇ 4.
  • the content included in the feedback information sent by the second terminal device to the first terminal device may be as shown in FIG15
  • the second indication information corresponding to reference signal 1 (beam 1) to reference signal 4 (beam 4) respectively may indicate the difference of the fifth threshold of the measurement result of the reference signal.
  • the comparison result between the measurement result of the i-th reference signal and the fifth threshold value may include other situations besides the difference, such as a difference range or a difference interval between the measurement result of a reference signal and the fifth threshold value.
  • the comparison result between the measurement result of the i-th reference signal and the fifth threshold value may include: The difference is within a certain range.
  • the second indication information corresponding to the measurement result of the ith reference signal can be used to indicate that the difference between the measurement result of the ith reference signal and the fifth threshold is within a certain range.
  • the length of a second indication information is 4 bits, assuming that: the measurement result of the ith reference signal is RSRP i , the fifth threshold is RSRP t , the ith reference signal corresponds to 4 bits of indication information (for example, "0000"), and in the 4 bits of indication information, the difference or step size of the result indicated by the two adjacent bit states (converted to decimal, that is, two adjacent numerical values) is 1dB.
  • the beam maintenance between the first terminal device and the second terminal device may also be carried out in a scenario based on carrier aggregation, that is, the first terminal device may send reference signals to the second terminal device on multiple carriers.
  • each reference signal may correspond to a first indication message or a second indication message
  • the feedback information needs to include the first indication message or the second indication message corresponding to the reference signals on multiple carriers.
  • the arrangement order of these multiple first indication messages or multiple second indication messages in the feedback information may be: first in increasing order of carrier and then in increasing order of time domain (for example, time slot), or first in increasing order of time domain (for example, time slot) and then in increasing order of carrier.
  • the embodiments of the present application are not limited here.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device know how many beam pairs (i.e., how many reference signals) feedback information needs to be reported, so the amount required for feedback (the number of reference signals) is also known to each other.
  • a time slot position for common feedback needs to be agreed upon between the first terminal device and the second terminal device, that is, the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource used to send feedback information is known to the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource can be determined by the time domain resource where the i-th reference signal among K reference signals is located and a first value, where the first value is used to indicate: the time domain offset value between the time domain position where the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals is located and the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource, where the value of i is 1, 2..., K.
  • the value of K is 4, and the time domain resource where the first reference signal (reference signal 1) is located is time slot 1.
  • the first value may be 8, and the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource is time slot 9.
  • the time domain resource where the second reference signal (reference signal 2) is located is time slot 3.
  • the first value may be 6, and the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource is time slot 9.
  • the time domain resource where the third reference signal (reference signal 3) is located is time slot 5.
  • the first value may be 4, and the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource is time slot 9.
  • the time domain resource where the fourth reference signal (reference signal 4) is located is time slot 7.
  • the first value may be 2, and the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource is time slot 9.
  • the first value set corresponding to the four reference signals is ⁇ 2, 4, 6, 8 ⁇ . If the second terminal device determines that it needs to send feedback information to the first terminal device in time slot 9, then based on the first value set, the second terminal device can determine: the feedback information sent to the first terminal device in time slot 9 includes: the first indication information or the second indication information corresponding to the reference signal 1 on time slot 1, the first indication information or the second indication information corresponding to the reference signal 2 on time slot 3, the first indication information or the second indication information corresponding to the reference signal 3 on time slot 5, and the first indication information or the second indication information corresponding to the reference signal 4 on time slot 7.
  • the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource can be indicated to the second terminal device by the first terminal device through signaling.
  • the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource is time slot n
  • time slot n can be indicated to the second terminal device by the first terminal device through a physical sidelink control channel (PSCCH).
  • PSCCH physical sidelink control channel
  • the first value set can be predefined or indicated to the second terminal device by the first terminal device through signaling.
  • the second terminal device After the second terminal device obtains the first value set and the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource, assuming that: the first value set is ⁇ m1, m2, m3, m4 ⁇ , and the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource is time slot n, the second terminal device can determine that: on time slot n, it is necessary to feedback: the first indication information or the second indication information of the reference signal (beam) on time slot n-m1, the first indication information or the second indication information of the reference signal (beam) on time slot n-m2, the first indication information or the second indication information of the reference signal (beam) on time slot n-m3, and the first indication information or the second indication information of the reference signal (beam) on time slot n-m4.
  • the second terminal device can accurately determine the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource, which improves Accuracy and efficiency of sending feedback information.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device have consistent understanding of the time domain location of the first time-frequency resource and which reference information is fed back on the first time-frequency resource, ensuring the success rate and effectiveness of sending feedback information.
  • the first terminal device when the first terminal device sends a reference signal to the second terminal device on the i-th time-frequency resource, the first value corresponding to the reference signal (beam) can be sent to the second terminal device.
  • the second terminal device can determine the need to send feedback information to the first terminal device on the n+m-th time slot based on the time domain position of the i-th time-frequency resource and the first value, assuming that the first value is m and the time domain position of the i-th time-frequency resource is time slot n.
  • the feedback information includes: at least one of the first indication information for indicating whether the measurement result of the i-th reference signal meets the condition, or the second indication information for indicating the comparison result of the measurement result of the i-th reference signal with the threshold.
  • the second terminal device can determine in this way on which time slot to send the feedback information of the reference signal to the first terminal device. In the above manner, the second terminal device can also accurately determine the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource, thereby improving the accuracy and efficiency of sending feedback information.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device have a consistent understanding of the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource and which reference information is fed back on the first time-frequency resource, thereby ensuring the success rate and effectiveness of sending the feedback information.
  • the time-frequency positions of the K time-frequency resources may be indicated by the first terminal device to the second terminal device through signaling.
  • the second terminal device knows which time-frequency resources to receive the reference signal.
  • the signaling may include SCI.
  • the K time-frequency resources as a whole may appear periodically, for example, as shown in FIG. 13 .
  • the K time-frequency resources may also appear periodically.
  • the K time-frequency resources are periodic, and the time interval between two adjacent time-frequency resources in the K time-frequency resources is the same.
  • the transmission beam (third beam) by which the second terminal device sends feedback information on the first time-frequency resource and the receiving beam (second beam) by which the first terminal device receives feedback information on the first time-frequency resource may be determined in advance by negotiation between the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • the first terminal device knows what beam is needed to receive feedback information at the corresponding position
  • the second terminal device knows what beam is needed to send feedback information at the corresponding position, for example, the second terminal device and the first terminal device use the best beam pair to send and receive feedback information, respectively.
  • the second beam and/or the third beam may be predefined, or may be preconfigured (or configured). The embodiment of the present application is not limited here.
  • the second terminal device since the beam is greatly affected by occlusion, if the second terminal device receives the maintained beam sequence and number normally, the above-mentioned feedback information method can greatly reduce the amount of data that needs to be fed back.
  • a beam pair may cause the number of reference signals (i.e., the number of beams) corresponding to the feedback information sent by the second terminal device to be inconsistent with the number of reference signals (i.e., the number of beams) sent by the first terminal device, and the first terminal device and the second terminal device have inconsistent understandings of the feedback information, and the feedback information will become invalid.
  • the first terminal device when it sends reference signals to the second terminal device on K time-frequency resources respectively, it can send an indication information (also referred to as the third indication information) to the second terminal device while sending each reference signal.
  • the third indication information is used to indicate: according to the order of the K reference signals from early to late in the time domain, the current reference signal is which reference signal, or is used to indicate: the total number of reference signals sent by the first terminal device as of the current reference signal, or is used to indicate the cumulative number of reference signals sent by the first terminal device, or is used to indicate the sequence number, index or arrangement of the reference signal sent by the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device sends a reference signal and a third indication information to the second terminal device on each time-frequency resource among the K time-frequency resources, and then needs to send K third indication information, and each third indication information corresponds to a reference signal or a beam.
  • the third indication information is used to indicate which beam maintenance the first terminal device and the second terminal device are currently performing.
  • the third indication information is similar to the function of C-DAI.
  • the second terminal device can effectively determine the possible leakage of a reference signal (or beam) or the problem with the beam, and can quickly adjust the subsequent beam reception. It can also improve the accuracy and efficiency of receiving reference signals, and can accurately determine the measurement results corresponding to each reference signal, thereby ensuring the accuracy of the feedback information.
  • the third indication information is used to indicate the cumulative number of reference signals received by the second terminal device, or is used to indicate the sequence number, index or arrangement of the reference signals received by the second terminal device.
  • the second terminal device receives K reference signals on K time-frequency resources, it receives one reference signal and one third indication information on each time-frequency resource, and then needs to receive K third indication information.
  • the value of K is 4, the time domain resource where the first reference signal (reference signal 1) is located is time slot 1, the time domain resource where the second reference signal (reference signal 2) is located is time slot 3, and the time domain resource where the third reference signal (reference signal 2) is located is time slot 4.
  • the time domain resource where the fourth reference signal (reference signal 3) is located is time slot 5, and the time domain resource where the fourth reference signal (reference signal 4) is located is time slot 7.
  • the first terminal device may send an indication message to the second terminal device to indicate: as of the current reference signal (the first reference signal), the total number of reference signals sent by the first terminal device.
  • the value indicated by the indication message may be 0, indicating: as of the current reference signal (the first reference signal), the total number of reference signals sent by the first terminal device is 1.
  • the first terminal device may send an indication message to the second terminal device to indicate: as of the current reference signal (the second reference signal), the total number of reference signals sent by the first terminal device.
  • the value indicated by the indication message may be 1, indicating: as of the current reference signal (the second reference signal), the total number of reference signals sent by the first terminal device is 2.
  • the first terminal device sends the third reference signal it may send an indication message to the second terminal device, indicating: the total number of reference signals sent by the first terminal device as of the current reference signal (the third reference signal).
  • the value indicated by the indication message may be 2, indicating: the total number of reference signals sent by the first terminal device as of the current reference signal (the third reference signal) is 3.
  • the first terminal device sends the fourth reference signal it may send an indication message to the second terminal device, indicating: the total number of reference signals sent by the first terminal device as of the current reference signal (the fourth reference signal).
  • the value indicated by the indication message may be 3, indicating: the total number of reference signals sent by the first terminal device as of the current reference signal (the fourth reference signal) is 4.
  • the second terminal device When the second terminal device receives the reference signal, it is assumed that the first, third and fourth reference signals are correctly received, and the second reference signal is not received.
  • the second terminal device can determine that the second reference signal is not received and the value indicated by the indication information corresponding to the second reference signal is 1, based on the value indicated by the indication information corresponding to the first reference signal being 0 and the value indicated by the indication information corresponding to the third reference signal being 2.
  • the second terminal device can determine that the measurement result of the second reference signal is 0, for example, the RSRP, RSRQ, SNR, or SINR value of the second reference signal is 0. Therefore, based on the measurement result of the second reference signal, it is determined whether the second reference signal meets the condition, or the comparison result of the measurement result of the second reference signal with the threshold is determined, so that the first indication information indicating whether the measurement result of reference signal 2 meets the condition, or the second indication information indicating the comparison result of the measurement result of reference signal 2 with the threshold is sent to the first terminal device in time slot 9.
  • the second terminal device can determine which beams or reference signals are not received based on the indication information, thereby improving the accuracy and efficiency of receiving reference signals. In addition, the accuracy of the feedback information is guaranteed.
  • the receiving beam information of the subsequent reference signal can be determined based on the receiving beam information of the previous reference signal.
  • the second terminal device can adjust the third beam (beam of the third reference signal) to obtain the fourth beam (beam of the fourth reference signal), and then use the fourth beam to receive the fourth reference signal, that is, the subsequent beam reception can be quickly adjusted to improve the accuracy and efficiency of receiving reference signals.
  • the method for information transmission on the side link provided by the present application feeds back the comparison results of the measurement results of multiple reference signals (i.e., multiple beams) with the threshold value in the same time unit, or feeds back whether the measurement results of multiple reference signals meet the conditions, rather than directly feeding back the measurement results of multiple reference signals, and different reference signals correspond to different beam directions.
  • the length of the information used to indicate whether the comparison result or the measurement result meets the conditions is less than the length of the information used to indicate the measurement result, which can effectively reduce the amount of data that needs to be fed back, reduce the length of the feedback information and the communication resources required for the feedback information, thereby reducing the consumption of communication resources.
  • the terminal device (including the first terminal device and the second terminal device) can be divided into functional modules according to the above method.
  • it can be divided into various functional modules corresponding to various functions, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module.
  • the above integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware. It should be noted that the division of modules in this embodiment is schematic and is only a logical function division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation.
  • the terminal device provided in the embodiment of the present application (including the first terminal device and the second terminal mentioned above) is used to perform any method of information transmission on the side link provided in the above method embodiment, so that the same effect as the above implementation method can be achieved.
  • the terminal device may include a processing module, a storage module and a communication module.
  • the processing module can be used to control and manage the actions of the terminal device.
  • it can be used to support the terminal device to execute the steps performed by the processing unit.
  • the storage module can be used to support the storage of program codes and data, etc.
  • the communication module can be used to support the communication between the terminal device and other devices.
  • the processing module can be a processor or a controller. It can implement or execute various exemplary logic boxes, modules and circuits described in conjunction with the disclosure of this application.
  • the processor can also be a combination that implements computing functions, such as a combination of one or more microprocessors, a combination of digital signal processing (DSP) and a microprocessor, etc.
  • the storage module can be a memory.
  • the communication module can specifically be a radio frequency circuit, a Bluetooth chip, a Wi-Fi chip, or other devices that interact with other electronic devices.
  • FIG18 shows a schematic block diagram of a communication device 1800 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1800 may correspond to the first terminal device or the second terminal device described in the above method 1100, or may be a chip or component applied to the first terminal device or the second terminal device, and each module or unit in the communication device 1800 is respectively used to execute each action or processing process performed by the first terminal device or the second terminal device in the above method 1100.
  • the communication device 1800 includes a processing module 1810 (or also referred to as a processing unit 1810 ) and an interface module 1820 (or also referred to as an interface unit 1820 ).
  • the interface module 1820 is used to perform specific signal transmission and reception under the drive of the processing module 1810 .
  • the interface module 1820 is used to: send K reference signals to the second terminal device on K time-frequency resources respectively, where different time-frequency resources among the K time-frequency resources do not overlap in the time domain, and K is an integer greater than 1;
  • the interface module 1820 is also used to: receive feedback information from the second terminal device on the first time-frequency resource, the feedback information including: first indication information for indicating whether the measurement results of the K reference signals meet the conditions, or at least one of second indication information for indicating the comparison results of the measurement results of the K reference signals with the threshold.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which receives the comparison result of the measurement results of multiple reference signals (i.e., multiple beams) fed back by the second terminal device within the same time unit (on the first time-frequency resource) and the threshold, or whether the measurement results of multiple reference signals meet the conditions, instead of directly feeding back the measurement results of multiple reference signals, and different reference signals correspond to different beam directions.
  • the length of the information used to indicate whether the comparison result or the measurement result meets the condition is less than the length of the information used to indicate the measurement result, which can effectively reduce the amount of data that needs to be fed back, reduce the length of the feedback information and the communication resources required for the feedback information, thereby reducing the consumption of communication resources.
  • different time-frequency resources among the K time-frequency resources correspond to different beam directions.
  • the comparison result between the measurement result of the reference signal and the threshold may include a difference value (a value obtained by subtracting the threshold from the measurement result of the reference signal, or a value obtained by subtracting the measurement result of the reference signal from the threshold).
  • the condition is satisfied including: each measurement result of the K reference signals in N consecutive measurements is greater than or equal to a first threshold, and the first indication information indicates: each measurement result of the K reference signals in N consecutive measurements is greater than or equal to the first threshold, N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and each measurement result includes the K reference signals. Measurement results.
  • the feedback information includes only one first indication information, and the length of the first indication information in the feedback information can be 1 bit, which is used to indicate that each measurement result in N consecutive measurements is greater than or equal to the first threshold (i.e., used to indicate that the condition is met).
  • each measurement result in N consecutive measurements is less than or equal to the first threshold (i.e., used to indicate that the condition is not met).
  • Each measurement result includes the measurement results of K reference signals. The amount of data that needs to be fed back can be further reduced, and the feedback information or the first indication information only requires 1 bit, further reducing the consumption of communication resources.
  • the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals satisfies the condition including: the comparison result of the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals and the second threshold is within the threshold range, or the comparison result of the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals and the second threshold is greater than or equal to at least one of the third thresholds, i is 1, 2..., K, and the feedback information includes K first indication information, and the first indication information corresponding to the i-th reference signal is used to indicate: the measurement result of the i-th reference signal satisfies the condition or the measurement result of the i-th reference signal does not satisfy the condition.
  • the length of one first indication information may be 1 bit, or may be greater than 1 bit, such as 2 bits or 3 bits.
  • the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals satisfies a condition including: the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals is greater than or equal to a fourth threshold, i is 1, 2..., K, and the feedback information includes K first indication information, and the first indication information corresponding to the measurement of the i-th reference signal is used to indicate: the measurement result of the i-th reference signal satisfies the condition or the measurement result of the i-th reference signal does not satisfy the condition.
  • the length of one first indication information may be 1 bit, or may be greater than 1 bit, for example, 2 bits or 3 bits.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate: a comparison result between a measurement result of an i-th reference signal among K reference signals and a fifth threshold, where i is 1, 2, ..., K, and the feedback information includes K second indication information.
  • One second indication information is used to indicate a comparison result between a measurement result of a reference signal and the fifth threshold.
  • the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource is determined based on a first value and the time domain resource where the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals is located, and the first value is used to indicate: the time domain offset value between the time domain position where the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals is located and the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource, and the value of i is 1, 2..., K.
  • the first time-frequency resource corresponds to a second beam (receiving beam), and the second beam is predefined or preconfigured.
  • the interface module 1820 is also used to: send K reference signals and third indication information to the second terminal device on K time-frequency resources, respectively, and the third indication information is used to indicate; the cumulative number of reference signals sent by the communication device 1800, or the third indication information is used to indicate the sequence number, index or arrangement of the reference signal sent by the communication device 1800.
  • the third indication information is used to indicate the number of beam maintenance currently performed by the communication device 1800 and the second terminal device, and the third indication information is similar to the role of C-DAI.
  • a third indication information can be sent on each time-frequency resource.
  • the communication device 1800 sends the i-th reference signal and the i-th third indication information to the second terminal device on the i-th time-frequency resource, and the i-th third indication information is used to indicate; the cumulative number of reference signals sent by the communication device 1800 is i, or is used to indicate the sequence number, index or arrangement of the reference signals sent by the communication device 1800.
  • the reference signal includes: at least one of: CSI-RS, SSB, S-SSS, S-PSS or DMRS.
  • the measurement result of the reference signal includes: at least one of: RSRP of the reference signal, RSRQ of the reference signal, SNR of the reference signal, or SINR of the reference signal.
  • the time domain resources of the first time-frequency resource are at least one OFDM symbol, at least one time slot, or at least one subframe
  • the time domain resources of the i-th time-frequency resource among K time-frequency resources are at least one OFDM symbol, at least one time slot, or at least one subframe, where the value of i is 1, 2..., K.
  • the interface module 1820 is used to: receive K reference signals from the first terminal device on K time-frequency resources respectively, where different time-frequency resources among the K time-frequency resources do not overlap in the time domain, and K is an integer greater than 1;
  • the interface module 1820 is also used to: send feedback information to the first terminal device on the first time-frequency resource, and the feedback information includes: a first indication for indicating whether the measurement result of the communication device measuring the K reference signals on the K time-frequency resources meets the condition information, or at least one of second indication information used to indicate a comparison result of the measurement results of the K reference signals with a threshold.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which feeds back the comparison results of the measurement results of multiple reference signals (i.e., multiple beams) with the threshold value in the same time unit (on the first time-frequency resource), or feeds back whether the measurement results of multiple reference signals meet the conditions, instead of directly feeding back the measurement results of multiple reference signals, and different reference signals correspond to different beam directions.
  • the length of the information used to indicate whether the comparison result or the measurement result meets the condition is less than the length of the information used to indicate the measurement result, which can effectively reduce the amount of data that needs to be fed back, reduce the length of the feedback information and the communication resources required for the feedback information, thereby reducing the consumption of communication resources.
  • different time-frequency resources among the K time-frequency resources correspond to different beam directions.
  • the comparison result between the measurement result of the reference signal and the threshold may include a difference value (a value obtained by subtracting the threshold from the measurement result of the reference signal, or a value obtained by subtracting the measurement result of the reference signal from the threshold).
  • the condition is satisfied including: each measurement result of K reference signals in N consecutive measurements is greater than or equal to a first threshold, and the first indication information indicates: each measurement result of K reference signals in N consecutive measurements is greater than or equal to the first threshold, N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and each measurement result includes the measurement results of K reference signals.
  • the feedback information includes only one first indication information, and the length of the first indication information in the feedback information may be 1 bit, which is used to indicate that each measurement result in N consecutive measurements is greater than or equal to the first threshold (i.e., used to indicate that the condition is satisfied).
  • each measurement result in N consecutive measurements is less than or equal to the first threshold (i.e., used to indicate that the condition is not satisfied).
  • each measurement result includes the measurement results of K reference signals.
  • the amount of data required for feedback can be further reduced, and the feedback information or the first indication information only requires 1 bit, further reducing the consumption of communication resources.
  • the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals satisfies the condition including: the comparison result of the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals and the second threshold is within the threshold range, or the comparison result of the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals and the second threshold is greater than or equal to at least one of the third thresholds, i is 1, 2..., K, and the feedback information includes K first indication information, and the first indication information corresponding to the measurement of the i-th reference signal is used to indicate: the measurement result of the i-th reference signal satisfies the condition or the measurement result of the i-th reference signal does not satisfy the condition.
  • the length of one first indication information may be 1 bit, or may be greater than 1 bit, such as 2 bits or 3 bits.
  • the condition that the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals satisfies includes: the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals is greater than or equal to a fourth threshold, i is 1, 2..., K, and the feedback information includes K first indication information, and the first indication information corresponding to the measurement result of the i-th reference signal is used to indicate: the measurement result of the i-th reference signal satisfies the condition or the measurement result of the i-th reference signal does not satisfy the condition.
  • the length of one first indication information may be 1 bit, or may be greater than 1 bit, for example, 2 bits or 3 bits.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate: a comparison result between a measurement result of an i-th reference signal among K reference signals and a fifth threshold, where i is 1, 2, ..., K, and the feedback information includes K second indication information.
  • One second indication information is used to indicate a comparison result between a measurement result of a reference signal and the fifth threshold.
  • the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource is determined based on a first value and the time domain resource where the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals is located, and the first value is used to indicate: the time domain offset value between the time domain position where the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals is located and the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource, and the value of i is 1, 2..., K.
  • the first time-frequency resource corresponds to a third beam (transmitting beam), and the third beam is predefined or preconfigured.
  • the interface module 1820 is also used to: receive K reference signals and third indication information from the first terminal device on K time-frequency resources respectively, the third indication information is used to indicate; the cumulative number of reference signals received by the communication device, or the third indication information is used to indicate the sequence number, index or arrangement of the reference signal received by the communication device.
  • the third indication information is used to indicate the number of beam maintenance currently performed by the communication device 1800 and the first terminal device, and the third indication information is similar to the function of C-DAI.
  • the reference signal includes: at least one of: CSI-RS, SSB, S-SSS, S-PSS or DMRS.
  • the measurement result of the reference signal includes: at least one of: RSRP of the reference signal, RSRQ of the reference signal, SNR of the reference signal, or SINR of the reference signal.
  • the time domain resources of the first time-frequency resource are at least one OFDM symbol, at least one time slot, or at least one subframe
  • the time domain resources of the i-th time-frequency resource among K time-frequency resources are at least one OFDM symbol, at least one time slot, or at least one subframe, where the value of i is 1, 2..., K.
  • the communication device 1800 may also include a storage module (unit), and the interface module (unit) 1820 may be a transceiver, an input/output interface, or an interface circuit.
  • the storage unit is used to store instructions executed by the interface module 1820 and the processing module 1810.
  • the processing module 1810, the interface module 1820, and the storage unit are coupled to each other, the storage unit stores instructions, the processing module 1810 is used to execute the instructions stored in the storage unit, and the interface module 1820 is used to perform specific signal transmission and reception under the drive of the processing module 1810.
  • the interface module 1820 may be a transceiver, an input/output interface or an interface circuit.
  • the storage unit may be a memory.
  • the processing module 1810 may be implemented by a processor.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic block diagram of another communication device 1900 provided by the present application.
  • the communication device 1900 may include a processor 1910, a memory 1920, a transceiver 1930, and a bus system 1940.
  • the various components of the communication device 1900 are coupled together through the bus system 1940, wherein the bus system 1940 may include a power bus, a control bus, and a status signal bus in addition to a data bus.
  • bus system 1940 may include a power bus, a control bus, and a status signal bus in addition to a data bus.
  • various buses are labeled as bus system 1940 in FIG. 19 .
  • FIG. 19 is only schematically drawn.
  • the communication device 1800 shown in FIG18 or the communication device 1900 shown in FIG19 can implement the steps performed by the first terminal device or the second terminal device in each embodiment of the aforementioned method 1100. Similar descriptions can refer to the descriptions in the aforementioned corresponding methods. To avoid repetition, they are not described here.
  • the communication device 1800 shown in Figure 18 or the communication device 1900 shown in Figure 19 may be a terminal device, or the terminal device may include the communication device 1800 shown in Figure 18 or the communication device 1900 shown in Figure 19.
  • terminal device in the present application may also be a chip, a chip system, or a processor that supports the terminal device to implement the method, and the embodiments of the present application are not limited here.
  • each unit in the above device can be fully or partially integrated into one physical entity, or they can be physically separated.
  • the units in the device can all be implemented in the form of software calling through processing elements; they can also be all implemented in the form of hardware; some units can also be implemented in the form of software calling through processing elements, and some units can be implemented in the form of hardware.
  • each unit can be a separately established processing element, or it can be integrated in a certain chip of the device.
  • it can also be stored in the memory in the form of a program, and called and executed by a certain processing element of the device.
  • the processing element here can also be called a processor, which can be an integrated circuit with signal processing capabilities.
  • each step of the above method or each unit above can be implemented by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor element or in the form of software calling through a processing element.
  • the unit in any of the above devices may be one or more integrated circuits configured to implement the above method, such as one or more application specific integrated circuits (ASIC), or one or more digital signal processors (DSP), or one or more field programmable gate arrays (FPGA), or a combination of at least two of these integrated circuit forms.
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuits
  • DSP digital signal processors
  • FPGA field programmable gate arrays
  • the unit in the device can be implemented in the form of a processing element scheduler
  • the processing element can be a general-purpose processor, such as a central processing unit (CPU) or other processor that can call a program.
  • CPU central processing unit
  • these units can be integrated together and implemented in the form of a system-on-a-chip (SOC).
  • FIG20 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a terminal device 2000 provided by the present application.
  • the above-mentioned communication device 1800 or communication device 1900 can be configured in the terminal device 2000.
  • the communication device 1800 or communication device 1900 itself can be the terminal device 2000.
  • the terminal device 2000 can execute the actions performed by the first terminal device or the second terminal device in the above-mentioned method 1100.
  • FIG20 only shows the main components of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device 2000 includes a processor, a memory, a control circuit, an antenna, and an input and output device.
  • the processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and to control the entire terminal device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program, for example, to support the terminal device to perform the actions described in the above-mentioned method embodiment for information transmission on the side link.
  • the memory is mainly used to store software programs and data, for example, to store the codebook described in the above-mentioned embodiment.
  • the control circuit is mainly used to convert the baseband signal and the radio frequency signal and to process the radio frequency signal.
  • the control circuit and the antenna can also be used together. It is called a transceiver, which is mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • Input and output devices such as touch screens, display screens, keyboards, etc., are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users.
  • the processor can read the software program in the storage unit, interpret and execute the instructions of the software program, and process the data of the software program.
  • the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and outputs the baseband signal to the RF circuit.
  • the RF circuit performs RF processing on the baseband signal and then sends the RF signal outward in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna.
  • the RF circuit receives the RF signal through the antenna, converts the RF signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor.
  • the processor converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
  • FIG. 20 shows only one memory and processor. In an actual terminal device, there may be multiple processors and memories.
  • the memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device, etc., which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the processor may include a baseband processor and a central processing unit.
  • the baseband processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data
  • the central processing unit is mainly used to control the entire terminal device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program.
  • the processor in Figure 20 integrates the functions of the baseband processor and the central processing unit.
  • the baseband processor and the central processing unit may also be independent processors, interconnected by technologies such as buses.
  • the terminal device may include multiple baseband processors to adapt to different network formats, and the terminal device may include multiple central processing units to enhance its processing capabilities.
  • the various components of the terminal device may be connected through various buses.
  • the baseband processor may also be described as a baseband processing circuit or a baseband processing chip.
  • the central processing unit may also be described as a central processing circuit or a central processing chip.
  • the function of processing the communication protocol and communication data may be built into the processor, or may be stored in the storage unit in the form of a software program, and the processor executes the software program to implement the baseband processing function.
  • the antenna and the control circuit with transceiver functions can be regarded as the transceiver unit 2001 of the terminal device 2000
  • the processor with processing function can be regarded as the processing unit 2002 of the terminal device 2000.
  • the terminal device 2000 includes a transceiver unit 2001 and a processing unit 2002.
  • the transceiver unit can also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiver device, etc.
  • the device used to implement the receiving function in the transceiver unit 2001 can be regarded as a receiving unit
  • the device used to implement the sending function in the transceiver unit 2001 can be regarded as a sending unit
  • the transceiver unit 2001 includes a receiving unit and a sending unit.
  • the receiving unit can also be referred to as a receiver, a receiver, a receiving circuit, etc.
  • the sending unit can be referred to as a transmitter, a transmitter or a sending circuit, etc.
  • the processor may be a central processing unit (CPU), or other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSP), application-specific integrated circuits (ASIC), field programmable gate arrays (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc.
  • CPU central processing unit
  • DSP digital signal processors
  • ASIC application-specific integrated circuits
  • FPGA field programmable gate arrays
  • a general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor, etc.
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memories.
  • the non-volatile memory may be a read-only memory (ROM), a programmable read-only memory (PROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), or a flash memory.
  • the volatile memory may be a random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • SRAM static RAM
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous DRAM
  • DDR SDRAM double data rate SDRAM
  • ESDRAM enhanced SDRAM
  • SLDRAM synchronous link DRAM
  • DR RAM direct rambus RAM
  • the above embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any other combination thereof.
  • the above embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions or computer programs.
  • the computer instructions or computer programs are loaded or executed on a computer, the processes or functions according to the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or downloaded from a computer. A computer-readable storage medium is transmitted to another computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer instructions can be transmitted from one website, computer, server or data center to another website, computer, server or data center by wired (e.g., infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means.
  • the computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or data center that contains one or more available media sets.
  • the available medium can be a magnetic medium (e.g., a floppy disk, a hard disk, a tape), an optical medium (e.g., a DVD), or a semiconductor medium.
  • the semiconductor medium can be a solid-state hard disk.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, the communication system comprising: the above-mentioned first terminal device and the above-mentioned second terminal device.
  • the communication system may also include the above-mentioned network device.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a computer readable medium for storing computer program code, wherein the computer program includes instructions for executing the method for transmitting information on the side link of the embodiment of the present application in the above method 1100.
  • the readable medium may be a read-only memory (ROM) or a random access memory (RAM), which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the present application also provides a computer program product, which includes instructions. When the instructions are executed, a first terminal device performs a terminal device operation corresponding to the above method, or a second terminal device performs a terminal device operation corresponding to the above method.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a system chip, which includes: a processing unit and a communication unit, the processing unit, for example, may be a processor, and the communication unit, for example, may be an input/output interface, a pin or a circuit, etc.
  • the processing unit may execute computer instructions to enable the chip in the communication device to execute any of the sidelink information transmission methods provided in the above embodiments of the present application.
  • any one of the communication devices provided in the above-mentioned embodiments of the present application may include the system chip.
  • the computer instructions are stored in a storage unit.
  • the storage unit is a storage unit within the chip, such as a register, a cache, etc.
  • the storage unit may also be a storage unit within the terminal that is located outside the chip, such as a ROM or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, RAM, etc.
  • the processor mentioned in any of the above may be a CPU, a microprocessor, an ASIC, or one or more integrated circuits for controlling the execution of the program of the above-mentioned method for main system information transmission.
  • the processing unit and the storage unit may be decoupled and respectively arranged on different physical devices, and connected by wire or wireless means to implement the respective functions of the processing unit and the storage unit, so as to support the system chip to implement the various functions in the above-mentioned embodiments.
  • the processing unit and the memory may also be coupled on the same device.
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application can be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or can include both volatile and non-volatile memories.
  • the non-volatile memory can be a read-only memory (ROM), a programmable read-only memory (PROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), or a flash memory.
  • the volatile memory can be a random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • SRAM static RAM
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous DRAM
  • DDR SDRAM double data rate SDRAM
  • ESDRAM enhanced SDRAM
  • SLDRAM synchronous link DRAM
  • DR RAM direct rambus RAM
  • uplink and downlink appearing in this application are used to describe the direction of data/information transmission in specific scenarios.
  • the "uplink” direction generally refers to the direction of data/information transmission from the terminal to the network side, or the direction of data/information transmission from a distributed unit to a centralized unit
  • the “downlink” direction generally refers to the direction of data/information transmission from the network side to the terminal, or the direction of data/information transmission from a centralized unit to a distributed unit.
  • uplink and downlink are only used to describe the transmission direction of data/information, and the specific starting and ending devices of the data/information transmission are not limited.
  • the methods in the embodiments of the present application may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
  • software When implemented using software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer programs or instructions.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer program or instruction may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted via the computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that a computer can access or a data storage device such as a server that integrates one or more available media.
  • the disclosed systems, devices and methods can be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only schematic.
  • the division of the unit is only a logical function division.
  • Another point is that the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed can be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, which can be electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place or distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the functions are implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, they can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application can be essentially or partly embodied in the form of a software product that contributes to the prior art.
  • the computer software product is stored in a storage medium and includes several instructions for a computer device (which can be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the methods described in each embodiment of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage media include: USB flash drives, mobile hard disks, read-only memory (ROM), and random access.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

A method for transmitting information on a sidelink and a communication apparatus. A comparison result between a measurement result of a plurality of reference signals (i.e., a plurality of beams) and a threshold is fed back within the same time unit, or whether a measurement result of a plurality of reference signals satisfies a condition is fed back, instead of directly feeding back the measurement result of the plurality of reference signals. Different reference signals correspond to different beam directions (different reference signals are sent by using different beams). A measurement result of a reference signal (beam) comprises at least one of RSRP, RSRQ, SNR, BLER, or SINR. The comparison result between the measurement result and the threshold may comprise, for example, a difference, a difference range, or a difference interval. The information length used for indicating whether the comparison result or the measurement result satisfies the condition is less than the information length used for directly indicating the measurement result, so that the amount of data that must be fed back may be effectively reduced, decreasing the length of feedback information and communication resources required by the feedback information.

Description

侧行链路上信息传输的方法和通信装置Method and communication device for information transmission on side link

本申请要求于2023年10月25日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为202311398111.8、申请名称为“侧行链路上信息传输的方法和通信装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims priority to the Chinese patent application filed with the State Intellectual Property Office on October 25, 2023, with application number 202311398111.8 and application name “Method and communication device for information transmission on side link”, the entire contents of which are incorporated by reference in this application.

技术领域Technical Field

本申请涉及通信领域,更为具体的,涉及一种侧行链路上信息传输的方法和通信装置。The present application relates to the field of communications, and more specifically, to a method and a communication device for transmitting information on a side link.

背景技术Background Art

在新空口(new radio,NR)通信系统中,基站和终端设备之间通过信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information reference signal,CSI-RS)等进行波束(或者波束对)的维护,并通过媒体接入控制元素(media access control element,MAC CE)上报测量的CSI-RS的测量结果。一个参考信号对应一个波束,或者说一个参考信号使用一个波束发送。一个参考信号对应着一个CSI-RS测量报告(CSI-reporting),或者说,一个波束对应着一个CSI-RS测量报告。在侧行链路上,终端设备和终端设备之间也需要进行波束(或者波束对)的维护。接收端设备和发送端设备在进行波束维护过程中,接收端设备需要上报参考信号的测量结果。目前接收端设备上报参考信号的测量结果时,需要反馈的数据量比较大,占用的资源比较多,通信资源消耗严重。In the new radio (NR) communication system, beams (or beam pairs) are maintained between base stations and terminal devices through channel state information reference signals (CSI-RS), and the measurement results of the measured CSI-RS are reported through media access control elements (MAC CE). One reference signal corresponds to one beam, or one reference signal is sent using one beam. One reference signal corresponds to one CSI-RS measurement report (CSI-reporting), or one beam corresponds to one CSI-RS measurement report. On the sidelink, beams (or beam pairs) also need to be maintained between terminal devices. During the beam maintenance process between the receiving device and the transmitting device, the receiving device needs to report the measurement results of the reference signal. At present, when the receiving device reports the measurement results of the reference signal, the amount of data that needs to be fed back is relatively large, which occupies more resources and consumes a lot of communication resources.

发明内容Summary of the invention

本申请提供了一种侧行链路上信息传输的方法和通信装置,将多个波束(即多个波束对)对应的反馈信息(即测量结果)聚合在一起发送,并且,每个波束的反馈信息不是直接指示该波束的测量结果,而是指示波束的测量结果与阈值的比较结果,或者指示波束测量结果是否满足条件。可以有效降低需要反馈的数据量,减少了反馈信息的长度以及反馈信息所需要的通信资源,通过这种方式,可以有效降低需要反馈的数据量,从而降低了对通信资源消耗。The present application provides a method and communication device for information transmission on a side link, which aggregates feedback information (i.e., measurement results) corresponding to multiple beams (i.e., multiple beam pairs) and sends them together, and the feedback information of each beam does not directly indicate the measurement result of the beam, but indicates the comparison result of the measurement result of the beam with a threshold, or indicates whether the beam measurement result meets a condition. The amount of data that needs to be fed back can be effectively reduced, the length of the feedback information and the communication resources required for the feedback information can be reduced, and in this way, the amount of data that needs to be fed back can be effectively reduced, thereby reducing the consumption of communication resources.

第一方面,提供了一种侧行链路上信息传输的方法,该方法的执行主体可以是第一终端设备,也可以是支持第一终端设备实现该方法的芯片、芯片系统、或处理器等,该方法包括:第一终端设备在K个时频资源上分别向第二终端设备发送K个参考信号,K个时频资源中不同的时频资源在时域上不重叠,K为大于1的整数;第一终端设备在第一时频资源上接收来自第二终端设备的反馈信息,该反馈信息包括:用于指示K个参考信号的测量结果是否满足条件的第一指示信息,或者用于指示K个参考信号的测量结果与阈值的比较结果的第二指示信息中的至少一种;或者,反馈信息包括;用于指示K个参考信号对应的测量结果的指示信息,K个时频资源中不同的时频资源对应不同的波束方向。每个时频资源用于发送一个参考信号。K个参考信号对应的参考信号标识不同,可以通过不同的参考信号标识来指示不同的波束。In the first aspect, a method for information transmission on a side link is provided. The execution subject of the method may be a first terminal device, or a chip, a chip system, or a processor that supports the first terminal device to implement the method. The method includes: the first terminal device sends K reference signals to the second terminal device on K time-frequency resources respectively, and different time-frequency resources in the K time-frequency resources do not overlap in the time domain, and K is an integer greater than 1; the first terminal device receives feedback information from the second terminal device on the first time-frequency resource, and the feedback information includes: first indication information for indicating whether the measurement results of the K reference signals meet the conditions, or at least one of the second indication information for indicating the comparison results of the measurement results of the K reference signals with the threshold; or, the feedback information includes: indication information for indicating the measurement results corresponding to the K reference signals, and different time-frequency resources in the K time-frequency resources correspond to different beam directions. Each time-frequency resource is used to send a reference signal. The reference signal identifiers corresponding to the K reference signals are different, and different beams can be indicated by different reference signal identifiers.

第一方面提供的侧行链路上信息传输的方法,在同一个时间单内(第一时频资源上)接收第二终端设备反馈多个参考信号(即多个波束)的测量结果与阈值的比较结果、或者多个参考信号的测量结果是否满足条件,而不是直接反馈多个参考信号的测量结果,不同的参考信号对应不同的波束方向。而用于指示比较结果或者测量结果是否满足条件的信息长度是少于用于指示测量结果的信息长度,可以有效降低需要反馈的数据量,减少了反馈信息的长度以及反馈信息所需要的通信资源,从而降低了对通信资源消耗。The method for information transmission on the side link provided by the first aspect is to receive the comparison results of the measurement results of multiple reference signals (i.e., multiple beams) fed back by the second terminal device within the same time unit (on the first time-frequency resource) and the threshold, or whether the measurement results of multiple reference signals meet the conditions, instead of directly feeding back the measurement results of multiple reference signals, and different reference signals correspond to different beam directions. The length of the information used to indicate whether the comparison result or the measurement result meets the conditions is less than the length of the information used to indicate the measurement result, which can effectively reduce the amount of data that needs to be fed back, reduce the length of the feedback information and the communication resources required for the feedback information, thereby reducing the consumption of communication resources.

示例性的,K个参考信号对应的参考信号标识不同,可以通过不同的参考信号标识来指示不同的波束。Exemplarily, the reference signal identifiers corresponding to the K reference signals are different, and different beams can be indicated by different reference signal identifiers.

示例性的,参考信号的测量结果和阈值的比较结果可以包括差值(参考信号的测量结果减去阈值得到的值,或者阈值减去参考信号的测量结果得到的值)。Exemplarily, the comparison result between the measurement result of the reference signal and the threshold may include a difference value (a value obtained by subtracting the threshold from the measurement result of the reference signal, or a value obtained by subtracting the measurement result of the reference signal from the threshold).

示例性的,第一时频资源在时域上可以占据至少一个符号、至少一个时隙或者至少一个子帧等。 Exemplarily, the first time-frequency resource may occupy at least one symbol, at least one time slot, or at least one subframe in the time domain.

示例性的,K个时频资源中的每个时频资源在时域上可以占据至少一个符号、至少一个时隙或者至少一个子帧等。Exemplarily, each of the K time-frequency resources may occupy at least one symbol, at least one time slot, or at least one subframe in the time domain.

示例性的,该参考信号包括:CSI-RS、SSB、S-SSS、S-PSS或者DMRS中的至少一种。Exemplarily, the reference signal includes: at least one of: CSI-RS, SSB, S-SSS, S-PSS or DMRS.

示例性的,该参考信号的测量结果包括:参考信号的RSRP、参考信号的RSRQ、参考信号的SNR、或者参考信号的SINR中的至少一种。Exemplarily, the measurement result of the reference signal includes: at least one of RSRP of the reference signal, RSRQ of the reference signal, SNR of the reference signal, or SINR of the reference signal.

在第一方面一种可能的实现方式中,K个参考信号可以是连续多次发送的,K个参考信号多次发送可以理解为:将第一终端设备发送K个参考信号视为一次或者一组发送,第一终端设备可以连续发送多次或者多组。In a possible implementation of the first aspect, K reference signals may be sent multiple times in succession. The multiple sending of K reference signals may be understood as: the sending of K reference signals by the first terminal device is regarded as one time or a group of sendings. The first terminal device may send multiple times or groups of sendings in succession.

在第一方面一种可能的实现方式中,满足条件包括:K个参考信号在连续N次测量中每次测量结果均大于或者等于第一阈值,第一指示信息指示:K个参考信号在连续N次测量中每次测量结果均大于或者等于第一阈值,N为大于或者等于1的整数,其中,每次测量结果均包括K个参考信号的测量结果。示例性的,反馈信息中只包括一个第一指示信息,反馈信息中第一指示信息的长度可以为1比特,用于指示连续N次测量中每次测量结果均大于或者等于第一阈值(即用于指示满足条件)。或者用于指示:用于指示连续N次测量中每次测量结果均小于或者等于第一阈值(即用于指示不满足条件)。其中,每次测量结果均包括K个参考信号的测量结果。可以进一步的降低需要反馈的数据量,反馈信息或者第一指示信息只需要1比特,进一步的降低通信资源的消耗。In a possible implementation of the first aspect, the condition is satisfied including: each measurement result of K reference signals in N consecutive measurements is greater than or equal to a first threshold, and the first indication information indicates: each measurement result of K reference signals in N consecutive measurements is greater than or equal to the first threshold, N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and each measurement result includes the measurement results of K reference signals. Exemplarily, the feedback information includes only one first indication information, and the length of the first indication information in the feedback information may be 1 bit, which is used to indicate that each measurement result in N consecutive measurements is greater than or equal to the first threshold (i.e., used to indicate that the condition is satisfied). Or used to indicate: used to indicate that each measurement result in N consecutive measurements is less than or equal to the first threshold (i.e., used to indicate that the condition is not satisfied). Wherein, each measurement result includes the measurement results of K reference signals. The amount of data required for feedback can be further reduced, and the feedback information or the first indication information only requires 1 bit, further reducing the consumption of communication resources.

在第一方面一种可能的实现方式中,K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量结果满足条件包括:第i个参考信号在连续m次测量的测量结果均大于或者等于阈值,第i个参考信号对应的第一指示信息可以用于指示:第i个参考信号在连续m次测量的测量结果均大于或者等于阈值(即第一指示信息用于指示满足条件)。反馈信息中包括的第一指示信息的个数可以小于或者等于K。一个第一指示信息需要携带该指示信息对应的参考信号标识或者波束标识。In a possible implementation of the first aspect, the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals satisfies the condition including: the measurement results of the i-th reference signal in m consecutive measurements are all greater than or equal to a threshold value, and the first indication information corresponding to the i-th reference signal can be used to indicate: the measurement results of the i-th reference signal in m consecutive measurements are all greater than or equal to the threshold value (that is, the first indication information is used to indicate that the condition is satisfied). The number of first indication information included in the feedback information may be less than or equal to K. One first indication information needs to carry the reference signal identifier or beam identifier corresponding to the indication information.

在第一方面一种可能的实现方式中,K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量结果满足条件包括:K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量结果和第二阈值的比较结果在阈值范围内,或者,K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量结果和第二阈值的比较结果大于或者等于第三阈值中的至少一个,i的取值为1,2…,K,反馈信息包括K个第一指示信息,第i个参考信号对应的第一指示信息用于指示:第i个参考信号的测量结果满足条件或者第i个参考信号的测量结果不满足条件。一个第一指示信息的长度可以为1比特,也可以大于1比特,例如为2比特或者3比特等。可以进一步的降低需要反馈的数据量,反馈信息或者第一指示信息只需要1比特,进一步的降低通信资源的消耗。In a possible implementation of the first aspect, the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals satisfies the condition including: the comparison result of the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals and the second threshold is within the threshold range, or the comparison result of the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals and the second threshold is greater than or equal to at least one of the third thresholds, i is 1, 2…, K, and the feedback information includes K first indication information, and the first indication information corresponding to the i-th reference signal is used to indicate: the measurement result of the i-th reference signal satisfies the condition or the measurement result of the i-th reference signal does not satisfy the condition. The length of a first indication information can be 1 bit, or can be greater than 1 bit, for example, 2 bits or 3 bits. The amount of data required for feedback can be further reduced, and the feedback information or the first indication information only needs 1 bit, further reducing the consumption of communication resources.

在第一方面一种可能的实现方式中,K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量结果满足条件包括:K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量结果大于或者等于第四阈值,i的取值为1,2…,K,反馈信息包括K个第一指示信息,第i个参考信号的测量结果对应的第一指示信息用于指示:第i个参考信号的测量结果满足条件或者第i个参考信号的测量结果不满足条件。第i个参考信号对应的第一指示信息用于指示:第i个参考信号的测量结果满足条件或者第i个参考信号的测量结果不满足条件。一个第一指示信息的长度可以为1比特,也可以大于1比特,例如为2比特或者3比特等。可以进一步的降低需要反馈的数据量,反馈信息或者第一指示信息只需要1比特,进一步的降低通信资源的消耗。In a possible implementation of the first aspect, the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals satisfies the condition including: the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals is greater than or equal to a fourth threshold value, the value of i is 1, 2…, K, and the feedback information includes K first indication information, and the first indication information corresponding to the measurement result of the i-th reference signal is used to indicate: the measurement result of the i-th reference signal satisfies the condition or the measurement result of the i-th reference signal does not satisfy the condition. The first indication information corresponding to the i-th reference signal is used to indicate: the measurement result of the i-th reference signal satisfies the condition or the measurement result of the i-th reference signal does not satisfy the condition. The length of a first indication information may be 1 bit, or may be greater than 1 bit, for example, 2 bits or 3 bits. The amount of data that needs to be fed back may be further reduced, and the feedback information or the first indication information only requires 1 bit, further reducing the consumption of communication resources.

在第一方面一种可能的实现方式中,第二指示信息用于指示:K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量反馈信息包括K个第二指示信息。一个第二指示信息用于指示一个参考信号的测量结果与第五阈值的比较结果,i的取值为1,2…,K,反馈信息包括K个第二指示信息。一个第一指示信息的长度可以为1比特,也可以大于1比特,例如为2比特或者3比特等。可以进一步的降低需要反馈的数据量,反馈信息或者第一指示信息只需要1比特,进一步的降低通信资源的消耗。In a possible implementation of the first aspect, the second indication information is used to indicate that the measurement feedback information of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals includes K second indication information. One second indication information is used to indicate the comparison result of the measurement result of a reference signal with the fifth threshold value, i is 1, 2..., K, and the feedback information includes K second indication information. The length of one first indication information can be 1 bit, or can be greater than 1 bit, for example, 2 bits or 3 bits. The amount of data that needs to be fed back can be further reduced, and the feedback information or the first indication information only needs 1 bit, which further reduces the consumption of communication resources.

例如,一个第二指示信息的长度可以为4比特,则可以利用这个4比特的指示信息来量化一个参考信号和第五阈值的差值。For example, the length of a second indication information may be 4 bits, and the 4-bit indication information may be used to quantify the difference between a reference signal and the fifth threshold.

示例性的,阈值范围、第一阈值、第二阈值、第三阈值、第四阈值或者第五阈值中的至少一 个可以预定义的,也可以是第一终端设备通过信令指示给第二终端设备的,或者,第一阈值可以是预配置(或者配置)的。Exemplarily, at least one of the threshold range, the first threshold, the second threshold, the third threshold, the fourth threshold, or the fifth threshold The first threshold may be predefined or may be indicated by the first terminal device to the second terminal device via signaling, or the first threshold may be preconfigured (or configured).

示例性的,某个参考信号的测量结果满足条件的情况以及不满足条件的情况可以是预定义的,预配置的、或者是网络设备通过DCI、RRC信令、SIB信息或MIB信息指示或配置给第一终端设备和第二终端设备的,或者是由第一终端设备通过SCI或PC5 RRC信令指示或配置给第二终端设备的,或者是由第二终端设备通过SCI或PC5 RRC信令指示或配置给第一终端设备的。也就是说,第一终端设备和第二终端设备对于某个参考信号的测量结果是否满足条件的理解是一致的。Exemplarily, the situation that the measurement result of a certain reference signal meets the condition and the situation that the condition is not met can be predefined, preconfigured, or indicated or configured by the network device to the first terminal device and the second terminal device through DCI, RRC signaling, SIB information or MIB information, or indicated or configured by the first terminal device to the second terminal device through SCI or PC5 RRC signaling, or indicated or configured by the second terminal device to the first terminal device through SCI or PC5 RRC signaling. In other words, the first terminal device and the second terminal device have the same understanding of whether the measurement result of a certain reference signal meets the condition.

在第一方面一种可能的实现方式中,第一时频资源的时域位置是根据第一取值和K个参考信号中第i个参考信号所在的时域资源确定,第一取值用于指示:K个参考信号中第i个参考信号所在的时域位置与第一时频资源的时域位置之间的时域偏移值,i的取值为1,2…,K。在该实现方式中,可以使得第一终端设备准确的确定出第一时频资源的时域位置,提高了反馈信息接收的准确性和效率。第一终端设备和第二终端设备对于第一时频资源的时域位置以及第一时频资源上反馈的是哪些参考信息的信息理解一致,保证了反馈信息发送的成功率和有效性。In a possible implementation of the first aspect, the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource is determined based on a first value and the time domain resource where the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals is located, and the first value is used to indicate: the time domain offset value between the time domain position where the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals is located and the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource, and the value of i is 1, 2…, K. In this implementation, the first terminal device can accurately determine the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource, thereby improving the accuracy and efficiency of receiving feedback information. The first terminal device and the second terminal device have a consistent understanding of the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource and which reference information is fed back on the first time-frequency resource, thereby ensuring the success rate and effectiveness of sending the feedback information.

在第一方面一种可能的实现方式中,第一时频资源对应第二波束,第二波束是预定义的或者预配置的。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the first time-frequency resource corresponds to a second beam, and the second beam is predefined or preconfigured.

示例性的,第二波束可以为第一终端设备的接收波束。Exemplarily, the second beam may be a receiving beam of the first terminal device.

在第一方面一种可能的实现方式中,第一终端设备在K个时频资源上分别向第二终端设备发送K个参考信号,包括:In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the first terminal device sends K reference signals to the second terminal device on K time-frequency resources respectively, including:

第一终端设备在K个时频资源上分别向第二终端设备发送K个参考信号和第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示;第一终端设备发送的参考信号的累计数量,或者第三指示信息用于指示第一终端设备发送的参考信号的序号、索引或者排列,或者第三指示信息用于指示按照K个参考信号在时域上从早到晚的顺序,当前参考信号是第几个参考信号,或者第三指示信息用于指示:截止到当前参考信号,第一终端设备发送的参考信号总数。第一终端设备在K个时频资源上向第二终端设备发送K参考信号时,在每个时频资源上发送一个参考信号和一个第三指示信息,则需要发送K个第三指示信息,每个第三指示信息对应一个参考信号或者对应一个波束。在该实现方式中,第三指示信息用于指示第一终端设备和第二终端设备当前做的第几次波束维护,第三指示信息类似于C-DAI的作用。通过第三指示信息,第二终端设备就可以有效的判断某一个参考信号(或者波束)的可能漏收或者是这个波束出现了问题,对于后面的波束接收就可以快速调整,并且可以提高接收参考信号的准确性和效率,可以准确的确定出每个参考信号对应的测量结果,保证了反馈信息的准确性。The first terminal device sends K reference signals and third indication information to the second terminal device on K time-frequency resources respectively, and the third indication information is used to indicate; the cumulative number of reference signals sent by the first terminal device, or the third indication information is used to indicate the sequence number, index or arrangement of the reference signals sent by the first terminal device, or the third indication information is used to indicate which reference signal the current reference signal is in the order of the K reference signals from early to late in the time domain, or the third indication information is used to indicate: the total number of reference signals sent by the first terminal device as of the current reference signal. When the first terminal device sends K reference signals to the second terminal device on K time-frequency resources, a reference signal and a third indication information are sent on each time-frequency resource, and K third indication information need to be sent, and each third indication information corresponds to a reference signal or a beam. In this implementation, the third indication information is used to indicate which beam maintenance the first terminal device and the second terminal device are currently performing, and the third indication information is similar to the function of C-DAI. Through the third indication information, the second terminal device can effectively determine the possible leakage of a reference signal (or beam) or the problem with the beam, and can quickly adjust the subsequent beam reception. It can also improve the accuracy and efficiency of receiving reference signals, and can accurately determine the measurement results corresponding to each reference signal, thereby ensuring the accuracy of the feedback information.

第二方面,提供了一种侧行链路上信息传输的方法,该方法的执行主体可以是第二终端设备,也可以是支持第二终端设备实现该方法的芯片、芯片系统、或处理器等,该方法包括:第二终端设备在K个时频资源上分别接收来自第一终端设备的K个参考信号,K个时频资源中不同的时频资源在时域上不重叠,K为大于1的整数;第二终端设备在第一时频资源向第一终端设备发送反馈信息,该反馈信息包括:用于指示第二终端设备在K个时频资源上对K个参考信号进行测量的测量结果是否满足条件的第一指示信息,或者用于指示K个参考信号的测量结果与阈值的比较结果的第二指示信息中的至少一种。或者,反馈信息包括;用于指示K个参考信号对应的测量结果的指示信息,K个时频资源中不同的时频资源对应不同的波束方向。每个时频资源用于发送一个参考信号。In the second aspect, a method for information transmission on a side link is provided, and the execution subject of the method can be a second terminal device, or a chip, a chip system, or a processor that supports the second terminal device to implement the method, and the method includes: the second terminal device receives K reference signals from the first terminal device on K time-frequency resources respectively, and different time-frequency resources in the K time-frequency resources do not overlap in the time domain, and K is an integer greater than 1; the second terminal device sends feedback information to the first terminal device on the first time-frequency resource, and the feedback information includes: first indication information for indicating whether the measurement result of the second terminal device measuring the K reference signals on the K time-frequency resources meets the condition, or second indication information for indicating the comparison result of the measurement result of the K reference signals with the threshold value. Or, the feedback information includes: indication information for indicating the measurement result corresponding to the K reference signals, and different time-frequency resources in the K time-frequency resources correspond to different beam directions. Each time-frequency resource is used to send a reference signal.

第二方面提供的侧行链路上信息传输的方法,在同一个时间单内(第一时频资源上)向第一终端设备反馈多个参考信号(即多个波束)的测量结果与阈值的比较结果、或者多个参考信号的测量结果是否满足条件,而不是直接反馈多个参考信号的测量结果,不同的参考信号对应不同的波束方向。而用于指示比较结果或者测量结果是否满足条件的信息长度是少于用于指示测量结果的信息长度,可以有效降低需要反馈的数据量,减少了反馈信息的长度以及反馈信息所需要的通信资源,从而降低了对通信资源消耗。The method for information transmission on the side link provided in the second aspect is to feed back to the first terminal device within the same time unit (on the first time-frequency resource) the comparison results of the measurement results of multiple reference signals (i.e., multiple beams) with the threshold, or whether the measurement results of multiple reference signals meet the conditions, rather than directly feeding back the measurement results of multiple reference signals, and different reference signals correspond to different beam directions. The length of the information used to indicate whether the comparison result or the measurement result meets the conditions is less than the length of the information used to indicate the measurement result, which can effectively reduce the amount of data that needs to be fed back, reduce the length of the feedback information and the communication resources required for the feedback information, thereby reducing the consumption of communication resources.

在第二方面一种可能的实现方式中,K个参考信号可以是连续多次发送的,K个参考信号多次发送可以理解为:将第一终端设备发送K个参考信号视为一次或者一组发送,第一终端设备可 以连续发送多次或者多组。In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the K reference signals may be sent multiple times in succession, and the multiple sending of the K reference signals may be understood as: the sending of the K reference signals by the first terminal device is regarded as one time or a group of sendings, and the first terminal device may To send multiple times or groups continuously.

在第二方面一种可能的实现方式中,满足条件包括:K个参考信号在连续N次测量中每次测量结果均大于或者等于第一阈值,第一指示信息指示:K个参考信号在连续N次测量中每次测量结果均大于或者等于第一阈值,N为大于或者等于1的整数,其中,每次测量结果均包括K个参考信号的测量结果。示例性的,反馈信息中只包括一个第一指示信息,反馈信息中第一指示信息的长度可以为1比特,用于指示连续N次测量中每次测量结果均大于或者等于第一阈值(即用于指示满足条件)。或者用于指示:用于指示连续N次测量中每次测量结果均小于或者等于第一阈值(即用于指示不满足条件)。其中,每次测量结果均包括K个参考信号的测量结果。可以进一步的降低需要反馈的数据量,反馈信息或者第一指示信息只需要1比特,进一步的降低通信资源的消耗。In a possible implementation of the second aspect, the condition is satisfied including: each measurement result of K reference signals in N consecutive measurements is greater than or equal to a first threshold, and the first indication information indicates: each measurement result of K reference signals in N consecutive measurements is greater than or equal to the first threshold, N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and each measurement result includes the measurement results of K reference signals. Exemplarily, the feedback information includes only one first indication information, and the length of the first indication information in the feedback information may be 1 bit, which is used to indicate that each measurement result in N consecutive measurements is greater than or equal to the first threshold (i.e., used to indicate that the condition is satisfied). Or used to indicate: used to indicate that each measurement result in N consecutive measurements is less than or equal to the first threshold (i.e., used to indicate that the condition is not satisfied). Wherein, each measurement result includes the measurement results of K reference signals. The amount of data required for feedback can be further reduced, and the feedback information or the first indication information only requires 1 bit, further reducing the consumption of communication resources.

在第二方面一种可能的实现方式中,K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量结果满足条件包括:K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量结果和第二阈值的比较结果在阈值范围内,或者,K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量结果和第二阈值的比较结果大于或者等于第三阈值中的至少一个,i的取值为1,2…,K,反馈信息包括K个第一指示信息,第i个参考信号对应的第一指示信息用于指示:第i个参考信号的测量结果满足条件或者第i个参考信号的测量结果不满足条件。一个第一指示信息的长度可以为1比特,也可以大于1比特,例如为2比特或者3比特等。可以进一步的降低需要反馈的数据量,反馈信息或者第一指示信息只需要1比特,进一步的降低通信资源的消耗。In a possible implementation of the second aspect, the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals satisfies the condition including: the comparison result of the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals and the second threshold is within the threshold range, or the comparison result of the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals and the second threshold is greater than or equal to at least one of the third thresholds, i is 1, 2…, K, and the feedback information includes K first indication information, and the first indication information corresponding to the i-th reference signal is used to indicate: the measurement result of the i-th reference signal satisfies the condition or the measurement result of the i-th reference signal does not satisfy the condition. The length of a first indication information can be 1 bit, or can be greater than 1 bit, for example, 2 bits or 3 bits, etc. The amount of data required for feedback can be further reduced, and the feedback information or the first indication information only needs 1 bit, further reducing the consumption of communication resources.

在第二方面一种可能的实现方式中,K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量结果满足条件包括:K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量结果大于或者等于第四阈值,i的取值为1,2…,K,该反馈信息包括K个第一指示信息,第i个参考信号的测量结果对应的第一指示信息用于指示:第i个参考信号的测量结果满足条件或者第i个参考信号的测量结果不满足条件。第i个参考信号对应的第一指示信息用于指示:第i个参考信号的测量结果满足条件或者第i个参考信号的测量结果不满足条件。一个第一指示信息的长度可以为1比特,也可以大于1比特,例如为2比特或者3比特等。可以进一步的降低需要反馈的数据量,反馈信息或者第一指示信息只需要1比特,进一步的降低通信资源的消耗。In a possible implementation of the second aspect, the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals satisfies the condition including: the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals is greater than or equal to a fourth threshold value, the value of i is 1, 2…, K, and the feedback information includes K first indication information, and the first indication information corresponding to the measurement result of the i-th reference signal is used to indicate: the measurement result of the i-th reference signal satisfies the condition or the measurement result of the i-th reference signal does not satisfy the condition. The first indication information corresponding to the i-th reference signal is used to indicate: the measurement result of the i-th reference signal satisfies the condition or the measurement result of the i-th reference signal does not satisfy the condition. The length of a first indication information may be 1 bit, or may be greater than 1 bit, for example, 2 bits or 3 bits, etc. The amount of data that needs to be fed back may be further reduced, and the feedback information or the first indication information only requires 1 bit, further reducing the consumption of communication resources.

在第二方面一种可能的实现方式中,第二指示信息用于指示:K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量反馈信息包括K个第二指示信息。一个第二指示信息用于指示一个参考信号的测量结果与第五阈值的比较结果,i的取值为1,2…,K,反馈信息包括K个第二指示信息。一个第一指示信息的长度可以为1比特,也可以大于1比特,例如为2比特或者3比特等。可以进一步的降低需要反馈的数据量,反馈信息或者第一指示信息只需要1比特,进一步的降低通信资源的消耗。In a possible implementation of the second aspect, the second indication information is used to indicate that the measurement feedback information of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals includes K second indication information. One second indication information is used to indicate the comparison result of the measurement result of a reference signal with the fifth threshold value, i is 1, 2…, K, and the feedback information includes K second indication information. The length of one first indication information can be 1 bit, or can be greater than 1 bit, for example, 2 bits or 3 bits. The amount of data that needs to be fed back can be further reduced, and the feedback information or the first indication information only needs 1 bit, which further reduces the consumption of communication resources.

示例性的,阈值范围、第一阈值、第二阈值、第三阈值、第四阈值或者第五阈值中的至少一个可以预定义的,也可以是第一终端设备通过信令指示给第二终端设备的,或者,第一阈值可以是预配置(或者配置)的。Exemplarily, at least one of the threshold range, the first threshold, the second threshold, the third threshold, the fourth threshold or the fifth threshold may be predefined, or may be indicated by the first terminal device to the second terminal device via signaling, or the first threshold may be preconfigured (or configured).

在第二方面一种可能的实现方式中,第一时频资源的时域位置是根据第一取值和K个参考信号中第i个参考信号所在的时域资源确定,第一取值用于指示:K个参考信号中第i个参考信号所在的时域位置与第一时频资源的时域位置之间的时域偏移值,i的取值为1,2…,K。在该实现方式中,可以使得第二终端设备准确的确定出第一时频资源的时域位置,提高了反馈信息接收的准确性和效率。第一终端设备和第二终端设备对于第一时频资源的时域位置以及第一时频资源上反馈的是哪些参考信息的信息理解一致,保证了反馈信息发送的成功率和有效性。In a possible implementation of the second aspect, the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource is determined based on a first value and the time domain resource where the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals is located, and the first value is used to indicate: the time domain offset value between the time domain position where the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals is located and the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource, and the value of i is 1, 2…, K. In this implementation, the second terminal device can accurately determine the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource, thereby improving the accuracy and efficiency of receiving feedback information. The first terminal device and the second terminal device have a consistent understanding of the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource and which reference information is fed back on the first time-frequency resource, thereby ensuring the success rate and effectiveness of sending feedback information.

在第二方面一种可能的实现方式中,第一时频资源对应第三波束,第二波束是预定义的或者预配置的。In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the first time-frequency resource corresponds to a third beam, and the second beam is predefined or preconfigured.

示例性的,第三波束可以为第二终端设备的发送波束。Exemplarily, the third beam may be a transmitting beam of the second terminal device.

在第二方面一种可能的实现方式中,第二终端设备在K个时频资源上分别接收来自第一终端设备的K个参考信号,包括:第二终端设备在K个时频资源上分别接收来自第一终端设备的K个参考信号和第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示;第二终端设备接收的参考信号的累计数量, 或者第三指示信息用于指示第二终端设备接收的参考信号的序号、索引或者排列。或者第三指示信息用于指示按照K个参考信号在时域上从早到晚的顺序,当前参考信号是第几个参考信号,或者第三指示信息用于指示:截止到当前参考信号,第一终端设备发送的参考信号总数。第二终端设备在K个时频资源上接收K参考信号时,在每个时频资源上接收一个参考信号和一个第三指示信息,第二终端设备需要接收K个第三指示信息,每个第三指示信息对应一个参考信号或者对应一个波束。在该实现方式中,第三指示信息用于指示第一终端设备和第二终端设备当前做的第几次波束维护,第三指示信息类似于C-DAI的作用。通过第三指示信息,第二终端设备就可以有效的判断某一个参考信号(或者波束)的可能漏收或者是这个波束出现了问题,对于后面的波束接收就可以快速调整,并且可以提高接收参考信号的准确性和效率,可以准确的确定出每个参考信号对应的测量结果,保证了反馈信息的准确性。In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the second terminal device receives K reference signals from the first terminal device on K time-frequency resources respectively, including: the second terminal device receives K reference signals and third indication information from the first terminal device on the K time-frequency resources respectively, where the third indication information is used to indicate; a cumulative number of reference signals received by the second terminal device, Or the third indication information is used to indicate the sequence number, index or arrangement of the reference signal received by the second terminal device. Or the third indication information is used to indicate which reference signal the current reference signal is in the order of the K reference signals from early to late in the time domain, or the third indication information is used to indicate: the total number of reference signals sent by the first terminal device as of the current reference signal. When the second terminal device receives K reference signals on K time-frequency resources, it receives a reference signal and a third indication information on each time-frequency resource. The second terminal device needs to receive K third indication information, and each third indication information corresponds to a reference signal or a beam. In this implementation, the third indication information is used to indicate which beam maintenance the first terminal device and the second terminal device are currently performing, and the third indication information is similar to the role of C-DAI. Through the third indication information, the second terminal device can effectively determine the possible leakage of a reference signal (or beam) or the problem with the beam, and the subsequent beam reception can be quickly adjusted, and the accuracy and efficiency of the received reference signal can be improved. The measurement result corresponding to each reference signal can be accurately determined, and the accuracy of the feedback information is guaranteed.

第三方面,提供了一种通信装置,该装置包括:用于执行以上第一方面或第一方面的任意可能的实现方式中的各个步骤的模块(例如包括处理模块和接口模块),或者用于执行以上第二方面或第二方面的任意可能的实现方式中的各个步骤的模块(例如包括处理模块和接口模块)。该装置可以是终端设备,也可以是终端设备中的芯片、芯片系统、或处理器等。In a third aspect, a communication device is provided, the device comprising: a module for executing each step in the above first aspect or any possible implementation of the first aspect (for example, including a processing module and an interface module), or a module for executing each step in the above second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect (for example, including a processing module and an interface module). The device may be a terminal device, or a chip, a chip system, or a processor in the terminal device.

第三方面以及第三方面中任意一种可能实现方式所对应的技术效果,可参见上述第一方面以及第一方面中任意一种实现方式所对应的技术效果,或者第二方面以及第二方面中任意一种实现方式所对应的技术效果,此处不再赘述。The technical effects corresponding to the third aspect and any possible implementation method of the third aspect can be referred to the technical effects corresponding to the first aspect and any implementation method of the first aspect, or the technical effects corresponding to the second aspect and any implementation method of the second aspect, and will not be repeated here.

第四方面,提供了一种通信装置,该装置包括至少一个处理器和存储器,至少一个处理器用于执行:以上第一方面或第一方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法,或者以上第二方面或第二方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。该装置可以是终端设备,也可以是终端设备中的芯片、芯片系统、或处理器等。In a fourth aspect, a communication device is provided, the device comprising at least one processor and a memory, the at least one processor being configured to execute: the method in the first aspect or any possible implementation of the first aspect, or the method in the second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect. The device may be a terminal device, or a chip, a chip system, or a processor in the terminal device.

第四方面以及第四方面中任意一种可能实现方式所对应的技术效果,可参见上述第一方面以及第一方面中任意一种实现方式所对应的技术效果,或者第二方面以及第二方面中任意一种实现方式所对应的技术效果,此处不再赘述。The technical effects corresponding to the fourth aspect and any possible implementation method of the fourth aspect can be referred to the technical effects corresponding to the above-mentioned first aspect and any implementation method of the first aspect, or the technical effects corresponding to the second aspect and any implementation method of the second aspect, and will not be repeated here.

第五方面,提供了一种通信装置,该装置包括至少一个处理器和接口电路,至少一个处理器用于执行:以上第一方面或第一方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法,或者以上第二方面或第二方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。该装置可以是终端设备,也可以是终端设备中的芯片、芯片系统、或处理器等。In a fifth aspect, a communication device is provided, the device comprising at least one processor and an interface circuit, the at least one processor being used to execute: the method in the first aspect or any possible implementation of the first aspect, or the method in the second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect. The device may be a terminal device, or a chip, a chip system, or a processor in the terminal device.

第五方面以及第五方面中任意一种可能实现方式所对应的技术效果,可参见上述第一方面以及第一方面中任意一种实现方式所对应的技术效果,或者第二方面以及第二方面中任意一种实现方式所对应的技术效果,此处不再赘述。The technical effects corresponding to the fifth aspect and any possible implementation method of the fifth aspect can be referred to the technical effects corresponding to the above-mentioned first aspect and any implementation method of the first aspect, or the technical effects corresponding to the second aspect and any implementation method of the second aspect, and will not be repeated here.

第六方面,提供了一种终端设备,该终端设备包括上述第三方面提供的通信装置,或者,该终端设备包括上述第四方面提供的通信装置,或者,该终端设备包括上述第五方面提供的通信装置。In a sixth aspect, a terminal device is provided, which includes the communication device provided in the third aspect, or the terminal device includes the communication device provided in the fourth aspect, or the terminal device includes the communication device provided in the fifth aspect.

第六方面以及第六方面中任意一种可能实现方式所对应的技术效果,可参见上述第一方面以及第一方面中任意一种实现方式所对应的技术效果,或者第二方面以及第二方面中任意一种实现方式所对应的技术效果,此处不再赘述。The technical effects corresponding to the sixth aspect and any possible implementation method of the sixth aspect can be referred to the technical effects corresponding to the above-mentioned first aspect and any implementation method of the first aspect, or the technical effects corresponding to the second aspect and any implementation method of the second aspect, and will not be repeated here.

第七方面,提供了一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品包括计算机程序,该计算机程序在被处理器执行时,用于执行以上第一方面或第一方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法,或者以上第二方面或第二方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。In the seventh aspect, a computer program product is provided, which includes a computer program, which, when executed by a processor, is used to execute the method in the above first aspect or any possible implementation of the first aspect, or the above second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect.

第七方面以及第七方面中任意一种可能实现方式所对应的技术效果,可参见上述第一方面以及第一方面中任意一种实现方式所对应的技术效果,或者第二方面以及第二方面中任意一种实现方式所对应的技术效果,此处不再赘述。The technical effects corresponding to the seventh aspect and any possible implementation method of the seventh aspect can be referred to the technical effects corresponding to the above-mentioned first aspect and any implementation method of the first aspect, or the technical effects corresponding to the second aspect and any implementation method of the second aspect, and will not be repeated here.

第八方面,提供一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机程序,当该计算机程序被执行时,用于执行以上第一方面或第一方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法,或者以上第二方面或第二方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。In an eighth aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided, in which a computer program is stored. When the computer program is executed, it is used to execute the method in the above first aspect or any possible implementation of the first aspect, or the above second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect.

第八方面以及第八方面中任意一种可能实现方式所对应的技术效果,可参见上述第一方面以 及第一方面中任意一种实现方式所对应的技术效果,或者第二方面以及第二方面中任意一种实现方式所对应的技术效果,此处不再赘述。The technical effects corresponding to the eighth aspect and any possible implementation method of the eighth aspect can be found in the first aspect above. The technical effects corresponding to any one of the implementation methods in the first aspect, or the technical effects corresponding to the second aspect and any one of the implementation methods in the second aspect, will not be repeated here.

第九方面,提供了一种芯片,该芯片包括:处理器,用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,使得安装有所述芯片的通信设备执行:以上第一方面或第一方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法,或者以上第二方面或第二方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。In the ninth aspect, a chip is provided, which includes: a processor, used to call and run a computer program from a memory, so that a communication device equipped with the chip executes: the method in the above first aspect or any possible implementation of the first aspect, or the above second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect.

第九方面以及第九方面中任意一种可能实现方式所对应的技术效果,可参见上述第一方面以及第一方面中任意一种实现方式所对应的技术效果,或者第二方面以及第二方面中任意一种实现方式所对应的技术效果,此处不再赘述。The technical effects corresponding to the ninth aspect and any possible implementation method of the ninth aspect can be referred to the technical effects corresponding to the above-mentioned first aspect and any implementation method of the first aspect, or the technical effects corresponding to the second aspect and any implementation method of the second aspect, and will not be repeated here.

附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

图1是一例基站利用SSB宽波束扫描,UE利用宽波束扫描的示意图。FIG1 is a schematic diagram of an example in which a base station uses SSB wide beam scanning and a UE uses wide beam scanning.

图2是一例不同波束的方向不同以及不同波束对应的RSRP不同的示意图。FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing an example in which different beams have different directions and different RSRPs corresponding to different beams.

图3是一例SSB索引(index)和PRACH信道(PRACH时频资源)之间对应关系的示意图。FIG3 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the correspondence between an SSB index (index) and a PRACH channel (PRACH time-frequency resource).

图4是一例基站利用最优的CSI-RS for BM波束向UE发送下行信号的示意图。FIG4 is a schematic diagram of an example in which a base station uses the optimal CSI-RS for BM beam to send a downlink signal to a UE.

图5是一例PDSCH数据所在时隙与该PDSCH的HARQ反馈所在时隙的偏移值的示意图。FIG5 is a schematic diagram of an example of an offset value between a time slot where PDSCH data is located and a time slot where HARQ feedback of the PDSCH is located.

图6是一例的HARQ反馈所在时隙与该HARQ反馈所对应的所有PDSCH数据所在时隙的偏移值的示意图。FIG6 is a schematic diagram of an example of an offset value between a time slot where a HARQ feedback is located and a time slot where all PDSCH data corresponding to the HARQ feedback are located.

图7是一例半静态码本的示意图。FIG7 is a schematic diagram of an example of a semi-static codebook.

图8是一例下行数据传输中DAI数值的示意图。FIG8 is a schematic diagram of an example of a DAI value in downlink data transmission.

图9是一例采用半静态码本和动态码本的示意图。FIG9 is a schematic diagram of an example of using a semi-static codebook and a dynamic codebook.

图10是本申请实施例提供的另一例可以适用本申请提供的方法的通信系统示意图。FIG10 is a schematic diagram of another communication system provided in an embodiment of the present application to which the method provided in the present application can be applied.

图11是本申请实施例提供的一例侧行链路上信息传输的方法的示意性交互图。FIG11 is a schematic interaction diagram of a method for transmitting information on a side link provided in an embodiment of the present application.

图12是本申请实施例提供的一例K个时频资源和第一时频资源的示意图。Figure 12 is a schematic diagram of an example of K time-frequency resources and a first time-frequency resource provided in an embodiment of the present application.

图13是本申请实施例提供的一例K个参考信号周期性发送的示意图。FIG13 is a schematic diagram of an example of periodic transmission of K reference signals provided in an embodiment of the present application.

图14是本申请实施例提供的一例第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送的反馈信息中包括的内容的示意图。FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of an example of the content included in feedback information sent by a second terminal device to a first terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application.

图15是本申请实施例提供的另一例第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送的反馈信息中包括的内容的示意图。FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of another example of the content included in feedback information sent by a second terminal device to a first terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application.

图16是本申请实施例提供的一例K个时频资源是周期性的示意图。Figure 16 is a schematic diagram of an example in which K time-frequency resources are periodic, provided in an embodiment of the present application.

图17是本申请实施例提供的一例第一终端设备在K个时频资源中的每个时频资源上发送一个参考信号和一个第三指示信息的示意图。Figure 17 is a schematic diagram of an example provided by an embodiment of the present application in which a first terminal device sends a reference signal and a third indication information on each of K time-frequency resources.

图18是本申请实施例提供的一例通信装置的示意性框图。FIG18 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.

图19是本申请实施例提供的另一例通信装置的示意性框图。Figure 19 is a schematic block diagram of another communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.

图20是本申请实施例提供的终端设备的示意性框图。Figure 20 is a schematic block diagram of a terminal device provided in an embodiment of the present application.

具体实施方式DETAILED DESCRIPTION

下面将结合附图,对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solution in this application will be described below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.

在本申请实施例的描述中,除非另有说明,“/”表示或的意思,例如,A/B可以表示A或B;本文中的“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。另外,在本申请实施例的描述中,“多个”是指两个或多于两个。In the description of the embodiments of the present application, unless otherwise specified, "/" means or, for example, A/B can mean A or B; "and/or" in this article is only a description of the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone. In addition, in the description of the embodiments of the present application, "multiple" means two or more than two.

以下,术语“第一”、“第二”仅用于描述目的,而不能理解为指示或暗示相对重要性或者隐含指明所指示的技术特征的数量。由此,限定有“第一”、“第二”的特征可以明示或者隐含地包括一个或者更多个该特征。在本实施例的描述中,除非另有说明,“多个”的含义是两个或两个以上。In the following, the terms "first" and "second" are used for descriptive purposes only and are not to be understood as indicating or implying relative importance or implicitly indicating the number of the indicated technical features. Thus, a feature defined as "first" or "second" may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of the features. In the description of this embodiment, unless otherwise specified, "plurality" means two or more.

在本申请实施例中,终端设备或网络设备包括硬件层、运行在硬件层之上的操作系统层,以及运行在操作系统层上的应用层。该硬件层包括中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU)、内存管理单元(memory management unit,MMU)和内存(也称为主存)等硬件。该操作系统可以是任意一种或多种通过进程(process)实现业务处理的计算机操作系统,例如,Linux操作系统、 Unix操作系统、Android操作系统、iOS操作系统或windows操作系统等。该应用层包含浏览器、通讯录、文字处理软件、即时通信软件等应用。并且,本申请实施例并未对本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体的具体结构特别限定,只要能够通过运行记录有本申请实施例的提供的方法的代码的程序,以根据本申请实施例提供的方法进行通信即可,例如,本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体可以是终端设备或网络设备,或者,是终端设备或网络设备中能够调用程序并执行程序的功能模块。In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device or network device includes a hardware layer, an operating system layer running on the hardware layer, and an application layer running on the operating system layer. The hardware layer includes hardware such as a central processing unit (CPU), a memory management unit (MMU), and a memory (also called main memory). The operating system can be any one or more computer operating systems that implement business processing through processes, such as the Linux operating system, Unix operating system, Android operating system, iOS operating system or windows operating system, etc. The application layer includes applications such as browsers, address books, word processing software, instant messaging software, etc. Moreover, the embodiments of the present application do not specifically limit the specific structure of the execution subject of the method provided in the embodiments of the present application, as long as it is possible to communicate according to the method provided in the embodiments of the present application by running a program that records the code of the method provided in the embodiments of the present application, for example, the execution subject of the method provided in the embodiments of the present application may be a terminal device or a network device, or a functional module in a terminal device or a network device that can call and execute a program.

另外,本申请的各个方面或特征可以实现成方法、装置或使用标准编程和/或工程技术的制品。本申请中使用的术语“制品”涵盖可从任何计算机可读器件、载体或介质访问的计算机程序。例如,计算机可读介质可以包括,但不限于:磁存储器件(例如,硬盘、软盘或磁带等),光盘(例如,压缩盘(compact disc,CD)、数字通用盘(digital versatile disc,DVD)等),智能卡和闪存器件(例如,可擦写可编程只读存储器(erasable programmable read-only memory,EPROM)、卡、棒或钥匙驱动器等)。另外,本文描述的各种存储介质可代表用于存储信息的一个或多个设备和/或其它机器可读介质。术语“机器可读介质”可包括但不限于,无线信道和能够存储、包含和/或承载指令和/或数据的各种其它介质。In addition, various aspects or features of the present application can be implemented as methods, devices or products using standard programming and/or engineering techniques. The term "product" used in this application covers computer programs that can be accessed from any computer-readable device, carrier or medium. For example, computer-readable media may include, but are not limited to: magnetic storage devices (e.g., hard disks, floppy disks or tapes, etc.), optical disks (e.g., compact discs (CDs), digital versatile discs (DVDs), etc.), smart cards and flash memory devices (e.g., erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), cards, sticks or key drives, etc.). In addition, the various storage media described herein may represent one or more devices and/or other machine-readable media for storing information. The term "machine-readable medium" may include, but is not limited to, wireless channels and various other media capable of storing, containing and/or carrying instructions and/or data.

无线通信技术在过去几十年经历了飞速的发展,先后经历了基于模拟通信系统的第一代无线通信系统,以全球移动通信系统(global system for mobile communication,GSM)为代表的第二代(2nd Generation,2G)无线通信系统,以宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access,WCDMA)为代表的3G无线通信系统,再到现在已经在全世界广泛商用并且取得巨大成功的长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)4G无线通信系统以及5G无线通信系统。无线通信系统支持的业务也从最初的语音、短信,发展到现在支持无线高速数据通信。与此同时,全世界范围内的无线连接数量正在经历持续地高速增长,各种新的无线业务类型也大量涌现,例如物联网、自动驾驶等,这些都对下一代无线通信系统,也即5G系统,提出了更高的要求。Wireless communication technology has experienced rapid development in the past few decades, from the first generation of wireless communication systems based on analog communication systems, to the second generation (2G) wireless communication systems represented by the global system for mobile communication (GSM), to the 3G wireless communication systems represented by wideband code division multiple access (WCDMA), to the long-term evolution (LTE) 4G wireless communication systems and 5G wireless communication systems that have been widely used and achieved great success in the world. The services supported by wireless communication systems have also evolved from the initial voice and text messages to the current support for wireless high-speed data communications. At the same time, the number of wireless connections around the world is experiencing a continuous and rapid growth, and various new types of wireless services have also emerged in large numbers, such as the Internet of Things and autonomous driving, which have put forward higher requirements for the next generation of wireless communication systems, namely 5G systems.

随着通信的需求场景越来越多,设备到设备(device-to-device,D2D)通信技术因为具有可以在有无网络基础设施的情况直接通信的优势,近年来快速发展。D2D通信技术的应用,可以减轻蜂窝网络的负担、减少用户设备的电池功耗、提高数据速率,并能很好地满足邻近服务的需求。As the number of communication demand scenarios increases, device-to-device (D2D) communication technology has developed rapidly in recent years because of its advantage of being able to communicate directly with or without network infrastructure. The application of D2D communication technology can reduce the burden on cellular networks, reduce the battery power consumption of user devices, increase data rates, and meet the needs of proximity services.

一般而言,D2D通信技术指的是两个用户设备(用户设备可以称为终端设备)或多个用户设备(user equipment,UE)之间直接通信的技术。典型的D2D技术包括:蓝牙,无线保真(wireless fidelity,WiFi)、WiFi直连(WiFi-Direct)等。在第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd generation partnership project,3GPP)定义的无线通信网络中,用户设备和用户设备直接通信的空口(air interface)称为PC5接口,所以用户设备和用户设备之间的直接通信也称为PC5通信。从链路的角度看,用户设备和用户设备之间的链路可以称为侧行链路(sidelink,SL),与当前通信系统中的上行链路(uplink,UL)、下行链路(downlink,DL)相对应。Generally speaking, D2D communication technology refers to the technology of direct communication between two user equipments (user equipment can be called terminal equipment) or multiple user equipments (user equipment, UE). Typical D2D technologies include: Bluetooth, wireless fidelity (wireless fidelity, WiFi), WiFi direct connection (WiFi-Direct), etc. In the wireless communication network defined by the 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP), the air interface for direct communication between user equipment and user equipment is called PC5 interface, so the direct communication between user equipment and user equipment is also called PC5 communication. From the perspective of the link, the link between user equipment and user equipment can be called sidelink (SL), which corresponds to the uplink (UL) and downlink (DL) in the current communication system.

SL通信包括多种使用场景,例如:车辆对其他设备(vehicle to everything,V2X)、智能终端之间的通信等。V2X也可以称为“车联网”,是汽车和其他车辆或可能影响汽车的设备之间进行的通讯,包括车与车的通信(vehicle to vehicle,V2V)、车与行人的通信(vehicle to pedestrian,V2P)、车与基础设施的通信(vehicle to infrastructure,V2I)、车与网络的通信(vehicle to network,V2N)。智能终端之间的通信典型场景包括:手机和可穿戴设备之间的通信,增强现实(augmented reality,AR)/虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)头盔或眼镜和智能屏幕之间的通信,传感器之间的通信等等。SL communication includes a variety of usage scenarios, such as: vehicle to everything (V2X), communication between smart terminals, etc. V2X, also known as "Internet of Vehicles", is the communication between cars and other vehicles or devices that may affect cars, including vehicle to vehicle (V2V), vehicle to pedestrian (V2P), vehicle to infrastructure (V2I), vehicle to network (V2N). Typical scenarios of communication between smart terminals include: communication between mobile phones and wearable devices, communication between augmented reality (AR)/virtual reality (VR) helmets or glasses and smart screens, communication between sensors, etc.

在无线通信系统中,按照使用频段的不同,可以分为授权频段和非授权频段。在授权频段中,用户设备基于中心节点(例如基站)的调度使用频谱资源。LTE通信系统中,蜂窝移动通信开始了对非授权频段的研究工作,催生了非授权频谱的LTE技术(LTE in unlicensed spectrum,LTE-U)、授权辅助接入技术(Licensed Assisted Access,LAA)、多线(Multe Fire)等技术。然而,非授权频段原本已被一些无线通信设备使用,比如Wi-Fi。LTE系统引入基于先听后说(listen-before-talk,LBT)机制使得其与Wi-Fi设备可以共存,同时使能非授权频段上的LTE Uu接口通信,Uu接口也可以理解为用户设备和无线接入网设备(例如基站)之间通信的接口。除了Uu接口外,还存在PC5接口,PC5接口是UE与UE之间的通信接口。在局域空间内使能非授权频段的SL通信是 一个重要演进方向,相应协议技术可以统称为非授权频段的SL通信(sidelink in Unlicensed spectrum,SL-U)。与Uu接口类似,通过SL-U工作的UE也需要基于LBT机制与附近的Wi-Fi设备共存。In wireless communication systems, according to the different frequency bands used, they can be divided into licensed bands and unlicensed bands. In the licensed band, the user equipment uses spectrum resources based on the scheduling of the central node (such as the base station). In the LTE communication system, cellular mobile communications began to study the unlicensed band, giving rise to technologies such as LTE in unlicensed spectrum (LTE-U), Licensed Assisted Access (LAA), and Multi-line (Multe Fire). However, the unlicensed band has been used by some wireless communication devices, such as Wi-Fi. The LTE system introduces a listen-before-talk (LBT) mechanism to enable it to coexist with Wi-Fi devices, while enabling LTE Uu interface communication on the unlicensed band. The Uu interface can also be understood as the interface for communication between the user equipment and the wireless access network equipment (such as the base station). In addition to the Uu interface, there is also a PC5 interface, which is the communication interface between UE and UE. Enabling SL communication in the unlicensed band in the local area is An important evolution direction, the corresponding protocol technology can be collectively referred to as SL communication in the unlicensed frequency band (sidelink in Unlicensed spectrum, SL-U). Similar to the Uu interface, UE working through SL-U also needs to coexist with nearby Wi-Fi devices based on the LBT mechanism.

除此之外,使用D2D技术的用户设备一般是半双工(Half Duplex)设备,即该用户设备在同一个时刻只能处于接收或者发送信息的状态,不具备同时收发的能力。In addition, user devices using D2D technology are generally half-duplex devices, that is, the user device can only receive or send information at the same time and does not have the ability to send and receive at the same time.

下面简单介绍本申请涉及的一些相关术语和通信技术。The following is a brief introduction to some relevant terms and communication technologies involved in this application.

第一:波束。First: beam.

波束(beam,BM)是一种通信资源。波束可以是宽波束,或者窄波束,或者其他类型波束。形成波束的技术可以是波束赋形技术(beam forming)或者其他技术手段。波束赋形技术可以具体为数字波束成形技术,模拟波束成形技术,混合数字/模拟波束成形技术。不同的波束可以认为是不同的资源。通过不同的波束可以发送相同的信息或者不同的信息。可选的,可以将具有相同或者类似的通信特征的多个波束视为是一个波束。一个波束内可以包括一个或多个天线端口,用于传输数据信道,控制信道和探测信号等。A beam (BM) is a communication resource. A beam can be a wide beam, a narrow beam, or other types of beams. The technology for forming a beam can be beam forming technology or other technical means. The beam forming technology can be specifically digital beam forming technology, analog beam forming technology, and hybrid digital/analog beam forming technology. Different beams can be considered as different resources. The same information or different information can be sent through different beams. Optionally, multiple beams with the same or similar communication characteristics can be regarded as one beam. A beam can include one or more antenna ports for transmitting data channels, control channels, and detection signals, etc.

波束,也可以理解为空间资源,可以是指具有能量传输指向性的发送或接收预编码向量。能量传输指向性可以指在一定空间位置内,接收经过该预编码向量进行预编码处理后的信号具有较好的接收功率,如满足接收解调信噪比等,能量传输指向性也可以指通过该预编码向量接收来自不同空间位置发送的相同信号具有不同的接收功率。同一设备(例如网络设备或终端设备)可以有不同的预编码向量,不同的设备也可以有不同的预编码向量,即对应不同的波束,针对设备的配置或者能力,一个设备在同一时刻可以使用多个不同的预编码向量中的一个或者多个,即同时可以形成一个波束或者多个波束。从发射和接收两个角度出发,波束可以分为发射波束和接收波束。Beam, which can also be understood as a spatial resource, can refer to a transmit or receive precoding vector with energy transmission directivity. Energy transmission directivity can refer to the fact that within a certain spatial position, the signal received after precoding processing by the precoding vector has better receiving power, such as satisfying the receiving demodulation signal-to-noise ratio, etc. Energy transmission directivity can also refer to the fact that the same signal sent from different spatial positions received through the precoding vector has different receiving powers. The same device (such as a network device or a terminal device) can have different precoding vectors, and different devices can also have different precoding vectors, that is, corresponding to different beams. According to the configuration or capability of the device, a device can use one or more of multiple different precoding vectors at the same time, that is, it can form one beam or multiple beams at the same time. From the perspective of transmission and reception, beams can be divided into transmitting beams and receiving beams.

发射波束:发射端设备(也可以称为发送端设备)以一定的波束赋形权值发送信号,使发送信号形成的具有空间指向性的波束。其中,在上行方向上,发射端设备可以是终端设备(终端设备也可以称为用户设备);在下行方向上,发射端设备可以是网络设备(网络设备也可以称为无线接入网设备)。或者说,发射波束是指通过多天线采用波束成形技术发射具有方向性的波束。Transmit beam: The transmitting end device (also called the transmitting end device) sends a signal with a certain beamforming weight, so that the transmitted signal forms a beam with spatial directivity. In the uplink direction, the transmitting end device can be a terminal device (the terminal device can also be called a user device); in the downlink direction, the transmitting end device can be a network device (the network device can also be called a wireless access network device). In other words, the transmit beam refers to the use of multiple antennas to transmit a directional beam using beamforming technology.

接收波束:接收端设备以一定的波束赋形权值接收信号,使接收信号形成的具有空间指向性的波束。其中,在上行方向上,接收端设备可以是网络设备;在下行方向上,接收端设备可以是终端。或者说,接收波束是指接收信号的方向上也具有指向性,尽可能指向发射波束的来波方向,以进一步提高接收信噪比并避免用户间的干扰。Receive beam: The receiving device receives the signal with a certain beamforming weight, so that the received signal forms a beam with spatial directivity. In the uplink direction, the receiving device can be a network device; in the downlink direction, the receiving device can be a terminal. In other words, the receive beam means that the direction of the received signal is also directional, pointing as much as possible to the direction of the transmitted beam, so as to further improve the received signal-to-noise ratio and avoid interference between users.

发射波束赋形:具有天线阵列的发射端设备发送信号时,在天线阵列的每个天线阵子上设置一个特定的幅度和相位,使得发送信号具有一定的空间指向性,即在某些方向上信号功率高,在某些方向上信号功率低,信号功率最高的方向即为发射波束的方向。该天线阵列包括多个天线阵子,所附加的特定的幅度和相位即为波束赋形权值。Transmit beamforming: When a transmitting device with an antenna array sends a signal, a specific amplitude and phase are set on each antenna element of the antenna array so that the transmitted signal has a certain spatial directivity, that is, the signal power is high in some directions and low in some directions. The direction with the highest signal power is the direction of the transmit beam. The antenna array includes multiple antenna elements, and the specific amplitude and phase attached are the beamforming weights.

接收波束赋形:具有天线阵列的接收端设备接收信号时,在天线阵列的每个天线阵子上设置一个特定的幅度和相位,使得接收信号的功率增益具有方向性,即接收某些方向上的信号时功率增益高,接收某些方向上的信号时功率增益低,接收信号时功率增益最高的方向就是接收波束的方向。该天线阵列包括多个天线阵子,所附加的特定的幅度和相位即为波束赋形权值。Receive beamforming: When a receiving device with an antenna array receives a signal, a specific amplitude and phase are set on each antenna element of the antenna array so that the power gain of the received signal has directionality, that is, the power gain is high when receiving signals in certain directions, and low when receiving signals in other directions. The direction with the highest power gain when receiving a signal is the direction of the receive beam. The antenna array includes multiple antenna elements, and the specific amplitude and phase added are the beamforming weights.

可选的,在本申请实施例中,“使用某个发射波束发送信号”也可以表述为:使用某个波束赋形权值发送信号。“使用某个接收波束接收信号”也可以表述为:使用某个波束赋形权值接收信号。Optionally, in the embodiment of the present application, "sending a signal using a certain transmit beam" may also be expressed as: sending a signal using a certain beamforming weight. "Receiving a signal using a certain receive beam" may also be expressed as: receiving a signal using a certain beamforming weight.

可选的,在本申请实施例中,“波束”也可以称为空域滤波器(spatial filter),或者称空间滤波器(spatial filter)或空间参数(spatial parameters),发射波束也可以称为空域发射滤波器,接收波束也可以称为空域接收滤波器。Optionally, in the embodiment of the present application, "beam" may also be called a spatial filter, or a spatial filter or spatial parameters, the transmitting beam may also be called a spatial transmitting filter, and the receiving beam may also be called a spatial receiving filter.

不同的波束可以认为是不同的资源,也可以认为是使用的波束赋形权值不同。使用(通过)不同的波束可以发送相同的信息或者不同的信息。波束对建立在波束的概念上,即具有波束配对关系的发射波束和接收波束。一个波束对通常包括发射端设备的一个发射波束和接收端设备的一个接收波束。Different beams can be considered as different resources, or as using different beamforming weights. The same information or different information can be sent using (through) different beams. A beam pair is based on the concept of beams, i.e., a transmit beam and a receive beam that have a beam pairing relationship. A beam pair usually includes a transmit beam of a transmitting device and a receive beam of a receiving device.

在通信系统例如5G新空口(new radio,NR)系统中,网络设备和终端设备均可生成一个或 多个发射波束,以及一个或多个接收波束。在传输数据前,需要进行波束对准(波束对齐)。In a communication system such as a 5G new radio (NR) system, both network equipment and terminal equipment can generate one or Multiple transmit beams, and one or more receive beams. Before transmitting data, beam alignment is required.

第二:参考信号与参考信号资源。Second: reference signals and reference signal resources.

参考信号可用于信道测量或者信道估计等。参考信号资源可用于配置参考信号的传输属性,例如,时频资源位置、端口映射关系、功率因子以及扰码等。发送端设备可基于参考信号资源发送参考信号,接收端设备可基于参考信号资源接收参考信号。Reference signals can be used for channel measurement or channel estimation, etc. Reference signal resources can be used to configure transmission properties of reference signals, such as time-frequency resource locations, port mapping relationships, power factors, and scrambling codes, etc. A transmitting device can send reference signals based on reference signal resources, and a receiving device can receive reference signals based on reference signal resources.

本申请中涉及的信道测量也包括波束测量,即通过测量参考信号获得波束质量信息,用于衡量波束质量的参数包括参考信号接收功率(reference signal receiving power,RSRP),但不限于此。例如,波束质量也可以通过参考信号接收质量(reference signal receiving quality,RSRQ),信噪比(signal-noise ratio,SNR),信号与干扰噪声比(signal to interference plus noise ratio,SINR),块误码率(block error rate,BLER),信号质量指示(channel quality indicator,CQI)等参数衡量。The channel measurement involved in this application also includes beam measurement, that is, obtaining beam quality information by measuring the reference signal, and the parameters used to measure the beam quality include reference signal receiving power (RSRP), but are not limited to this. For example, the beam quality can also be measured by reference signal receiving quality (RSRQ), signal-noise ratio (SNR), signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR), block error rate (BLER), channel quality indicator (CQI) and other parameters.

参考信号例如可以包括:CSI-RS、同步信号块(synchronization signal block,SSB)探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS)、解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal,DMRS)等。与此对应地,参考信号资源可以包括CSI-RS资源(CSI-RS resource)、SSB资源、SRS资源(SRS resource)。Reference signals may include, for example, CSI-RS, synchronization signal block (SSB), sounding reference signal (SRS), demodulation reference signal (DMRS), etc. Correspondingly, reference signal resources may include CSI-RS resources (CSI-RS resource), SSB resources, and SRS resources (SRS resource).

需要说明的是,上述SSB也可以称为同步信号/物理广播信道块(synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block,SS/PBCH block),所对应的SSB资源也可以称为同步信号/物理广播信道块资源(SS/PBCH block resource),可简称为SSB resource。It should be noted that the above-mentioned SSB can also be called synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block (synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block, SS/PBCH block), and the corresponding SSB resource can also be called synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block resource (SS/PBCH block resource), which can be abbreviated as SSB resource.

为了区分不同的参考信号资源,每个参考信号资源可对应于一个参考信号资源的标识,例如,CSI-RS资源标识(CSI-RS resource indicator,CRI)、SSB资源标识(SSB resource indicator,SSBRI)、SRS资源索引(SRS resource index,SRI)。其中,SSB资源标识也可以称为SSB标识(SSB index)。In order to distinguish different reference signal resources, each reference signal resource may correspond to a reference signal resource identifier, for example, a CSI-RS resource indicator (CSI-RS resource indicator, CRI), an SSB resource indicator (SSBRI), or an SRS resource index (SRS resource index, SRI). The SSB resource identifier may also be referred to as an SSB index.

应理解,上文中列举的参考信号以及相应的参考信号资源仅为示例性说明,不应对本申请构成任何限定,本申请并不排除在未来的协议中定义其他参考信号来实现相同或相似功能的可能。It should be understood that the reference signals and corresponding reference signal resources listed above are only exemplary and should not constitute any limitation to the present application. The present application does not exclude the possibility of defining other reference signals in future protocols to achieve the same or similar functions.

第三:NR Uu中波束训练的过程。Third: The process of beam training in NR Uu.

在本申请实施例中,NR Uu可以理解为5G中终端设备和网络设备(例如基站)之间的通信。In the embodiment of the present application, NR Uu can be understood as the communication between terminal equipment and network equipment (such as base stations) in 5G.

下面具体描述NR Uu下行波束管理过程,具体包括三个过程,即P1过程:基站和用户设备粗对齐过程;P2过程:基站细调过程;P3过程:UE细调过程。The NR Uu downlink beam management process is described in detail below. It includes three processes, namely, P1 process: coarse alignment process of base station and user equipment; P2 process: base station fine adjustment process; P3 process: UE fine adjustment process.

P1粗对齐过程:基站利用SSB宽波束扫描,UE利用宽波束扫描。P1 coarse alignment process: the base station uses SSB wide beam scanning, and the UE uses wide beam scanning.

例如图1所示的,图1所示的为一例基站利用SSB宽波束扫描,UE利用宽波束扫描的示意图,基站在不同的方向上利用不同的波束(如图1所示的4个不同方向上的4个波束)发送SSB。换句话说,每个SSB使用不同的波束进行发送,每个SSB对应一个波束。UE通过接收波束(或者宽波束)接收SSB后测量SSB,从而获得每个SSB的测量结果(例如为RSRP)。基站通过在不同时刻变化SSB波束的方向,UE测量不同方向上SSB的接收强度,可以确定此时的最佳SSB波束。如图2中的a图所示的,4个不同波束的方向不同。如图2中的b图所示的不同波束对应的RSRP不同。For example, as shown in Figure 1, Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of a base station using SSB wide beam scanning and a UE using wide beam scanning. The base station sends SSB in different directions using different beams (the four beams in four different directions shown in Figure 1). In other words, each SSB is sent using a different beam, and each SSB corresponds to a beam. The UE measures the SSB after receiving the SSB through a receiving beam (or a wide beam), thereby obtaining a measurement result (such as RSRP) for each SSB. The base station changes the direction of the SSB beam at different times, and the UE measures the receiving strength of the SSB in different directions, thereby determining the best SSB beam at this time. As shown in Figure a of Figure 2, the directions of the four different beams are different. As shown in Figure b of Figure 2, the RSRPs corresponding to different beams are different.

下面根据UE的两种状态分别描述基站侧发送下行信号的SSB波束确定过程:The following describes the SSB beam determination process of the base station side sending the downlink signal according to the two states of the UE:

第一种:若UE处于空闲态的初始接入阶段,UE通过将最优SSB波束(即接收强度最大的SSB对应的波束)的SSB索引(index)信息包含在随机接入的前导码(Preamble)中反馈给基站,基站根据SSB索引(SSB索引和波束之前存在映射关系)确认后续发送下行信号使用的SSB波束(Tx beam)。基站接收上行信号时可以直接复用该波束。The first type: If the UE is in the initial access phase of the idle state, the UE feeds back to the base station by including the SSB index information of the optimal SSB beam (i.e., the beam corresponding to the SSB with the greatest reception intensity) in the preamble of random access. The base station confirms the SSB beam (Tx beam) used for subsequent downlink signal transmission based on the SSB index (there is a mapping relationship between the SSB index and the beam). The base station can directly reuse the beam when receiving the uplink signal.

第二种:若UE是连接态数据传输阶段,UE通过测量报告将SSB测量结果反馈给基站,基站根据SSB测量结果,将最优SSB波束(即接收强度最大的SSB对应的波束)确定为后续发送下行信号使用的发送波束(Tx beam)。基站接收上行信号时可以直接复用该波束。The second type: If the UE is in the connected data transmission stage, the UE feeds back the SSB measurement results to the base station through the measurement report. The base station determines the optimal SSB beam (i.e. the beam corresponding to the SSB with the greatest receiving strength) as the transmission beam (Tx beam) used for subsequent downlink signal transmission based on the SSB measurement results. The base station can directly reuse the beam when receiving uplink signals.

UE侧接收下行信号的宽波束确定:The wide beam receiving downlink signal at the UE side is determined as follows:

UE接收SSB信号时,按照系统消息(空闲态初始接入阶段)或RRC重配消息(连接态数据传输阶段)中告知的SSB时频资源位置,采用波束扫描的方式进行信号接收,即可确定UE接收下行信号的宽波束。UE发送上行信号时可以直接复用该波束。 When the UE receives an SSB signal, it receives the signal by beam scanning according to the SSB time-frequency resource location informed in the system message (initial access phase in idle state) or the RRC reconfiguration message (data transmission phase in connected state), and can determine the wide beam for the UE to receive the downlink signal. The UE can directly reuse the beam when sending an uplink signal.

UE需要将测得的SSB的RSRP与6比特SSB序号(index)进行对应,因此,UE从物理层广播信道(physical broadcast channel,PBCH)上解调DMRS获取最低3位比特,另外从PBCH有效载荷(payload)比特中获取最高3位比特,组合后得到接收SSB的序号(即SSB索引)。The UE needs to match the measured RSRP of the SSB with the 6-bit SSB index. Therefore, the UE demodulates the DMRS from the physical broadcast channel (PBCH) to obtain the lowest 3 bits, and also obtains the highest 3 bits from the PBCH payload bits. After combining them, the received SSB index (ie, SSB index) is obtained.

如图3所示的,由于SSB index和PRACH信道(即PRACH时频资源)有着对应关系,UE根据检测到的SSB的索引确定出对应的PRACH时频资源,从而在确定出的PRACH时频资源上向基站发送前导码(Preamble)。基站通过在对应的PRACH信道去接收Preamble,便可以确定出对应的SSB index,从而根据SSB index确定对应的波束。当基站在不同波束上发送SSB时,UE通过测量SSB的RSRP,就可以得到最佳波束信息,然后在对应的PRACH时频资源进行反馈,基站则根据PRACH信道,就能获取UE上报的最佳的波束信息。As shown in Figure 3, since there is a corresponding relationship between the SSB index and the PRACH channel (i.e., the PRACH time-frequency resource), the UE determines the corresponding PRACH time-frequency resource based on the detected SSB index, and then sends a preamble to the base station on the determined PRACH time-frequency resource. The base station can determine the corresponding SSB index by receiving the preamble on the corresponding PRACH channel, and thus determine the corresponding beam based on the SSB index. When the base station sends SSBs on different beams, the UE can obtain the best beam information by measuring the RSRP of the SSB, and then provide feedback on the corresponding PRACH time-frequency resource. The base station can obtain the best beam information reported by the UE based on the PRACH channel.

通过上述的P1过程,基站可以确定出最优的SSB波束。Through the above-mentioned P1 process, the base station can determine the optimal SSB beam.

P2过程:基站细调(精调)过程(基站进行CSI-RS for BM波束扫描过程)。“CSI-RS for BM波束”可以理解为:利用CSI-RS进行波束测量得到的最优波束。P2 process: base station fine tuning process (base station performs CSI-RS for BM beam scanning process). "CSI-RS for BM beam" can be understood as: the optimal beam obtained by beam measurement using CSI-RS.

基站在最优的SSB波束附近,用更窄一些的CSI-RS for BM波束再扫描一遍。例如,基站可以通过波束标识(Identity,ID)将CSI-RS时频资源与最优SSB波束进行映射。换句话说,基站在最优的SSB波束附近确定出多个波束,然后分别使用这些波束向UE发送CSI-RS。UE对不同波束上的CSI-RS进行测量,通过测量报告将CSI-RS的测量结果反馈给基站。基站根据CSI-RS测量结果,将最优CSI-RS波束(即接收强度最大的CSI-RS对应的波束)确定为后续发送下行信号使用的发送波束(Tx beam)。基站接收上行信号时可以直接复用该波束。The base station scans again with a narrower CSI-RS for BM beam near the optimal SSB beam. For example, the base station can map the CSI-RS time-frequency resources to the optimal SSB beam through the beam identifier (Identity, ID). In other words, the base station determines multiple beams near the optimal SSB beam, and then uses these beams to send CSI-RS to the UE respectively. The UE measures the CSI-RS on different beams and feeds back the CSI-RS measurement results to the base station through the measurement report. Based on the CSI-RS measurement results, the base station determines the optimal CSI-RS beam (i.e., the beam corresponding to the CSI-RS with the greatest receiving intensity) as the transmit beam (Tx beam) used for subsequent downlink signal transmission. The base station can directly reuse this beam when receiving uplink signals.

通过上述的P2过程,基站可以确定出最优的CSI-RS for BM波束。Through the above P2 process, the base station can determine the optimal CSI-RS for BM beam.

P3过程:UE细调(精调)过程。P3 process: UE fine tuning process.

如图4所示的,基站利用最优的CSI-RS for BM波束(即CSI-RS for BM波束固定)向UE发送下行信号。即基站利用CSI-RS确定出的最优波束上向UE发送CSI-RS。UE接收信号时,根据基站发送的RRC配置消息中告知的CSI-RS for BM时频资源位置,采用波束扫描的方式进行信号接收,以此确定UE接收下行信号的窄波束。UE发送上行信号时可以直接复用该波束。As shown in Figure 4, the base station uses the optimal CSI-RS for BM beam (i.e., the CSI-RS for BM beam is fixed) to send a downlink signal to the UE. That is, the base station sends CSI-RS to the UE on the optimal beam determined by CSI-RS. When the UE receives the signal, it uses beam scanning to receive the signal according to the CSI-RS for BM time-frequency resource position informed in the RRC configuration message sent by the base station, so as to determine the narrow beam in which the UE receives the downlink signal. The UE can directly reuse the beam when sending an uplink signal.

通过上述的P3过程,UE可以确定出最优的波束。Through the above P3 process, the UE can determine the optimal beam.

通过上述的P1至P3过程,基站和UE之间便可以确定出多个波束对,一个波束对包括一个发送波束和一个接收波束。当基站和终端设备建立连接之后,为了避免相对位置移动或信道变化带来的最佳波束对变化,NR Uu通过波束维护流程来测量对应波束对之间的配对情况。在NR Uu中,基站通过使用不同的波束发送CSI-RS信号,然后终端对这个CSI-RS进行测量,并将测量结果(例如RSRP等)通过媒体接入控制元素(media access control element,MAC CE)上报给基站。Through the above-mentioned P1 to P3 processes, multiple beam pairs can be determined between the base station and the UE. A beam pair includes a transmit beam and a receive beam. After the base station and the terminal device establish a connection, in order to avoid changes in the best beam pair caused by relative position movement or channel changes, NR Uu measures the pairing between corresponding beam pairs through the beam maintenance process. In NR Uu, the base station sends CSI-RS signals by using different beams, and then the terminal measures the CSI-RS and reports the measurement results (such as RSRP, etc.) to the base station through the media access control element (MAC CE).

类似的,当侧行链路复用上述NR Uu波束扫描流程时,可以参考上述P1-P3过程,例如,UE之间首先利用侧行SSB(SL-SSB)同步信号完成粗波束对齐过程,然后通过侧行CSI-RS(SL CSI-RS)完成P2和P3过程(细波束对齐)。Similarly, when the sidelink reuses the above-mentioned NR Uu beam scanning process, the above-mentioned P1-P3 process can be referred to. For example, the UEs first use the sidelink SSB (SL-SSB) synchronization signal to complete the coarse beam alignment process, and then complete the P2 and P3 processes (fine beam alignment) through the sidelink CSI-RS (SL CSI-RS).

第四:混合自动重传(hybrid automatic repeat request,HARQ)码本。Fourth: hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) codebook.

HARQ码本可以理解为在某个上行时间单元上需要反馈的、与PDSCH对应的肯定应答(acknowledgement,ACK)/否定应答(negative acknowledgement,NACK)信息的一种排列,包含2层含义:第一:HARQ码本包含哪些PDSCH的ACK/NACK。第二:这些PDSCH的ACK/NACK在码本中的排列顺序。也就是说,将需要在同一个上行时间单元内发送的多个PDSCH的反馈信息ACK/NACK按照一定的顺序排列为一串连续的比特,就形成了HARQ码本。基于HARQ码本,UE将对应于多个下行链路的传输块(transport block,TB)或码块组(code block group,CBG)的多个比特的HARQ反馈信息,一次性地反馈给基站,有效提高了HARQ反馈的效率。The HARQ codebook can be understood as an arrangement of the positive acknowledgement (ACK)/negative acknowledgement (NACK) information corresponding to the PDSCH that needs to be fed back in a certain uplink time unit, which contains two meanings: First: which PDSCH ACK/NACKs are included in the HARQ codebook. Second: the order in which these PDSCH ACK/NACKs are arranged in the codebook. In other words, the feedback information ACK/NACKs of multiple PDSCHs that need to be sent in the same uplink time unit are arranged in a certain order as a string of continuous bits to form a HARQ codebook. Based on the HARQ codebook, the UE feeds back the HARQ feedback information of multiple bits corresponding to multiple downlink transport blocks (TB) or code block groups (CBG) to the base station at one time, effectively improving the efficiency of HARQ feedback.

基站根据UE反馈的信息(比特值为1或0)来定义的HARQ反馈状态,HARQ反馈状态包括ACK、NACK和非连续传输(discontinuous transmission,DTX)。The base station defines the HARQ feedback status based on the information fed back by the UE (bit value is 1 or 0). The HARQ feedback status includes ACK, NACK and discontinuous transmission (DTX).

ACK是基站根据UE反馈的比特值为1(表示正确接收)定义的状态,表示本次传输成功;ACK is a state defined by the base station based on the bit value of 1 (indicating correct reception) fed back by the UE, indicating that the transmission is successful;

NACK是基站根据UE反馈的比特值为0(表示错误接收)定义的状态,表示本次传输失败;NACK is a state defined by the base station based on the bit value of 0 (indicating erroneous reception) fed back by the UE, indicating that the transmission has failed;

DTX是基站没有收到UE的反馈信息时定义的状态,表示本次传输失败。DTX is a state defined when the base station does not receive feedback information from the UE, indicating that the transmission has failed.

应该理解,只有在下行传输中,接收方(UE)才需要向发送方(基站)发送HARQ反馈。对 于上行传输,因为接收方与调度器均在基站侧,所以当基站侧发现译码出错时,可以直接通知UE进行上行重传,不需要通过HARQ反馈指示UE。It should be understood that only in downlink transmission, the receiver (UE) needs to send HARQ feedback to the transmitter (base station). For uplink transmission, since the receiver and the scheduler are both on the base station side, when the base station side finds a decoding error, it can directly notify the UE to perform uplink retransmission without instructing the UE through HARQ feedback.

明确了HARQ反馈状态,UE还需要知道什么时候发送HARQ反馈。基站可以通过下行控制信息(downlink control information,DCI)中的HARQ反馈定时字段(PDSCH-to-HARQ-timing字段)指示的值K1来控制发送定时。HARQ反馈定时字段K1表示PDSCH数据和UE发送HARQ反馈信息之间的时隙(slot)偏移值。基站可以通过DCI中的HARQ反馈定时字段K1来控制发送定时。如果UE在n时隙收到PDSCH数据,那么UE将在n+K1时隙发送相应的HARQ反馈信息。例如,如图5所示的,假设UE在时隙0收到PDSCH数据,K1的取值为6,则UE需要在时隙6向基站反馈该PDSCH的HARQ反馈。After clarifying the HARQ feedback status, the UE also needs to know when to send HARQ feedback. The base station can control the sending timing through the value K1 indicated by the HARQ feedback timing field (PDSCH-to-HARQ-timing field) in the downlink control information (DCI). The HARQ feedback timing field K1 represents the time slot offset value between the PDSCH data and the UE sending the HARQ feedback information. The base station can control the sending timing through the HARQ feedback timing field K1 in the DCI. If the UE receives PDSCH data in time slot n, the UE will send the corresponding HARQ feedback information in time slot n+K1. For example, as shown in Figure 5, assuming that the UE receives PDSCH data in time slot 0 and the value of K1 is 6, the UE needs to feedback the HARQ feedback of the PDSCH to the base station in time slot 6.

在同一个时域位置发送的HARQ反馈序列称为HARQ码本(HARQ-ACK codebook),HARQ码本中可以包含一个或多个HARQ反馈,这些反馈可以包含TB级HARQ反馈或CBG级HARQ反馈,载波聚合场景下,还可能包含多个子载波的HARQ反馈。The HARQ feedback sequence sent at the same time domain position is called a HARQ codebook (HARQ-ACK codebook). The HARQ codebook may contain one or more HARQ feedbacks, which may include TB-level HARQ feedback or CBG-level HARQ feedback. In the carrier aggregation scenario, it may also include HARQ feedback of multiple subcarriers.

例如,如图6所示的例子,UE需要在时隙6向基站反馈时隙0上的PDSCH1(下行数据1)、时隙1上的PDSCH2(下行数据2)、时隙2上的PDSCH3(下行数据3分别对应的HARQ反馈。时隙0对应的K1值为6,时隙0对应的K1值为5,时隙0对应的K1值为4。For example, as shown in FIG6 , the UE needs to feed back to the base station HARQ feedback corresponding to PDSCH1 (downlink data 1) on time slot 0, PDSCH2 (downlink data 2) on time slot 1, and PDSCH3 (downlink data 3) on time slot 2 in time slot 6. The K1 value corresponding to time slot 0 is 6, the K1 value corresponding to time slot 0 is 5, and the K1 value corresponding to time slot 0 is 4.

HARQ码本包括动态码本(Dynamic codebook)模式和半静态码本(Semi-static codebook)模式。不同的码本模式中HARQ-ACK码本的生成方式不同,下面将简单进行介绍。The HARQ codebook includes a dynamic codebook mode and a semi-static codebook mode. The HARQ-ACK codebook is generated differently in different codebook modes, which will be briefly introduced below.

第一:半静态码本:First: Semi-static codebook:

半静态码本(Semi-static codebook):又称Type 1HARQ Codebook。半静态码本确定的过程分为以下步骤:1)终端设备确定发送ACK/NACK反馈信息的时隙为第i个时隙,具体时隙i的确定是根据PDSCH对应的物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel,PDCCH)确定的,假设有一个在时隙n的PDCCH调度PDSCH在时隙n+K0发送PDSCH,且指示该PDSCH对应的ACK/NACK反馈信息在时隙n+K0+K1,则该时隙n+K0+K1为时隙i。2)根据高层信令发送的配置信息获取K1的可能取值K1集合(K1 set),基于上述信息,终端设备确定所有要在第i个时隙发送反馈信息的所有的PDSCH所在的时隙。3)将该所有的PDSCH所在的时隙中的每个时隙中的PDSCH对应的ACK/NACK按照在时域上从前到后的顺序,以及所有时隙在载频或服务小区索引顺序串联,生成一个HARQ码本在时隙n+K0+K1上反馈。Semi-static codebook: also known as Type 1 HARQ Codebook. The process of determining the semi-static codebook is divided into the following steps: 1) The terminal device determines that the time slot for sending ACK/NACK feedback information is the i-th time slot. The specific time slot i is determined based on the physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) corresponding to the PDSCH. Assuming that there is a PDCCH in time slot n scheduling PDSCH to send PDSCH in time slot n+K0, and indicating that the ACK/NACK feedback information corresponding to the PDSCH is in time slot n+K0+K1, then the time slot n+K0+K1 is time slot i. 2) According to the configuration information sent by the high-level signaling, the possible value K1 set (K1 set) of K1 is obtained. Based on the above information, the terminal device determines the time slots where all PDSCHs that are to send feedback information in the i-th time slot are located. 3) The ACK/NACK corresponding to the PDSCH in each time slot of all the time slots where the PDSCH is located is connected in series in the order from front to back in the time domain, and all time slots are connected in the order of carrier frequency or serving cell index to generate a HARQ codebook and feedback it in time slot n+K0+K1.

换句话说,对于半静态码本,一旦高层参数配置好K1集合后,UE在每个上行时隙都会反馈当前时隙往前K1集合中包括的每个K1值所对应的可能传输数据的时隙的HARQ信息,除非出现以下情况:In other words, for the semi-static codebook, once the high-level parameters configure the K1 set, the UE will feedback the HARQ information of the time slots that may transmit data corresponding to each K1 value included in the K1 set before the current time slot in each uplink time slot, unless the following situations occur:

这些时隙本身就是上行时隙,则不反馈该时隙的HARQ信息。These time slots are uplink time slots themselves, and the HARQ information of the time slots is not fed back.

UE发生了带宽部分(band width part,BWP)切换,则从BWP切换完成后的下行时隙开始反馈,切换前的时隙的HARQ信息丢弃。If bandwidth part (BWP) switching occurs in UE, feedback starts from the downlink time slot after the BWP switching is completed, and the HARQ information of the time slot before the switching is discarded.

例如,图7所示的为一例半静态码本的示意图。在图7所示的例子中,以8:2时隙配比为例,图7中,“D”表示下行时隙(slot),“U”表示上行slot,“S”表示上下行共存slot。假设UE最多能同时接收3个载波(component carrier,CC)的数据,且UE收到的K1集合为{1,3,4,6},则针对目标HARQ反馈时隙(以slot 8为例),UE会在slot 8上反馈slot 2、slot 4、slot 5和slot 7上的HARQ信息,物理这些时隙上UE是否接收到数据。For example, FIG7 shows a schematic diagram of a semi-static codebook. In the example shown in FIG7, taking the 8:2 time slot ratio as an example, in FIG7, "D" represents a downlink time slot, "U" represents an uplink slot, and "S" represents an uplink and downlink coexistence slot. Assuming that the UE can receive data from up to 3 carriers (component carriers, CCs) at the same time, and the K1 set received by the UE is {1, 3, 4, 6}, then for the target HARQ feedback time slot (taking slot 8 as an example), the UE will feedback the HARQ information on slot 2, slot 4, slot 5 and slot 7 on slot 8, and whether the UE has received data on these time slots.

在图7所示的例子中:In the example shown in Figure 7:

载波1基于单个TB进行传输和反馈。且在slot 2、slot 4、slot 5和slot 7上均有数据传输。Carrier 1 transmits and feedbacks based on a single TB. And there is data transmission on slot 2, slot 4, slot 5 and slot 7.

载波2基于TB进行传输和反馈,一个时隙最多可以传输2个TB。在slot 2上传输了一个TB,slot 5上传输了2个TB,其余两个时隙(slot 4和slot 7)上没有数据传输。Carrier 2 transmits and feedbacks based on TB, and a time slot can transmit up to 2 TB. One TB is transmitted on slot 2, 2 TB are transmitted on slot 5, and no data is transmitted on the remaining two time slots (slot 4 and slot 7).

载波3基于CBG进行传输和反馈,一个时隙最多可传输4个CBG。在slot 2上传输了4个CBG,slot 5传输了2个CBG,其余两个时隙(slot 4和slot 7)上没有数据传输。Carrier 3 transmits and feedbacks based on CBG, and a time slot can transmit up to 4 CBGs. Four CBGs are transmitted on slot 2, two CBGs are transmitted on slot 5, and no data is transmitted on the remaining two time slots (slot 4 and slot 7).

假设各个载波上的数据均被UE正确接收,则slot 8上需要反馈的HARQ信息为载波1的反馈序列、载波2的反馈序列、载波3的反馈序列串联成的一串比特序列。具体包括:Assuming that the data on each carrier is correctly received by the UE, the HARQ information that needs to be fed back on slot 8 is a bit sequence composed of the feedback sequence of carrier 1, the feedback sequence of carrier 2, and the feedback sequence of carrier 3. Specifically, it includes:

UE在载波1上只接收1个TB,因此针对载波1上的每次下行传输(即slot 2、slot 4、slot 5 和slot 7中每个时隙)反馈的HARQ信息为1比特,表示为“①”。对于载波1,slot 2、slot 4、slot 5和slot 7中每个时隙需要反馈1比特,载波1上的反馈序列需要4比特。The UE receives only one TB on carrier 1, so for each downlink transmission on carrier 1 (i.e. slot 2, slot 4, slot 5 The HARQ information fed back in each time slot of slot 2, slot 4, slot 5 and slot 7 is 1 bit, which is indicated as "①". For carrier 1, each time slot of slot 2, slot 4, slot 5 and slot 7 needs to feed back 1 bit, and the feedback sequence on carrier 1 needs 4 bits.

UE在载波2上最多可同时接收2个TB,因此针对载波2上的每次下行传输反馈的HARQ信息为2比特,即使在slot 2上只接收到一个TB,另一个没有接收到的TB与之对应的比特位也会反馈NACK。对于载波2,slot 2、slot 4、slot 5和slot 7中每个时隙需要反馈2比特,分别表示为“②③”。载波2上的反馈序列需要8比特。UE can receive up to 2 TBs simultaneously on carrier 2, so the HARQ information fed back for each downlink transmission on carrier 2 is 2 bits. Even if only one TB is received on slot 2, the bit corresponding to the other TB that has not been received will also feed back NACK. For carrier 2, 2 bits need to be fed back for each time slot in slot 2, slot 4, slot 5, and slot 7, respectively, as "②③". The feedback sequence on carrier 2 requires 8 bits.

载波3基于CBG传输,且最多可传输的CBG个数为4,因此针对载波3上的每次下行传输反馈的HARQ信息为4比特,虽然在slot 5上只接收到了2个CBG的数据,但是在未接收到数据的CBG对应的比特位上也会反馈NACK。对于载波3,slot 2、slot 4、slot 5和slot 7中每个时隙需要反馈4比特,分别表示为“④⑤⑥⑦”。载波3上的反馈序列需要16比特。Carrier 3 is based on CBG transmission, and the maximum number of CBGs that can be transmitted is 4. Therefore, the HARQ information fed back for each downlink transmission on carrier 3 is 4 bits. Although only 2 CBG data are received on slot 5, NACK will also be fed back on the bit corresponding to the CBG that did not receive data. For carrier 3, 4 bits need to be fed back for each time slot in slot 2, slot 4, slot 5, and slot 7, respectively, represented as "④⑤⑥⑦". The feedback sequence on carrier 3 requires 16 bits.

如图7所示的,对于slot 2、slot 4、slot 5和slot 7中每个时隙,在时隙slot 8中均需要反馈7bit(对应载波1至载波3上,不同TB或者不同CBG上),其中,各个时隙的反馈信息按照时间从早到晚的顺序为:①②③④⑤⑥⑦。As shown in Figure 7, for each time slot in slot 2, slot 4, slot 5 and slot 7, 7 bits need to be fed back in time slot 8 (corresponding to carriers 1 to 3, different TBs or different CBGs), where the feedback information of each time slot is in the order from early to late: ①②③④⑤⑥⑦.

在从图7中的例子中,Type1半静态码本反馈序列包含28比特,但实际上只有13个比特是有效反馈。由此可知,Type1半静态码本的缺点是占用资源较多,因为无论对应的TB或CBG是否有数据传输,都需要进行HARQ反馈。In the example in Figure 7, the Type 1 semi-static codebook feedback sequence contains 28 bits, but in fact only 13 bits are valid feedback. It can be seen that the disadvantage of the Type 1 semi-static codebook is that it occupies more resources, because HARQ feedback is required regardless of whether the corresponding TB or CBG has data transmission.

第一:动态码本:First: Dynamic codebook:

动态码本(Dynamic codebook):又称Type 2HARQ Codebook。终端设备在每个PDCCH检测时机(monitoring occasion)检测PDCCH,利用检测到的PDCCH中的时域资源分配(time domain resource allocation)字段和PDSCH-to-HARQ-timing字段,首先根据Time Domain Resource Allocation字段中包含的PDCCH到PDSCH的时隙偏移值K0与PDCCH所在时隙编号确定PDSCH所在时隙编号,例如,PDCCH在时隙编号为n,根据K0,可以确定PDSCH所在的时隙编号为n+K0,然后根据PDSCH-to-HARQ-timing字段获取HARQ-ACK timing,即PDSCH到对应的ACK/NACK反馈的时隙偏移值K1,从而获知对应的ACK/NACK反馈所在时隙编号。例如,PDSCH所在的时隙编号为n+K0,则确定PDSCH对应的ACK/NACK反馈所在的时隙编号为n+K0+K1。将所有需要在同一个时隙发送的ACK/NACK按照该ACK/NACK所对应的PDSCH的PDCCH在时域上从前到后的顺序,串联生成一个HARQ-ACK码本。例如,在时隙编号为n+K0+K1的时隙中,要发送4个数据PDSCH 1~PDSCH 4对应的ACK/NACK反馈信息,且PDSCH 1~PDSCH 4对应的PDCCH为PDCCH 1~PDCCH 4,PDCCH 1~PDCCH 4为时域上从前到后的顺序,则将PDSCH 1~PDSCH 4的反馈信息依次串联生成一个HARQ码本。Dynamic codebook: also known as Type 2 HARQ Codebook. The terminal device detects PDCCH at each PDCCH monitoring occasion, and uses the time domain resource allocation field and PDSCH-to-HARQ-timing field in the detected PDCCH to first determine the time slot number of the PDSCH according to the time slot offset value K0 from PDCCH to PDSCH contained in the Time Domain Resource Allocation field and the time slot number of the PDCCH. For example, the PDCCH is numbered in time slot n. According to K0, the time slot number of the PDSCH can be determined as n+K0. Then, the HARQ-ACK timing is obtained according to the PDSCH-to-HARQ-timing field, that is, the time slot offset value K1 from PDSCH to the corresponding ACK/NACK feedback, so as to know the time slot number of the corresponding ACK/NACK feedback. For example, if the time slot number of the PDSCH is n+K0, the time slot number of the ACK/NACK feedback corresponding to the PDSCH is determined to be n+K0+K1. All ACK/NACKs that need to be sent in the same time slot are concatenated in the order of the PDCCH of the PDSCH corresponding to the ACK/NACK from front to back in the time domain to generate a HARQ-ACK codebook. For example, in the time slot numbered n+K0+K1, ACK/NACK feedback information corresponding to 4 data PDSCH 1 to PDSCH 4 is to be sent, and the PDCCH corresponding to PDSCH 1 to PDSCH 4 is PDCCH 1 to PDCCH 4, and PDCCH 1 to PDCCH 4 is in the order from front to back in the time domain, then the feedback information of PDSCH 1 to PDSCH 4 is concatenated in sequence to generate a HARQ codebook.

可以看出,动态码本区别于半静态码本,UE只会对有数据传输的位置发送HARQ反馈信息,即码本大小随着被调度的载波、TB或CBG个数动态变化。对应图7所示的例子,采用动态码本,HARQ反馈序列只需要13比特(均反馈的为ACK)。It can be seen that the dynamic codebook is different from the semi-static codebook. The UE will only send HARQ feedback information to the location where data is transmitted, that is, the codebook size changes dynamically with the number of scheduled carriers, TBs or CBGs. Corresponding to the example shown in Figure 7, using a dynamic codebook, the HARQ feedback sequence only needs 13 bits (all feedback is ACK).

如果DCI接收正常,动态码本在资源消耗上优势明显。但一旦DCI接收异常,可能会导致UE发送的HARQ反馈信息数量与基站发送的TB或CBG个数不一致,这会使当前码本包含的所有反馈不能被正确接收。If DCI reception is normal, the dynamic codebook has obvious advantages in resource consumption. However, if DCI reception is abnormal, the number of HARQ feedback information sent by the UE may be inconsistent with the number of TBs or CBGs sent by the base station, which will cause all feedback contained in the current codebook to fail to be received correctly.

为了解决这个问题,NR协议中通过DCI中的下行分配索引(downlink assignment index,DAI)字段来指示UE需要发送HARQ反馈信息的个数。DAI字段分为以下两个部分:To solve this problem, the NR protocol uses the downlink assignment index (DAI) field in the DCI to indicate the number of HARQ feedback messages that the UE needs to send. The DAI field is divided into the following two parts:

计数器DAI(counterDAI,C-DAI):指示从收到DCI时刻到当前时刻,下行调度传输TB或CBG的次数。或者说,C-DAI用于指示:截止到该DCI调度的下行传输的数量。C-DAI按照先载波维度,后时域维度的方式进行计数。Counter DAI (counterDAI, C-DAI): indicates the number of downlink scheduled transmissions of TB or CBG from the moment the DCI is received to the current moment. In other words, C-DAI is used to indicate the number of downlink transmissions scheduled up to the DCI. C-DAI counts in the carrier dimension first and then in the time domain dimension.

载波聚合配置下的总DAI(total DAI,T-DAI):指示到目前为止所有载波上的下行传输总次数。或者说,T-DAI指示:截止到该DCI所在的监听机会(monitoring occasion,MO)的所有载波的下行传输的总数。Total DAI (T-DAI) in carrier aggregation configuration: indicates the total number of downlink transmissions on all carriers so far. In other words, T-DAI indicates the total number of downlink transmissions on all carriers up to the monitoring occasion (MO) where the DCI is located.

C-DAI和T-DAI都是十进制的,但实际上分别用2bit环回表示,即信令中是按照十进制计数值模四取余。Both C-DAI and T-DAI are decimal, but are actually represented by 2-bit loopback, that is, the signaling uses the modulo 4 modulus of the decimal count value.

例如如图8所示的,图8所示的为一例下行数据传输中DAI数值的示意图。在图8所示的例 子中,图8中每个方框表示一个时隙,每个时隙传输一个TB(即一个数据包),假设基站共需要传输了8个数据包。DAI为(x,y)表示:C-DAI的值为x,T-DAI的值为y。例如,DAI为(0,1)表示当前传输的是第1个数据包,到目前为止一共传输了2个数据包。DAI为(5,5)表示当前传输的是第6个数据包,到目前为止一共传输了6个数据包,DAI为(7,7)表示当前传输的是第8个数据包,到目前为止一共传输了8个数据包。假设当载波1上时隙3出现丢包时,UE不会接收到DAI为(6,7)的数据包,即UE在DAI为(5,5)的数据包接收到之后,跳过接收DAI为(6,7)的数据包,而接收到DAI为(7,7)的数据包。UE可根据DAI为(7,7)知道此时需要反馈8个确认信息,并且可以根据接收到的DAI为(5,5)的数据包以及DAI为(7,7)的数据包,根据C-DAI的值(C-DAI的值为7,表示当前传输的是第8个数据包)判断出是第7个数据丢失了。For example, as shown in FIG8, FIG8 is a schematic diagram of a DAI value in downlink data transmission. In the figure, each box in Figure 8 represents a time slot, and each time slot transmits a TB (i.e., a data packet). It is assumed that the base station needs to transmit a total of 8 data packets. DAI is (x, y) means: the value of C-DAI is x, and the value of T-DAI is y. For example, DAI is (0, 1) means that the current transmission is the first data packet, and a total of 2 data packets have been transmitted so far. DAI is (5, 5) means that the current transmission is the sixth data packet, and a total of 6 data packets have been transmitted so far. DAI is (7, 7) means that the current transmission is the eighth data packet, and a total of 8 data packets have been transmitted so far. Assume that when packet loss occurs in time slot 3 on carrier 1, the UE will not receive the data packet with DAI (6, 7), that is, after receiving the data packet with DAI (5, 5), the UE skips receiving the data packet with DAI (6, 7) and receives the data packet with DAI (7, 7). The UE can know that 8 confirmation messages need to be fed back based on the DAI of (7, 7), and can determine that the 7th data is lost based on the received data packets with DAI of (5, 5) and the data packets with DAI of (7, 7) and the value of C-DAI (the value of C-DAI is 7, indicating that the 8th data packet is currently being transmitted).

在图8所示的例子中,如果采用动态码本,如图9所示的,按照先载波增序后时隙增序的方式,动态码本需要8比特的反馈信息。如果采用半静态码本,如图9所示的,按照先时隙增序后载波增序的方式,半静态码本需要12比特的反馈信息。In the example shown in FIG8, if a dynamic codebook is used, as shown in FIG9, in the manner of first increasing the carrier and then increasing the time slot, the dynamic codebook requires 8 bits of feedback information. If a semi-static codebook is used, as shown in FIG9, in the manner of first increasing the time slot and then increasing the carrier, the semi-static codebook requires 12 bits of feedback information.

在NR Uu中,基站和UE之间通过CSI-RS参考信号进行波束(或者波束对)的维护,并通过MAC CE上报测量的CSI-RS的RSRP等测量结果。一个参考信号(例如为CSI-RS)对应着一个CSI-RS测量报告(CSI-reporting),或者说,一个波束对对应着一个CSI-RS测量报告。由于RSRP范围很大,在NR Uu中,需要采用7bit来量化这个RSRP值,即一个CSI-RS对应的测量报告的长度需要7比特,这7bit长度的量化信息对应着RSRP为[-140,-44]dBm的范围,RSRP最大值和最小值之间的差值(step size)=1dB。In NR Uu, the base station and UE maintain beams (or beam pairs) through CSI-RS reference signals, and report the measured CSI-RS RSRP and other measurement results through MAC CE. One reference signal (such as CSI-RS) corresponds to one CSI-RS measurement report (CSI-reporting), or one beam pair corresponds to one CSI-RS measurement report. Since the RSRP range is very large, in NR Uu, 7 bits are needed to quantize the RSRP value, that is, the length of the measurement report corresponding to a CSI-RS requires 7 bits. The quantization information of this 7-bit length corresponds to the RSRP range of [-140, -44] dBm, and the difference between the maximum and minimum RSRP values (step size) = 1 dB.

对于侧行链路,例如对于处于频率范围2(frequency range2,FR2)的侧行链路,如果也采用CSI-RS等参考信号维护波束,且一个波束对通过7bit量化参考信号的测量结果。由于一个通信对(一个通信对为一个UE和另一个UE组成的通信对)之间需要维护多套波束对,每个(每套)波束对需要7bit量化考参考信号的测量结果,导致一个通信对之间需要利用很多的通信资源来反馈参考信号(即波束)的测量结果,需要反馈的数据量很大,通信资源消耗严重。并且,一个UE还可以和其它多个UE分别建立通信对,在这种情况下,需要反馈的数据量会很大,通信资源消耗更加严重。For the sidelink, for example, for the sidelink in frequency range 2 (FR2), if reference signals such as CSI-RS are also used to maintain the beam, and a beam pair uses 7-bit quantization to measure the reference signal. Since multiple sets of beam pairs need to be maintained between a communication pair (a communication pair is a communication pair consisting of a UE and another UE), each (each set of) beam pairs needs 7-bit quantization to measure the reference signal, resulting in a communication pair using a lot of communication resources to feedback the measurement results of the reference signal (i.e., beam). The amount of data that needs to be fed back is very large, and the communication resource consumption is serious. In addition, a UE can also establish communication pairs with multiple other UEs. In this case, the amount of data that needs to be fed back will be very large, and the communication resource consumption will be even more serious.

鉴于此,本申请提供了一种侧行链路上信息传输的方法,将多个波束(即多个波束对)对应的反馈信息(即测量结果)聚合在一起发送,并且,每个波束的反馈信息不是直接指示该波束的测量结果,例如测量结果包括:RSRP、RSRQ、SNR、BLER或者SINR中的至少一种,而是指示波束的测量结果与阈值的比较结果,或者指示波束测量结果是否满足条件。而用于指示测量结果是否满足条件或者比较结果所需要的信息长度是少于用于直接指示测量结果的信息长度,可以有效降低需要反馈的数据量。换句话说,在同一个时间单内反馈多个参考信号的测量结果与阈值的比较结果、或者反馈多个参考信号的测量结果是否满足条件,而不是直接反馈多个参考信号的测量结果,不同的参考信号对应不同的波束方向(不同的参考信号使用不同波束发送)。而用于指示比较结果或者测量结果是否满足条件的信息长度是少于用于直接指示测量结果的信息长度,可以有效降低需要反馈的数据量,减少了反馈信息的长度以及反馈信息所需要的通信资源,通过这种方式,可以有效降低需要反馈的数据量,从而降低了对通信资源消耗。In view of this, the present application provides a method for information transmission on a side link, in which feedback information (i.e., measurement results) corresponding to multiple beams (i.e., multiple beam pairs) are aggregated and sent together, and the feedback information of each beam does not directly indicate the measurement result of the beam, for example, the measurement result includes: at least one of RSRP, RSRQ, SNR, BLER or SINR, but indicates the comparison result of the measurement result of the beam with a threshold, or indicates whether the beam measurement result meets the condition. The information length required to indicate whether the measurement result meets the condition or the comparison result is less than the information length used to directly indicate the measurement result, which can effectively reduce the amount of data that needs to be fed back. In other words, the comparison results of the measurement results of multiple reference signals with the threshold, or the feedback of whether the measurement results of multiple reference signals meet the conditions, are fed back in the same time unit, instead of directly feeding back the measurement results of multiple reference signals, and different reference signals correspond to different beam directions (different reference signals are sent using different beams). The length of information used to indicate whether the comparison result or measurement result meets the conditions is less than the length of information used to directly indicate the measurement result, which can effectively reduce the amount of data required for feedback, reduce the length of the feedback information and the communication resources required for the feedback information. In this way, the amount of data required for feedback can be effectively reduced, thereby reducing the consumption of communication resources.

下面将示例性的说明可以适用本申请提供的方法的通信系统。The following is an exemplary description of a communication system to which the method provided by the present application can be applied.

本申请提供的方法可以应用在侧行链路通信的场景中。The method provided in the present application can be applied in the scenario of side link communication.

示例性的,图10所示的为一例可以适用本申请提供的方法的通信系统示意图,如图10中的a图所示的,终端设备1和终端设备2均在同一个网络设备覆盖的范围内。如图10中的b图所示的,终端设备1在网络设备覆盖的范围内,终端设备2不在网络设备覆盖的范围内。如图10中的c图所示的,终端设备1在网络设备1覆盖的范围内,终端设备2在网络设备2覆盖的范围内。终端设备1可以通过基站调度的方式使用侧行链路通信资源和终端设备2进行通信,该通信资源可以包括授权频段以及非授权频段。或者,终端设备1也可以不采用基站调度模式进行通信,而由终端设备1在资源池中进行资源自选,即从资源池中选择用于侧行链路通信的资源,该资源可以包括非授权频段以及非授权频段。如图10中的d图所示的,终端设备1和终端设备2均不在同 一个网络设备覆盖的范围内,即都处于非覆盖范围内,所以终端设备1和终端设备2之间可以采用资源自选的方式搭建侧行链路进行通信。Exemplarily, FIG10 is a schematic diagram of a communication system to which the method provided in the present application can be applied. As shown in FIG10 a, terminal device 1 and terminal device 2 are both within the coverage of the same network device. As shown in FIG10 b, terminal device 1 is within the coverage of the network device, and terminal device 2 is not within the coverage of the network device. As shown in FIG10 c, terminal device 1 is within the coverage of network device 1, and terminal device 2 is within the coverage of network device 2. Terminal device 1 can communicate with terminal device 2 using sidelink communication resources in a manner of base station scheduling, and the communication resources may include authorized frequency bands and unauthorized frequency bands. Alternatively, terminal device 1 may communicate without adopting the base station scheduling mode, and terminal device 1 may select resources from the resource pool, that is, select resources for sidelink communication from the resource pool, and the resources may include unauthorized frequency bands and unauthorized frequency bands. As shown in FIG10 d, terminal device 1 and terminal device 2 are not within the same Within the coverage range of a network device, that is, they are all within the non-coverage range, so the terminal device 1 and the terminal device 2 can use the resource self-selection method to build a side link for communication.

可以理解,侧行链路上通信使用的频谱可以是非授权频段、授权频段或者专用频段等。在使用非授权频段进行传输前,需要满足一些要求后进行信道接入,例如需要进行LBT等等。本申请实施例在此不作限制。It is understood that the spectrum used for communication on the side link may be an unlicensed frequency band, a licensed frequency band, or a dedicated frequency band, etc. Before using the unlicensed frequency band for transmission, channel access needs to meet certain requirements, such as the need to perform LBT, etc. The embodiments of the present application are not limited here.

可选的,在本申请实施例中,网络设备也可以称为:接入网设备、无线接入网设备、无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)节点,RAN实体或接入节点等,构成通信系统的一部分,用以帮助终端设备(包括低速终端设备和高速终端设备)实现无线接入。Optionally, in an embodiment of the present application, the network device may also be referred to as: access network device, wireless access network device, wireless access network (RAN) node, RAN entity or access node, etc., constituting a part of the communication system to help terminal devices (including low-speed terminal devices and high-speed terminal devices) achieve wireless access.

在一种可能的场景中,网络设备可以是任意一种具有无线收发功能的设备。例如包括:传统通用移动通信系统(Universal Mobile Telecommunications System、UMTS)、LTE通信系统中的传统宏基站(evolved node B,eNB),在异构网络(Heterogeneous Network,HetNet)场景下可以是微基站eNB,在分布式基站场景可以是基带处理单元基带单元(Base Band Unit,BBU)和射频拉远单元(Remote Radio Unit,RRU),在云无线接入网(Cloud Radio Access Netowrk,CRAN)场景下可以是基带池(BBU pool)RRU,在未来无线通信系统中可以是gNB,3GPP后续演进的基站,WiFi系统中的接入节点,无线中继节点,无线回传节点等。基站可以是:宏基站,微基站,微微基站,小站,中继站,或,气球站等。网络设备还可以是服务器,可穿戴设备,或车载设备等。In a possible scenario, the network device can be any device with wireless transceiver functions. For example, it includes: traditional macro base stations (evolved node B, eNB) in traditional universal mobile telecommunications systems (UMTS) and LTE communication systems, micro base stations (eNB) in heterogeneous networks (HetNet) scenarios, baseband processing units (BBU) and remote radio units (RRU) in distributed base station scenarios, baseband pools (BBU pool) RRU in cloud radio access networks (CRAN) scenarios, gNBs in future wireless communication systems, base stations of subsequent evolution of 3GPP, access nodes in WiFi systems, wireless relay nodes, wireless backhaul nodes, etc. Base stations can be: macro base stations, micro base stations, micro-micro base stations, small stations, relay stations, or balloon stations, etc. Network devices can also be servers, wearable devices, or vehicle-mounted devices, etc.

在另一种可能的场景中,网络设备可以是基站(base station)、演进型基站(evolved NodeB,eNodeB)、接入点(access point,AP)、发送接收点(transmission reception point,TRP)、第六代(6th generation,6G)移动通信系统中的下一代基站、未来移动通信系统中的基站等。可选的,网络设备还可以是中继节点或宿主节点、或者是CRAN场景下的无线控制器。可选的,网络设备还可以是V2X技术中的接入网设备,例如为路侧单元(road side unit,RSU)。本申请中的网络设备的全部或部分功能也可以通过在硬件上运行的软件功能来实现,或者通过平台(例如云平台)上实例化的虚拟化功能来实现。本申请中的网络设备还可以是能实现全部或部分无线接入网设备功能的逻辑节点、逻辑模块或软件。In another possible scenario, the network device may be a base station, an evolved NodeB (eNodeB), an access point (AP), a transmission reception point (TRP), a next-generation base station in a sixth-generation (6G) mobile communication system, a base station in a future mobile communication system, etc. Optionally, the network device may also be a relay node or a host node, or a wireless controller in a CRAN scenario. Optionally, the network device may also be an access network device in V2X technology, such as a road side unit (RSU). All or part of the functions of the network device in this application may also be implemented by software functions running on hardware, or by virtualization functions instantiated on a platform (such as a cloud platform). The network device in this application may also be a logical node, a logical module or software that can implement all or part of the functions of a wireless access network device.

在NR技术中,网络设备(例如,gNB)可以由一个gNB集中式单元(Centralized Unit,CU)和一个或者多个gNB分布式单元(Distributed Unit,DU)构成。gNB-CU和gNB-DU是不同的逻辑节点,可以部署在不同的物理设备上,或者部署在相同的物理设备上。In NR technology, a network device (e.g., gNB) can consist of a gNB centralized unit (CU) and one or more gNB distributed units (DU). The gNB-CU and gNB-DU are different logical nodes and can be deployed on different physical devices or on the same physical device.

在本申请实施例中,终端设备也可以称为终端、用户设备(user equipment,UE)、移动台、移动终端等。终端可以广泛应用于各种场景,例如,D2D、V2X通信、机器类通信(machine-type communication,MTC)、物联网(internet of things,IOT)、虚拟现实、增强现实、工业控制、自动驾驶、远程医疗、智能电网、智能家具、智能办公、智能穿戴、智能交通、智慧城市等。终端可以是手机、平板电脑、带无线收发功能的电脑、可穿戴设备、车辆、无人机、直升机、飞机、轮船、机器人、机械臂、智能家居设备等。本申请的实施例对终端的设备形态不做限定。In the embodiments of the present application, the terminal device may also be referred to as a terminal, a user equipment (UE), a mobile station, a mobile terminal, etc. The terminal can be widely used in various scenarios, for example, D2D, V2X communication, machine-type communication (MTC), Internet of Things (IOT), virtual reality, augmented reality, industrial control, automatic driving, telemedicine, smart grid, smart furniture, smart office, smart wear, smart transportation, smart city, etc. The terminal may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a computer with wireless transceiver function, a wearable device, a vehicle, a drone, a helicopter, an airplane, a ship, a robot, a mechanical arm, a smart home device, etc. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the device form of the terminal.

应理解,图10所示的通信系统仅仅是示例性的,不应该对适用于本申请实施例的通信系统造成任何限制。例如,图10所示的通信系统中还可以包括更多或者更小的终端设备,图10所示的通信系统中包括的网络设备或者终端设备可以是上述各种形式的网络设备或者终端设备。本申请实施例在图中不再一一示出。It should be understood that the communication system shown in FIG10 is merely exemplary and should not impose any limitation on the communication system applicable to the embodiments of the present application. For example, the communication system shown in FIG10 may also include more or smaller terminal devices, and the network device or terminal device included in the communication system shown in FIG10 may be the various forms of network devices or terminal devices described above. The embodiments of the present application are no longer shown one by one in the figures.

下文结合具体的例子说明本申请提供的方法。The method provided by the present application is described below with reference to specific examples.

应理解,在本申请实施例中,以终端设备作为执行方法的执行主体为例,对方法进行说明。作为示例而非限定,本申请中的终端设备也可以是支持该终端设备实现该方法的芯片、芯片系统、或处理器等。本申请实施例在此不作限制。It should be understood that in the embodiments of the present application, the method is described by taking the terminal device as the execution subject of the execution method as an example. As an example but not a limitation, the terminal device in the present application may also be a chip, a chip system, or a processor that supports the terminal device to implement the method. The embodiments of the present application are not limited here.

图11是本申请一个实施例提供的侧行链路上信息传输的方法的示意性交互图,该方法1100可以应用在图10所示的场景中,当然也可以应用在其他侧行链路通信场景中,本申请实施例在此不作限制。Figure 11 is a schematic interactive diagram of a method for information transmission on a side link provided by an embodiment of the present application. The method 1100 can be applied in the scenario shown in Figure 10, and of course can also be applied in other side link communication scenarios, and the embodiment of the present application is not limited here.

如图11所示,图11中示出的方法1100可以包括S1110至S1130。下面结合图11详细说明方法1100中的各个步骤。 As shown in Fig. 11 , the method 1100 shown in Fig. 11 may include S1110 to S1130. The steps in the method 1100 are described in detail below in conjunction with Fig. 11 .

S1110,第一终端设备在K个时频资源上分别向第二终端设备发送K个参考信号,K个时频资源中不同的时频资源在时域上不重叠,K为大于1的整数。S1110, the first terminal device sends K reference signals to the second terminal device on K time-frequency resources respectively, different time-frequency resources among the K time-frequency resources do not overlap in the time domain, and K is an integer greater than 1.

相应的,第二终端设备在K个时频资源上分别接收来自第一终端设备的K个参考信号。Correspondingly, the second terminal device receives K reference signals from the first terminal device on K time-frequency resources respectively.

应该理解的是,在本申请实施例中,K个参考信号分别对应不同的波束,即K个参考信号是第一终端设备分别利用不同的波束发送的,不同波束(即K个波束)的方向不同。换句话说,K个时频资源中不同的时频资源对应不同的波束方向。第一终端设备在K个时频资源上,分别利用不同的波束向第二终端设备发送K个参考信号,每个时频资源用于发送一个参考信号。也就是说,第一终端设备在K个时频资源上一共向第二终端设备发送了K个参考信号。可选的,K个参考信号对应的参考信号标识不同,可以通过不同的参考信号标识来指示不同的波束。It should be understood that in an embodiment of the present application, the K reference signals correspond to different beams, that is, the K reference signals are sent by the first terminal device using different beams, and the directions of different beams (i.e., K beams) are different. In other words, different time-frequency resources among the K time-frequency resources correspond to different beam directions. The first terminal device sends K reference signals to the second terminal device on the K time-frequency resources using different beams, and each time-frequency resource is used to send a reference signal. In other words, the first terminal device sends a total of K reference signals to the second terminal device on the K time-frequency resources. Optionally, the reference signal identifiers corresponding to the K reference signals are different, and different beams can be indicated by different reference signal identifiers.

示例性的,K个时频资源中不同的时频资源在时域上不重叠,换句话说,K个时频资源在时域上是按照从早到晚的顺序排列的。例如,K的取值为3,第一个时频资源可以占据时隙n,第二个时频资源可以占据时隙n+1,第三个时频资源可以占据时隙n+3。Exemplarily, different time-frequency resources among the K time-frequency resources do not overlap in the time domain. In other words, the K time-frequency resources are arranged in order from early to late in the time domain. For example, the value of K is 3, the first time-frequency resource can occupy time slot n, the second time-frequency resource can occupy time slot n+1, and the third time-frequency resource can occupy time slot n+3.

当然,在本申请实施例中,K个时频资源在时域上可以是连续的,也可以是不连续的。假设K的取值为3,如果第一个时频资源占据时隙n,第二个时频资源可以占据时隙n+1,第三个时频资源可以占据时隙n+2,这种情况为时域上连续的情况。又例如,如果第一个时频资源可以占据时隙n,第二个时频资源可以占据时隙n+2,第三个时频资源可以占据时隙n+5,这种情况为时域上不连续的情况。Of course, in the embodiment of the present application, the K time-frequency resources can be continuous or discontinuous in the time domain. Assuming that the value of K is 3, if the first time-frequency resource occupies time slot n, the second time-frequency resource can occupy time slot n+1, and the third time-frequency resource can occupy time slot n+2, this situation is continuous in the time domain. For another example, if the first time-frequency resource can occupy time slot n, the second time-frequency resource can occupy time slot n+2, and the third time-frequency resource can occupy time slot n+5, this situation is discontinuous in the time domain.

示例性的,K个时频资源中,每个时频资源在时域上可以占据至少一个符号、至少一个时隙或者至少一个子帧等。本申请实施例对于每个时频资源的时域长度不作限制。Exemplarily, among the K time-frequency resources, each time-frequency resource may occupy at least one symbol, at least one time slot, or at least one subframe in the time domain, etc. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the time domain length of each time-frequency resource.

在本申请的实施例中,符号也称为时域符号,可以是正交频分复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing,OFDM)符号,也可以是单载波频分多址(single carrier frequency division multiple access,SC-FDMA)符号,其中SC-FDMA又称为带有转换预编码的正交频分复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing with transform precoding,OFDM with TP)。In an embodiment of the present application, a symbol is also called a time domain symbol, which may be an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (orthogonal frequency division multiplexing, OFDM) symbol or a single carrier frequency division multiple access (single carrier frequency division multiple access, SC-FDMA) symbol, wherein SC-FDMA is also called orthogonal frequency division multiplexing with transform precoding (orthogonal frequency division multiplexing with transform precoding, OFDM with TP).

可选的,在K个时频资源中,不同的时频资源在频域上可以重叠,也可以不重叠。Optionally, among the K time-frequency resources, different time-frequency resources may or may not overlap in the frequency domain.

可选的,K个时频资源中的频域资源可以包括:授权频段、非授权频段或者专用频段等。本申请实施例在此不作限制。Optionally, the frequency domain resources in the K time-frequency resources may include: a licensed frequency band, an unlicensed frequency band, or a dedicated frequency band, etc. The embodiment of the present application is not limited here.

可选的,S1110也可以表述为:第一终端设备在K个时频资源中的每个时频资源上分别向第二终端设备发送一个参考信号,K个时频资源中不同的时频资源对应不同的波束方向。或者,第一终端设备在K个时频资源中的每个时频资源、分别利用不同的波束向第二终端设备发送一个参考信号。Optionally, S1110 can also be expressed as: the first terminal device sends a reference signal to the second terminal device on each of the K time-frequency resources, and different time-frequency resources in the K time-frequency resources correspond to different beam directions. Alternatively, the first terminal device sends a reference signal to the second terminal device on each of the K time-frequency resources using different beams.

S1120,第二终端设备在K个时频资源上分别对参考信号进行测量,得到K个参考信号的测量结果,并确定K个参考信号的测量结果是否满足条件,或者确定K个参考信号的测量结果与阈值的比较结果。S1120, the second terminal device measures the reference signal on K time-frequency resources respectively, obtains the measurement results of the K reference signals, and determines whether the measurement results of the K reference signals meet the conditions, or determines the comparison results of the measurement results of the K reference signals with the threshold.

例如,第二终端设备可以在K个时频资源分别检测参考信号,并得到每个时频资源上参考信号的测量结果,由于每个时频资源对应不同的波束,或者说,每个参考信号对应不同的波束,因此,K个参考信号的测量结果也可以称为K个波束的测量结果。For example, the second terminal device can detect the reference signal on K time-frequency resources respectively, and obtain the measurement result of the reference signal on each time-frequency resource. Since each time-frequency resource corresponds to a different beam, or each reference signal corresponds to a different beam, the measurement result of K reference signals can also be called the measurement result of K beams.

示例性的,在本申请实施例中,第一终端设备在K个时频资源向第二终端设备发送的参考信号可以包括:CSI-RS、SSB、侧行链路辅同步信号(sidelink secondary synchronization signal,S-SSS)、侧行链路主同步信号(sidelink primary synchronization signal、S-SSS)、或者DMRS中的至少一种。当然,在本申请的其它实现方式中,参考信号还可以包括其它参考信号,只要该参考信号可以用于波束测量即可,本申请实施例在此不作限制。Exemplarily, in an embodiment of the present application, the reference signal sent by the first terminal device to the second terminal device in K time-frequency resources may include: CSI-RS, SSB, sidelink secondary synchronization signal (S-SSS), sidelink primary synchronization signal (S-SSS), or at least one of DMRS. Of course, in other implementations of the present application, the reference signal may also include other reference signals, as long as the reference signal can be used for beam measurement, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit this.

示例性的,参考信号的测量结果可以包括:参考信号的RSRP的值、参考信号的RSRQ的值、参考信号的SNR的值、或者参考信号的SINR的值中的至少一种。当然,在本申请的其它实现方式中,参考信号的测量结果还可以包括其它测量值,本申请实施例在此不作限制。Exemplarily, the measurement result of the reference signal may include: at least one of the value of RSRP of the reference signal, the value of RSRQ of the reference signal, the value of SNR of the reference signal, or the value of SINR of the reference signal. Of course, in other implementations of the present application, the measurement result of the reference signal may also include other measurement values, which are not limited in the embodiments of the present application.

还应理解的时候,上述的参考信号均指的是第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送的参考信号,即侧行链路上的参考信号,这些参考信号均可以用于侧行链路上的波束测量。It should also be understood that the above-mentioned reference signals all refer to reference signals sent by the first terminal device to the second terminal device, that is, reference signals on the side link, and these reference signals can all be used for beam measurement on the side link.

作为一种可能的实现方式,在S1120中,第二终端设备得到K个参考信号的测量结果后,进 一步的判断K个参考信号的测量结果(即K个波束的测量结果)是否满足条件,根据K个参考信号的测量结果是否满足条件生成指示信息(即第一指示信息),第一指示信息用于指示:K个参考信号的测量结果是否满足条件。As a possible implementation, in S1120, after the second terminal device obtains the measurement results of K reference signals, In one step, determine whether the measurement results of the K reference signals (i.e., the measurement results of the K beams) meet the conditions, and generate indication information (i.e., first indication information) according to whether the measurement results of the K reference signals meet the conditions. The first indication information is used to indicate whether the measurement results of the K reference signals meet the conditions.

作为另一种可能的实现方式,在S1120中,第二终端设备得到K个参考信号的测量结果后,进一步确定K个参考信号的测量结果与阈值比较结果(比较结果例如包括差值等),根据比较结果生成指示信息(即第二指示信息),第二指示信息用于指示:K个参考信号的测量结果与阈值比较结果。As another possible implementation method, in S1120, after the second terminal device obtains the measurement results of the K reference signals, it further determines the comparison results of the measurement results of the K reference signals with the threshold (the comparison results, for example, include differences, etc.), and generates indication information (i.e., second indication information) based on the comparison results. The second indication information is used to indicate: the comparison results of the measurement results of the K reference signals with the threshold.

可选的,作为一种可能的实现方式,第二终端设备可以得到每个参考信号测量结果对应的指示信息。即每个参考信号(每个波束)均对应一个指示信息(第一指示信息或者第二指示信息),一个第一指示信息用于指示:一个参考信号(或者一个波束)的测量结果是否满足条件,或者一个第二指示信息用于指示:一个参考信号(或者一个波束)的测量结果与阈值的比较结果。Optionally, as a possible implementation method, the second terminal device can obtain indication information corresponding to each reference signal measurement result. That is, each reference signal (each beam) corresponds to an indication information (first indication information or second indication information), and a first indication information is used to indicate whether the measurement result of a reference signal (or a beam) meets the condition, or a second indication information is used to indicate the comparison result of the measurement result of a reference signal (or a beam) with a threshold.

可选的,作为另一种可能的实现方式,第二终端设备可以得到K个参考信号的测量结果后,判断K个参考信号的测量结果是否满足条件,得到K个参考信号测量结果对应的指示信息。在这种情况下,K个参考信号的测量结果(K个波束的测量结果)对应一个指示信息(第一指示信息),第一指示信息用于指示:K个参考信号的测量结果(K个波束的测量结果)是否满足条件。Optionally, as another possible implementation, after obtaining the measurement results of the K reference signals, the second terminal device may determine whether the measurement results of the K reference signals meet the conditions, and obtain indication information corresponding to the measurement results of the K reference signals. In this case, the measurement results of the K reference signals (the measurement results of the K beams) correspond to one indication information (first indication information), and the first indication information is used to indicate whether the measurement results of the K reference signals (the measurement results of the K beams) meet the conditions.

S1130,第二终端设备在第一时频资源向第一终端设备发送反馈信息,反馈信息包括:用于指示K个参考信号的测量结果是否满足条件的第一指示信息,或者用于指示K个参考信号的测量结果与阈值的比较结果的第二指示信息中的至少一种。S1130, the second terminal device sends feedback information to the first terminal device in the first time-frequency resource, and the feedback information includes: first indication information for indicating whether the measurement results of the K reference signals meet the conditions, or at least one of second indication information for indicating the comparison results of the measurement results of the K reference signals with the threshold.

相应的,第一终端设备在第一时频资源上接收来自第二终端设备的反馈信息。Correspondingly, the first terminal device receives feedback information from the second terminal device on the first time-frequency resource.

可选的,作为一种可能的实现方式,在S1130中,第二终端设备可以将用于指示K个参考信号的测量结果是否满足条件的第一指示信息在第一时频资源上反馈给第一终端设备。换句话说,第二终端设备将K个波束测量结果是否满足条件的反馈信息(或者也可以称为波束报告)在同一个时间单元中反馈给第一终端设备,即将多个波束的测量结果是否满足条件的反馈信息聚合在一个时间单元(时域资源)中进行反馈。每个波束的反馈信息不是直接指示该波束的测量结果,而是指示波束的测量结果是否满足条件。而用于指示测量结果是否满足条件的信息长度是少于用于指示测量结果的信息长度,可以有效降低需要反馈的数据量,减少了反馈信息的长度以及反馈信息所需要的通信资源,从而降低了对通信资源消耗。Optionally, as a possible implementation method, in S1130, the second terminal device may feed back first indication information for indicating whether the measurement results of K reference signals meet the conditions to the first terminal device on the first time-frequency resource. In other words, the second terminal device feeds back the feedback information (or also referred to as a beam report) on whether the measurement results of K beams meet the conditions to the first terminal device in the same time unit, that is, the feedback information on whether the measurement results of multiple beams meet the conditions is aggregated in one time unit (time domain resource) for feedback. The feedback information of each beam does not directly indicate the measurement result of the beam, but indicates whether the measurement result of the beam meets the conditions. The length of the information used to indicate whether the measurement result meets the conditions is less than the length of the information used to indicate the measurement result, which can effectively reduce the amount of data that needs to be fed back, reduce the length of the feedback information and the communication resources required for the feedback information, thereby reducing the consumption of communication resources.

可选的,作为另一种可能的实现方式,在S1130中,第二终端设备可以将用于指示K个参考信号的测量结果与阈值的比较结果(比较结果例如包括差值等)的第二指示信息在第一时频资源上反馈给第一终端设备。换句话说,第二终端设备将K个波束测量结果与阈值的比较结果在同一个时间单元中反馈给第一终端设备,即将多个波束中每个波束的测量结果与阈值的比较结果聚合在一个时间单元(时域资源)中进行反馈。每个波束的反馈信息不是直接指示该波束的测量结果,而是指示波束的测量结果与阈值的比较结果。而用于指示比较结果的信息长度是少于用于指示测量结果的信息长度,可以有效降低需要反馈的数据量,减少了反馈信息的长度以及反馈信息所需要的通信资源从而降低了对通信资源消耗。Optionally, as another possible implementation, in S1130, the second terminal device may feed back second indication information for indicating the comparison result between the measurement result of K reference signals and the threshold (the comparison result includes, for example, a difference, etc.) to the first terminal device on the first time-frequency resource. In other words, the second terminal device feeds back the comparison result between the measurement results of K beams and the threshold to the first terminal device in the same time unit, that is, the comparison result between the measurement result of each beam in the multiple beams and the threshold is aggregated in one time unit (time domain resource) for feedback. The feedback information of each beam does not directly indicate the measurement result of the beam, but indicates the comparison result between the measurement result of the beam and the threshold. The length of the information used to indicate the comparison result is less than the length of the information used to indicate the measurement result, which can effectively reduce the amount of data that needs to be fed back, reduce the length of the feedback information and the communication resources required for the feedback information, thereby reducing the consumption of communication resources.

可以理解,S1130中的第一时频资源与K个时频资源均不相同。并且,第一时频资源的时域位置在K个时频资源分别对应的时域位置之后。It can be understood that the first time-frequency resource in S1130 is different from the K time-frequency resources. Moreover, the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource is after the time domain positions corresponding to the K time-frequency resources.

示例性的,第一时频资源在时域上可以占据至少一个符号、至少一个时隙或者至少一个子帧等。本申请实施例对于第一时频资源的时域长度不作限制。Exemplarily, the first time-frequency resource may occupy at least one symbol, at least one time slot, or at least one subframe in the time domain, etc. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the time domain length of the first time-frequency resource.

例如,图12所示的为一例K个时频资源和第一时频资源的示意图。在图12所示的例子中,K的取值为4,4个时频资源对应的时域位置分别为:时隙1(slot1)、时隙3、时隙5和时隙7,第一终端设备在这4个时频资源上分别发送参考信号。其中,时隙1上的参考信号1对应波束1(时隙1上的参考信号1使用波束1发送)、时隙3上的参考信号2对应波束2(时隙3上的参考信号2使用波束2发送)、时隙5上的参考信号3对应波束3(时隙5上的参考信号3使用波束3发送)、时隙7上的参考信号4对应波束4(时隙7上的参考信号4使用波束4发送)。第一时频资源的时域位置为时隙9。换句话说,时隙1、时隙3、时隙5和时隙7上波束反馈信息均在时隙9上反馈。 For example, FIG12 shows a schematic diagram of K time-frequency resources and a first time-frequency resource. In the example shown in FIG12, the value of K is 4, and the time domain positions corresponding to the four time-frequency resources are: time slot 1 (slot 1), time slot 3, time slot 5, and time slot 7, respectively. The first terminal device sends reference signals on these four time-frequency resources. Among them, reference signal 1 on time slot 1 corresponds to beam 1 (reference signal 1 on time slot 1 is sent using beam 1), reference signal 2 on time slot 3 corresponds to beam 2 (reference signal 2 on time slot 3 is sent using beam 2), reference signal 3 on time slot 5 corresponds to beam 3 (reference signal 3 on time slot 5 is sent using beam 3), and reference signal 4 on time slot 7 corresponds to beam 4 (reference signal 4 on time slot 7 is sent using beam 4). The time domain position of the first time-frequency resource is time slot 9. In other words, the beam feedback information on time slot 1, time slot 3, time slot 5, and time slot 7 is fed back on time slot 9.

第二终端设备分别在时隙1、时隙3、时隙5和时隙7检测参考信号,得到参考信号的测量结果,然后在时隙9中将用于指示四个参考信号的测量结果是否满足条件的第一指示信息,或者用于指示四个参考信号的测量结果与阈值的比较结果的第二指示信息发送给第一终端设备。换句话说,第二终端设备在时隙9中将四个波束的反馈信息(或者也可以称为波束报告)反馈给第一终端设备。即将多个波束的反馈信息聚合在一个时间单元(时隙9)中进行反馈。The second terminal device detects the reference signals in time slot 1, time slot 3, time slot 5 and time slot 7 respectively, obtains the measurement results of the reference signals, and then sends the first indication information indicating whether the measurement results of the four reference signals meet the conditions, or the second indication information indicating the comparison results of the measurement results of the four reference signals with the threshold, to the first terminal device in time slot 9. In other words, the second terminal device feeds back the feedback information (or beam report) of the four beams to the first terminal device in time slot 9. That is, the feedback information of multiple beams is aggregated in one time unit (time slot 9) for feedback.

可选的,在图12所示的例子,在时隙9中,时隙1、时隙3、时隙5和时隙7上的参考信号分别对应的第一指示信息或者第二指示信息在时域上从早到晚位置可以为:时隙1上的参考信号对应的第一指示信息或者第二指示信息、时隙3的参考信号对应的第一指示信息或者第二指示信息、时隙5的参考信号对应的第一指示信息或者第二指示信息、时隙7的参考分别对应的第一指示信息或者第二指示信息。也就是说,第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送的反馈信息中,各个参考信号对应的第一指示信息或者第二指示信息是可以按照参考信号的先后顺序(波束的先后顺序)排列的。Optionally, in the example shown in FIG12, in time slot 9, the first indication information or second indication information corresponding to the reference signals on time slot 1, time slot 3, time slot 5 and time slot 7 may be positioned from early to late in the time domain as follows: the first indication information or second indication information corresponding to the reference signal on time slot 1, the first indication information or second indication information corresponding to the reference signal on time slot 3, the first indication information or second indication information corresponding to the reference signal on time slot 5, and the first indication information or second indication information corresponding to the reference signal on time slot 7. That is, in the feedback information sent by the second terminal device to the first terminal device, the first indication information or second indication information corresponding to each reference signal may be arranged in the order of the reference signals (the order of the beams).

可选的,S1130也可以表述为:第二终端设备在第一时频资源上向第一终端设备发送指示信息,指示信息用于指示K个参考信号对应的测量结果。相应的,第一终端设备在第一时频资源上接收来自第二终端设备的指示信息,指示信息用于指示K个参考信号对应的测量结果。Optionally, S1130 can also be expressed as: the second terminal device sends indication information to the first terminal device on the first time-frequency resource, and the indication information is used to indicate the measurement results corresponding to the K reference signals. Correspondingly, the first terminal device receives indication information from the second terminal device on the first time-frequency resource, and the indication information is used to indicate the measurement results corresponding to the K reference signals.

示例性的,指示信息可以包括:上述的第一指示信息或者第二指示信息中的至少一种。Exemplarily, the indication information may include: at least one of the first indication information or the second indication information mentioned above.

可选的,在一些可能的实现方式中,K个参考信号可以是连续多次发送的,K个参考信号多次发送可以理解为:将第一终端设备发送K个参考信号视为一次或者一组发送,第一终端设备可以连续发送多次或者多组,例如,第一终端设备可以连续发送N次,每次发送K个参考信号,N为大于或者等于1的整数。则第一终端设备一共发送了N×K个参考信号。这里的“连续”可以理解为:将K个参考信号作为一个整体或者一组,第一终端设备发送了一组参考信号(包括K个参考信号)后,经过一段时间长度后,第一终端设备又发送了一组参考信号(也包括K个参考信号),则这两次为连续的两次发送参考信号。当然,任意两次发送之间的时间间隔(即前一次发送最后一个参考信号的时间和后一次发送第一个参考信号之间的时间间隔)可以相同,也可以不同。相同的情况即为周期性发送K个参考信号的情况。对于任意两次发送的参考信号,参考信号的个数是相同的,对应的参考信号使用的波束也是相同的。可选的,第一终端设备在K个参考信号的两组(或者两次)发送过程中,K个参考信号的顺序(即K个波束的顺序)顺序可以相同,也可以不同。可以理解的是,波束和资源标识或者参考信号标识之间是具有对应关系的,可以通过对应关系,将两组之间的波束相关联或者对应。在这种情况下,第二终端设备需要检测N次,每次得到K个参考信号的测量结果。即第二终端设备需要检测N×K个参考信号的测量结果。Optionally, in some possible implementations, K reference signals may be sent multiple times in succession, and the multiple sending of K reference signals may be understood as: the sending of K reference signals by the first terminal device is regarded as one time or a group of sending, and the first terminal device may send multiple times or multiple groups continuously, for example, the first terminal device may send N times in succession, each time sending K reference signals, and N is an integer greater than or equal to 1. Then the first terminal device sends a total of N×K reference signals. The "continuous" here may be understood as: taking the K reference signals as a whole or a group, after the first terminal device sends a group of reference signals (including K reference signals), after a period of time, the first terminal device sends another group of reference signals (also including K reference signals), then these two times are two consecutive sending of reference signals. Of course, the time interval between any two sendings (that is, the time interval between the time of sending the last reference signal in the previous time and the time interval between sending the first reference signal in the next time) may be the same or different. The same situation is the situation of periodically sending K reference signals. For any two reference signals sent, the number of reference signals is the same, and the beams used by the corresponding reference signals are also the same. Optionally, during the transmission of two groups (or two times) of K reference signals by the first terminal device, the order of the K reference signals (i.e., the order of the K beams) may be the same or different. It is understandable that there is a correspondence between the beam and the resource identifier or the reference signal identifier, and the beams between the two groups can be associated or corresponded through the correspondence. In this case, the second terminal device needs to detect N times and obtain the measurement results of the K reference signals each time. That is, the second terminal device needs to detect the measurement results of N×K reference signals.

例如。图13所示的为一例K个参考信号周期性发送的情况,如图13中的a图所示的,相邻两次发送间隔的时间为ΔT,每次发送四个参考信号,分别为参考信号1至参考信号4,参考信号1对应波束1(参考信号1使用波束1发送),参考信号2对应波束2(参考信号2使用波束2发送),参考信号3对应波束3(参考信号3使用波束3发送),参考信号4对应波束4(参考信号1使用波束4发送)。对于第二次发送的参考信号,也包括参考信号1至参考信号4,参考信号1对应波束1(参考信号1使用波束1发送),参考信号2对应波束2(参考信号2使用波束2发送),参考信号3对应波束3(参考信号3使用波束3发送),参考信号4对应波束4(参考信号1使用波束4发送)。后续的每一次也分别发送参考信号1至参考信号4。图13中的a图所示的为两组(两次)发送过程中,K个参考信号的顺序(即K个波束的顺序)顺序相同的情况。图13中的b图所示的为两组(两次)发送过程中,K个参考信号的顺序(即K个波束的顺序)顺序不相同的情况。For example. FIG. 13 shows an example of a situation where K reference signals are periodically sent. As shown in FIG. 13 a, the time interval between two adjacent transmissions is ΔT. Four reference signals are sent each time, namely reference signal 1 to reference signal 4. Reference signal 1 corresponds to beam 1 (reference signal 1 is sent using beam 1), reference signal 2 corresponds to beam 2 (reference signal 2 is sent using beam 2), reference signal 3 corresponds to beam 3 (reference signal 3 is sent using beam 3), and reference signal 4 corresponds to beam 4 (reference signal 1 is sent using beam 4). The reference signals sent for the second time also include reference signals 1 to reference signals 4. Reference signal 1 corresponds to beam 1 (reference signal 1 is sent using beam 1), reference signal 2 corresponds to beam 2 (reference signal 2 is sent using beam 2), reference signal 3 corresponds to beam 3 (reference signal 3 is sent using beam 3), and reference signal 4 corresponds to beam 4 (reference signal 1 is sent using beam 4). Reference signals 1 to 4 are also sent each subsequent time. FIG. 13 a shows a case where the order of the K reference signals (i.e., the order of the K beams) is the same during two groups (twice) of transmissions. FIG. 13 b shows a case where the order of the K reference signals (i.e., the order of the K beams) is different during two groups (twice) of transmissions.

在图13所示的例子中,假设第一终端设备连续发送了3次,每次发送4个参考信号,则第二终端设备需要检测12个参考信号的测量结果,即需要检测12次波束的测量结果。In the example shown in FIG13 , assuming that the first terminal device sends four reference signals three times in succession, the second terminal device needs to detect the measurement results of 12 reference signals, that is, it needs to detect the measurement results of 12 beams.

在第一终端设备连续多次(例如N次)发送K个参考信号的情况下,在S1120中,第二终端设备可以分别检测每次发送的参考信号的测量结果,每次均需要检测K个参考信号(即K个波束)的测量结果。When the first terminal device sends K reference signals multiple times (for example, N times) in succession, in S1120, the second terminal device can respectively detect the measurement results of the reference signals sent each time, and each time it is necessary to detect the measurement results of K reference signals (ie, K beams).

作为一种可能的实现方式,在第一终端设备连续多次(例如N次)发送K个参考信号的情况 下,如果N×K个参考信号的测量结果均大于或者等于第一阈值(即满足条件),即K个参考信号在连续N次测量中每次测量结果均大于或者等于第一阈值。例如,N×K个参考信号的RSRP均大于或者等于第一阈值,则第二终端设备可以生成第一指示信息,第一指示信息用于指示:这N×K个参考信号的测量结果均大于或者等于第一阈值(即用于指示满足条件),或者用于指示K个参考信号在连续N次测量中每次测量结果均大于或者等于第一阈值(即用于指示满足条件)。换句话说,一个第一指示信息可以指示:N×K个参考信号的测量结果(N×K个波束的测量结果)满足条件。在这种情况下,第一指示的信息的长度可以为1比特,即S1130中,反馈信息中只包括一个第一指示信息,反馈信息中第一指示信息的长度为1比特,取值为第一值(例如为0或者1;或者指示的状态为ACK或者NACK),用于指示连续N次测量中每次测量结果均大于或者等于第一阈值(即用于指示满足条件)。其中,每次测量结果均包括K个参考信号的测量结果。通过这种方式,可以进一步的降低需要反馈的数据量,第一指示信息所需要的通信资源更少(反馈信息或者第一指示信息只需要1比特),进一步的降低通信资源的消耗。As a possible implementation, when the first terminal device sends K reference signals multiple times (for example, N times) in succession Under this condition, if the measurement results of N×K reference signals are all greater than or equal to the first threshold (i.e., the condition is met), that is, the measurement results of the K reference signals in each of N consecutive measurements are greater than or equal to the first threshold. For example, if the RSRP of the N×K reference signals is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the second terminal device can generate a first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate that the measurement results of these N×K reference signals are greater than or equal to the first threshold (i.e., used to indicate that the condition is met), or used to indicate that the measurement results of the K reference signals in each of N consecutive measurements are greater than or equal to the first threshold (i.e., used to indicate that the condition is met). In other words, a first indication information can indicate that the measurement results of N×K reference signals (the measurement results of N×K beams) meet the condition. In this case, the length of the first indication information can be 1 bit, that is, in S1130, the feedback information includes only one first indication information, the length of the first indication information in the feedback information is 1 bit, and the value is a first value (for example, 0 or 1; or the indicated state is ACK or NACK), which is used to indicate that each measurement result in N consecutive measurements is greater than or equal to the first threshold (that is, used to indicate that the condition is met). Among them, each measurement result includes the measurement results of K reference signals. In this way, the amount of data that needs to be fed back can be further reduced, and the communication resources required for the first indication information are less (the feedback information or the first indication information only needs 1 bit), further reducing the consumption of communication resources.

可选的,作为另一种可能的实现方式,在第一终端设备连续多次(例如N次)发送K个参考信号的情况下,如果N×K个参考信号的测量结果均小于或者等于第一阈值(即不满足条件),第一指示的信息的长度也可以为1比特,即S1130中,反馈信息中只包括一个第一指示信息,反馈信息中的第一指示信息的长度为1比特,取值为第二值(例如为1或者0;或者指示的状态为NACK或者ACK)用于指示连续N次测量中每次测量结果均小于或者等于阈值(即用于指示不满足条件),或者用于指示:K个参考信号在连续N次测量中每次测量结果均小于或者等于第一阈值(即用于指示不满足条件)。通过这种方式,可以进一步的降低需要反馈的数据量,第一指示信息所需要的通信资源更少(反馈信息或者第一指示信息只需要1比特),进一步的降低通信资源的消耗。Optionally, as another possible implementation, when the first terminal device sends K reference signals for multiple consecutive times (for example, N times), if the measurement results of the N×K reference signals are all less than or equal to the first threshold (i.e., the condition is not met), the length of the first indication information may also be 1 bit, that is, in S1130, the feedback information includes only one first indication information, the length of the first indication information in the feedback information is 1 bit, and the value is the second value (for example, 1 or 0; or the indicated state is NACK or ACK) used to indicate that each measurement result in N consecutive measurements is less than or equal to the threshold (i.e., used to indicate that the condition is not met), or used to indicate: each measurement result of the K reference signals in N consecutive measurements is less than or equal to the first threshold (i.e., used to indicate that the condition is not met). In this way, the amount of data that needs to be fed back can be further reduced, the communication resources required for the first indication information are less (the feedback information or the first indication information only requires 1 bit), and the consumption of communication resources is further reduced.

应理解,上述的第一值和第二值不同,或者上述第一值和第二值不相等。It should be understood that the above-mentioned first value and the second value are different, or the above-mentioned first value and the second value are not equal.

换句话说,在第一终端设备连续多次(例如N次)发送K个参考信号的情况下,第一指示信息可以用于指示:N×K个参考信号的测量结果均大于或者等于第一阈值(即用于指示满足条件),或者用于指示:N×K个参考信号的测量结果均小于或者等于第一阈值(即用于指示不满足条件)。S1130中的反馈信息中包括一个第一指示信息。一个第一指示信息的长度可以为1比特,也可以大于1比特,例如为2比特或者3比特等。本申请实施例对于第一指示信息的长度不作限制。In other words, when the first terminal device sends K reference signals multiple times (for example, N times) in succession, the first indication information can be used to indicate that the measurement results of the N×K reference signals are all greater than or equal to the first threshold (i.e., used to indicate that the condition is met), or used to indicate that the measurement results of the N×K reference signals are all less than or equal to the first threshold (i.e., used to indicate that the condition is not met). The feedback information in S1130 includes a first indication information. The length of a first indication information can be 1 bit, or can be greater than 1 bit, such as 2 bits or 3 bits. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the length of the first indication information.

当然,作为又一种可能的实现方式,在第一终端设备连续多次(例如N次)发送K个参考信号的情况下,如果N×K个参考信号的测量结果均小于或者等于第一阈值(即不满足条件),则第二终端设备在第一时频资源上也可以不向第一终端设备发送第一指示信息或者反馈信息。如果N×K个参考信号的测量结果均大于或者等于第一阈值(即满足条件),则第二终端设备在第一时频资源上向第一终端设备发送第一指示信息或者反馈信息,在这种情况下,第一指示的信息的长度可以为1比特,即S1130中,反馈信息中只包括一个第一指示信息。换句话说,如果第一终端设备在第一时频资源上没有接收到第二终端设备发送反馈信息或者第一指示信息,则第一终端设备可以确定出:第一终端设备连续多次(例如N次)发送K个参考信号时,N×K个参考信号的测量结果均小于或者等于阈值,即不满足条件。如果第一终端设备在第一时频资源上接收到第二终端设备发送反馈信息或者第一指示信息,则可以确定:第一终端设备连续多次(例如N次)发送K个参考信号时,N×K个参考信号的测量结果均大于或者等于阈值,即第一指示信息用于指示满足条件。Of course, as another possible implementation, when the first terminal device sends K reference signals for multiple times (for example, N times), if the measurement results of the N×K reference signals are all less than or equal to the first threshold (that is, the condition is not met), the second terminal device may not send the first indication information or feedback information to the first terminal device on the first time-frequency resource. If the measurement results of the N×K reference signals are all greater than or equal to the first threshold (that is, the condition is met), the second terminal device sends the first indication information or feedback information to the first terminal device on the first time-frequency resource. In this case, the length of the first indication information can be 1 bit, that is, in S1130, the feedback information includes only one first indication information. In other words, if the first terminal device does not receive the feedback information or the first indication information sent by the second terminal device on the first time-frequency resource, the first terminal device can determine that when the first terminal device sends K reference signals for multiple times (for example, N times), the measurement results of the N×K reference signals are all less than or equal to the threshold, that is, the condition is not met. If the first terminal device receives feedback information or first indication information sent by the second terminal device on the first time-frequency resource, it can be determined that when the first terminal device sends K reference signals multiple times (for example, N times) in succession, the measurement results of the N×K reference signals are all greater than or equal to the threshold, that is, the first indication information is used to indicate that the condition is met.

当然,作为又一种可能的实现方式,在第一终端设备连续多次(例如N次)发送K个参考信号的情况下,如果N×K个参考信号的测量结果均小于或者等于第一阈值(即不满足条件),则第二终端设备在第一时频资源上也可以向第一终端设备发送第一指示信息或者反馈信息,在这种情况下,第一指示的信息的长度可以为1比特,即S1130中,反馈信息中只包括一个第一指示信息。如果N×K个参考信号的测量结果均大于或者等于第一阈值(即满足条件),则第二终端设备在第一时频资源上不向第一终端设备发送第一指示信息或者反馈信息。换句话说,如果第一终端设备在第一时频资源上没有接收到第二终端设备发送反馈信息或者第一指示信息,则第一终端设备可以确定出:第一终端设备连续多次(例如N次)发送K个参考信号时,N×K个参考信号的测量结果均大于或者等于第一阈值,即满足条件。如果第一终端设备在第一时频资源上接收到第二终 端设备发送反馈信息或者第一指示信息,则可以确定:第一终端设备连续多次(例如N次)发送K个参考信号时,N×K个参考信号的测量结果均小于或者等于第一阈值,即第一指示信息用于指示不满足条件。Of course, as another possible implementation method, when the first terminal device sends K reference signals multiple times (for example, N times) in a row, if the measurement results of the N×K reference signals are all less than or equal to the first threshold (that is, the condition is not met), the second terminal device may also send the first indication information or feedback information to the first terminal device on the first time-frequency resource. In this case, the length of the first indication information may be 1 bit, that is, in S1130, the feedback information only includes one first indication information. If the measurement results of the N×K reference signals are all greater than or equal to the first threshold (that is, the condition is met), the second terminal device does not send the first indication information or feedback information to the first terminal device on the first time-frequency resource. In other words, if the first terminal device does not receive the feedback information or the first indication information sent by the second terminal device on the first time-frequency resource, the first terminal device can determine that: when the first terminal device sends K reference signals multiple times (for example, N times), the measurement results of the N×K reference signals are all greater than or equal to the first threshold, that is, the condition is met. If the first terminal device receives the feedback information or the first indication information from the second terminal device on the first time-frequency resource, the first terminal device can determine that: when the first terminal device sends K reference signals multiple times (for example, N times), the measurement results of the N×K reference signals are all greater than or equal to the first threshold, that is, the condition is met. If the terminal device sends feedback information or first indication information, it can be determined that when the first terminal device sends K reference signals multiple times (for example, N times) in succession, the measurement results of N×K reference signals are all less than or equal to the first threshold, that is, the first indication information is used to indicate that the condition is not met.

当然,在第一终端设备连续多次(例如N次)发送K个参考信号的情况下,第一指示信息的长度也可以大于1比特,例如为2比特或者3比特等,第一指示信息用于指示:N×K个参考信号的测量结果均小于或者等于第一阈值(即满足条件),或者用于指示:N×K个参考信号的测量结果均大于或者等于第一阈值(即不满足条件)。S1130中的反馈信息中只包括一个第一指示信息,反馈信息的长度可以一个第一指示信息的长度相同。本申请实施例对于第一指示信息的长度不作限制。Of course, when the first terminal device sends K reference signals multiple times (for example, N times) in succession, the length of the first indication information may also be greater than 1 bit, such as 2 bits or 3 bits, etc. The first indication information is used to indicate that the measurement results of N×K reference signals are all less than or equal to the first threshold (i.e., the condition is met), or used to indicate that the measurement results of N×K reference signals are all greater than or equal to the first threshold (i.e., the condition is not met). The feedback information in S1130 includes only one first indication information, and the length of the feedback information may be the same as the length of one first indication information. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the length of the first indication information.

可选的,在一些可能的实现方式中,在第一终端设备连续多次(例如N次)发送K个参考信号的情况下,第二终端设备在N次测量中,如果K的参考信号中的第i个参考信号在连续m次测量的测量结果均大于或者等于阈值(例如为第一阈值),则第i个参考信号对应的第一指示信息可以用于指示:第i个参考信号在连续m次测量的测量结果均大于或者等于阈值(即第一指示信息用于指示满足条件)。i的取值为1,2…,K,m的取值为小于或者等于N的整数。每个参考信号(或者每个波束)对于一个第一指示信息,一个第一指示信息的长度可以为1比特,取值为第一值(例如为0或者1;或者指示的状态为ACK),用于指示这个参考信号在连续m次测量的测量结果均大于或者等于阈值(即用于指示满足条件)。则在S1130中,反馈信息中包括若干个第一指示信息。一个第一指示信息需要携带该指示信息对应的参考信号标识或者波束标识。反馈信息中包括的第一指示信息的个数可以小于或者等于K。Optionally, in some possible implementations, when the first terminal device sends K reference signals for multiple consecutive times (for example, N times), in the N measurements, if the measurement results of the i-th reference signal in the K reference signals are greater than or equal to a threshold value (for example, a first threshold value) in consecutive m measurements of the second terminal device, then the first indication information corresponding to the i-th reference signal can be used to indicate: the measurement results of the i-th reference signal in consecutive m measurements are greater than or equal to the threshold value (that is, the first indication information is used to indicate that the condition is met). The value of i is 1, 2..., K, and the value of m is an integer less than or equal to N. For each reference signal (or each beam), for a first indication information, the length of a first indication information can be 1 bit, and the value is a first value (for example, 0 or 1; or the indicated state is ACK), which is used to indicate that the measurement results of this reference signal in consecutive m measurements are greater than or equal to the threshold value (that is, used to indicate that the condition is met). Then in S1130, the feedback information includes several first indication information. A first indication information needs to carry the reference signal identifier or beam identifier corresponding to the indication information. The number of first indication information included in the feedback information may be less than or equal to K.

或者,如果K的参考信号中的第i个参考信号在连续m次测量的测量结果均小于或者等于阈值(例如为第一阈值),则第i个参考信号对应的第一指示信息可以用于指示:第i个参考信号在连续m次测量的测量结果均小于或者等于阈值(即用于指示不满足条件)。每个参考信号(每个波束)对于一个第一指示信息,一个第一指示信息的长度可以为1比特,取值为第一值(例如为1或者0;或者指示的状态为NACK),用于指示这个参考信号在连续m次测量的测量结果均小于或者等于阈值(即用于指示不满足条件)。则在S1130中,反馈信息中包括若干个第一指示信息。一个第一指示信息需要携带该指示信息对应的参考信号标识或者波束标识,反馈信息中包括的第一指示信息的个数可以小于或者等于K。Alternatively, if the measurement results of the i-th reference signal in K reference signals are all less than or equal to a threshold value (for example, a first threshold value) in consecutive m measurements, the first indication information corresponding to the i-th reference signal can be used to indicate that: the measurement results of the i-th reference signal in consecutive m measurements are all less than or equal to the threshold value (that is, used to indicate that the condition is not met). For each reference signal (each beam), for one first indication information, the length of one first indication information can be 1 bit, and the value is a first value (for example, 1 or 0; or the indicated state is NACK), which is used to indicate that the measurement results of this reference signal in consecutive m measurements are all less than or equal to the threshold value (that is, used to indicate that the condition is not met). Then in S1130, the feedback information includes several first indication information. One first indication information needs to carry the reference signal identifier or beam identifier corresponding to the indication information, and the number of first indication information included in the feedback information can be less than or equal to K.

换句话说,在第一终端设备连续多次(例如N次)发送K个参考信号的情况下,第i个参考信号对应的第一指示信息可以用于指示:第i个参考信号在连续m次测量的测量结果均小于或者等于阈值(即不满足条件),或者用于指示:第i个参考信号在连续m次测量的测量结果均大于或者等于阈值(即满足条件)。S1130中的反馈信息中包括若干个第一指示信息。一个第一指示信息的长度可以为1比特,也可以大于1比特,例如为2比特或者3比特等。本申请实施例对于第一指示信息的长度不作限制。一个第一指示信息需要携带该指示信息对应的参考信号标识或者波束标识。反馈信息中包括的第一指示信息的个数可以小于或者等于K。In other words, when the first terminal device sends K reference signals multiple times (for example, N times) in succession, the first indication information corresponding to the ith reference signal can be used to indicate that the measurement results of the ith reference signal in m consecutive measurements are all less than or equal to the threshold (that is, the condition is not met), or used to indicate that the measurement results of the ith reference signal in m consecutive measurements are all greater than or equal to the threshold (that is, the condition is met). The feedback information in S1130 includes several first indication information. The length of a first indication information can be 1 bit, or it can be greater than 1 bit, for example, 2 bits or 3 bits. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the length of the first indication information. A first indication information needs to carry the reference signal identifier or beam identifier corresponding to the indication information. The number of first indication information included in the feedback information may be less than or equal to K.

可选的,上述的阈值(例如第一阈值)可以预定义的,也可以是第一终端设备通过信令指示给第二终端设备的,或者,第一阈值可以是预配置(或者配置)的。本申请实施例在此不作限制。Optionally, the above threshold (eg, the first threshold) may be predefined, or may be indicated by the first terminal device to the second terminal device via signaling, or the first threshold may be preconfigured (or configured). The present application embodiment does not limit this.

应理解,在本申请实施例中,“预定义的”内容或者阈值可以理解为指标准定义的,不需要其他设备配置,为终端设备本身硬件和/或软件中提前记录/写入的信息,或者可以理解为不能被网络设备或者其他终端设备更改的。“预配置的”内容或者阈值可以理解为终端设备本身硬件和/或软件中提前记录/写入的信息,由出厂设备商确定,可通过软件或硬件更改。It should be understood that in the embodiments of the present application, "predefined" content or thresholds can be understood as information defined by standards, which does not require other equipment configurations and is recorded/written in advance in the hardware and/or software of the terminal device itself, or can be understood as information that cannot be changed by network equipment or other terminal devices. "Preconfigured" content or thresholds can be understood as information recorded/written in advance in the hardware and/or software of the terminal device itself, which is determined by the manufacturer of the equipment and can be changed through software or hardware.

示例性的,(预)配置可以分为网络设备(预)配置和终端设备(预)配置,若是网络设备(预)配置,可以通过系统信息块(system information block,SIB)或者RRC信令进行(预)配置;若是终端设备(预)配置,则可以通过PC5-RRC信令进行(预)配置。Exemplarily, (pre)configuration can be divided into network equipment (pre)configuration and terminal equipment (pre)configuration. If it is network equipment (pre)configuration, it can be performed through system information block (SIB) or RRC signaling; if it is terminal equipment (pre)configuration, it can be performed through PC5-RRC signaling.

可选的,在本申请一些可能的实现方式中,第一终端设备检测到某个参考信号(假设为第i个参考信号)的测量结果后,还可以将第i个参考信号的测量结果与阈值进行比较,确定第i个参考信号的测量结果是否满足条件。第i个参考信号的测量结果对应的第一指示信息可以用于指示:第i个参考信号的测量结果满足条件;或者用于指示:第i个参考信号的测量结果不满足条件。在 这种情况下,每个参考信号(或者每个波束)均对应一个第一指示信息,一个第一指示信息用于指示一个参考信号(或者一个波束)的测量结果满足或者不满足条件。i的取值为1,2…,K。S1130中的反馈信息中可以包括K个第一指示信息。可选的,一个第一指示信息的长度可以为1比特,则在S1130中,反馈信息中包括K个第一指示信息,反馈信息的长度可以为K比特,这样可以进一步的降低需要反馈的数据量,第一指示信息所需要的通信资源更少(反馈信息只需要K比特),进一步的降低通信资源的消耗。Optionally, in some possible implementations of the present application, after the first terminal device detects the measurement result of a reference signal (assuming it is the i-th reference signal), it can also compare the measurement result of the i-th reference signal with a threshold to determine whether the measurement result of the i-th reference signal meets a condition. The first indication information corresponding to the measurement result of the i-th reference signal can be used to indicate that the measurement result of the i-th reference signal meets the condition; or to indicate that the measurement result of the i-th reference signal does not meet the condition. In this case, each reference signal (or each beam) corresponds to a first indication information, and a first indication information is used to indicate whether the measurement result of a reference signal (or a beam) meets or does not meet the condition. The value of i is 1, 2..., K. The feedback information in S1130 may include K first indication information. Optionally, the length of a first indication information may be 1 bit. In S1130, the feedback information includes K first indication information, and the length of the feedback information may be K bits. This can further reduce the amount of data that needs to be fed back, and the first indication information requires fewer communication resources (the feedback information only requires K bits), further reducing the consumption of communication resources.

示例性的,第i个参考信号的测量结果满足条件可以包括:Exemplarily, the measurement result of the i-th reference signal may satisfy the condition that:

第i个参考信号的测量结果和第二阈值的比较结果在阈值范围内、第i个参考信号的测量结果和第二阈值的比较结果大于或者等于第三阈值、或者第i个参考信号的测量结果大于或者等于第四阈值中的至少一个。At least one of the following: the comparison result of the measurement result of the i-th reference signal and the second threshold is within the threshold range, the comparison result of the measurement result of the i-th reference signal and the second threshold is greater than or equal to the third threshold, or the measurement result of the i-th reference signal is greater than or equal to the fourth threshold.

可选的,上述的阈值范围、第二阈值、第三阈值或者第四阈值可以为:第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间当前最佳的波束对上参考信号的测量值(例如为RSRP、SINR、BLER等)。本申请实施例中对于阈值范围、第二阈值、第三阈值或者第四阈值的取值不作限制。Optionally, the above-mentioned threshold range, second threshold, third threshold or fourth threshold may be: a measurement value of a reference signal on the current best beam pair between the first terminal device and the second terminal device (for example, RSRP, SINR, BLER, etc.). In the embodiment of the present application, there is no restriction on the value of the threshold range, the second threshold, the third threshold or the fourth threshold.

可选的,上述的阈值范围、第二阈值、第三阈值或者第四阈值中的至少一个也可以是预定义的、预配置的、或者是网络设备通过DCI、RRC信令、SIB信息或MIB等信息指示或配置给第一终端设备和第二终端设备的,或者是由第一终端设备通过侧行链路控制信息(side link control information,SCI)或PC5 RRC等信令指示或配置给第二终端设备的,或者是由第二终端设备通过SCI或PC5 RRC等信令指示或配置给第一终端设备的。Optionally, at least one of the above-mentioned threshold range, the second threshold, the third threshold or the fourth threshold may also be predefined, preconfigured, or indicated or configured by the network device to the first terminal device and the second terminal device through information such as DCI, RRC signaling, SIB information or MIB, or indicated or configured by the first terminal device to the second terminal device through signaling such as side link control information (SCI) or PC5 RRC, or indicated or configured by the second terminal device to the first terminal device through signaling such as SCI or PC5 RRC.

示例性的,第i个参考信号的测量结果不满足条件可以包括:Exemplarily, the measurement result of the i-th reference signal not satisfying the condition may include:

第i个参考信号的测量结果和第二阈值的比较结果小于或者等于第三阈值,或者第i个参考信号的测量结果小于或者等于第四阈值中的至少一个。At least one of the comparison result of the measurement result of the i-th reference signal and the second threshold is less than or equal to the third threshold, or the measurement result of the i-th reference signal is less than or equal to the fourth threshold.

可选的,参考信号的测量结果和阈值的比较结果可以包括差值(参考信号的测量结果减去阈值得到的值,或者阈值减去参考信号的测量结果得到的值)等,下文的例子中将以比较结果为差值为例进行说明。Optionally, the comparison result between the measurement result of the reference signal and the threshold may include a difference (a value obtained by subtracting the threshold from the measurement result of the reference signal, or a value obtained by subtracting the measurement result of the reference signal from the threshold), etc. The following example will be described using the comparison result as a difference as an example.

示例性的,假设:第i个参考信号对应的测量结果为RSRPi,第二阈值为TH2,阈值范围为(α,β),β的取值大于α,α可以为正数,也可为0,第三阈值为δ,δ大于或者等于零,第四阈值为TH4。如果满足以下公式(1)至公式(3)中的至少一个,则确定第i个参考信号的测量结果满足条件:Exemplarily, it is assumed that the measurement result corresponding to the i-th reference signal is RSRP i , the second threshold is TH2, the threshold range is (α, β), the value of β is greater than α, α can be a positive number or 0, the third threshold is δ, δ is greater than or equal to zero, and the fourth threshold is TH4. If at least one of the following formulas (1) to (3) is satisfied, it is determined that the measurement result of the i-th reference signal satisfies the condition:

α≤|RSRPi-TH2|≤β或α≤|RSRPi-TH2n≤β,0<n,(1),例如n=1/2,2。α≤|RSRP i -TH2|≤β or α≤|RSRP i -TH2 n ≤β, 0<n, (1), for example, n=1/2, 2.

RSRPi-TH2≥δ或|RSRPi-TH2|n≥δ0<n,(2),例如n=1/2,2。RSRP i -TH2 ≥ δ or |RSRP i -TH2| n ≥ δ0<n, (2), for example, n = 1/2, 2.

RSRPi≥TH4         (3)RSRP i ≥TH4 (3)

如果满足以下公式(4)或者公式(5),则确定第i个参考信号的测量结果不满足条件:If the following formula (4) or formula (5) is satisfied, it is determined that the measurement result of the i-th reference signal does not satisfy the condition:

RSRPi-TH2≤δ或|RSRPi-TH2|n≤δ0<n,(4),例如n=1/2,2。RSRP i -TH2 ≤ δ or |RSRP i -TH2| n ≤ δ0<n, (4), for example, n = 1/2, 2.

RSRPi≤TH4    (5)RSRP i ≤TH4 (5)

应该理解的,在本申请实施例中,某个参考信号的测量结果满足条件的情况以及不满足条件的情况可以是协议预定义的,预配置的、或者是网络设备通过DCI、RRC信令、SIB信息或MIB信息指示或配置给第一终端设备和第二终端设备的,或者是由第一终端设备通过SCI或PC5 RRC信令指示或配置给第二终端设备的,或者是由第二终端设备通过SCI或PC5 RRC信令指示或配置给第一终端设备的。换句话说,第一终端设备和第二终端设备对于某个参考信号的测量结果是否满足条件的理解是一致的。本申请实施例在此不作限制。It should be understood that in the embodiments of the present application, the situations in which the measurement result of a certain reference signal meets the conditions and the situations in which the conditions are not met may be predefined by the protocol, preconfigured, or indicated or configured to the first terminal device and the second terminal device by the network device through DCI, RRC signaling, SIB information or MIB information, or indicated or configured to the second terminal device by the first terminal device through SCI or PC5 RRC signaling, or indicated or configured to the first terminal device by the second terminal device through SCI or PC5 RRC signaling. In other words, the first terminal device and the second terminal device have the same understanding of whether the measurement result of a certain reference signal meets the conditions. The embodiments of the present application are not limited here.

可选的,作为一种可能的实现方式,在第i个参考信号的测量结果满足条件的情况下,在第i个参考信号对应的第一指示信息可以指示ACK。在第i个参考信号的测量结果不满足条件的情况下,在第i个参考信号对应的第一指示信息可以指示NACK。Optionally, as a possible implementation, if the measurement result of the i-th reference signal meets the condition, the first indication information corresponding to the i-th reference signal may indicate ACK. If the measurement result of the i-th reference signal does not meet the condition, the first indication information corresponding to the i-th reference signal may indicate NACK.

例如,结合图12所示的例子,假设:参考信号1的测量结果满足条件、参考信号2的测量结果满足条件、参考信号3的测量结果不满足条件、参考信号4的测量结果满足条件,则在时隙9中,第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送的反馈信息中包括的内容可以如图14所示的,参考信号1 (波束1)、参考信号2(波束2)以及参考信号4(波束4)分别对应的第一指示信息可以指示ACK,参考信号3(波束3)对应的第一指示信息可以指示NACK。For example, in combination with the example shown in FIG12, assuming that: the measurement result of reference signal 1 meets the condition, the measurement result of reference signal 2 meets the condition, the measurement result of reference signal 3 does not meet the condition, and the measurement result of reference signal 4 meets the condition, then in time slot 9, the content included in the feedback information sent by the second terminal device to the first terminal device can be as shown in FIG14, reference signal 1 The first indication information corresponding to reference signal 3 (beam 3) and reference signal 4 (beam 4) respectively may indicate ACK, and the first indication information corresponding to reference signal 3 (beam 3) may indicate NACK.

当然,在每个参考信号(每个波束)均对应一个第一指示信息,一个第一指示信息用于指示一个参考信号(或者一个波束)的测量结果满足或者不满足条件的情况下,一个第一指示信息的长度也可以大于1比特,例如为2比特或者3比特等,用于指示:指示一个参考信号(或者一个波束)的测量结果满足或者不满足条件。本申请实施例对于第一指示信息的长度不作限制。Of course, when each reference signal (each beam) corresponds to a first indication information, and a first indication information is used to indicate whether the measurement result of a reference signal (or a beam) meets or does not meet the condition, the length of a first indication information may also be greater than 1 bit, such as 2 bits or 3 bits, etc., to indicate: indicating that the measurement result of a reference signal (or a beam) meets or does not meet the condition. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the length of the first indication information.

可选的,在本申请一些可能的实现方式中,第一终端设备检测到某个参考信号(假设为第i个参考信号)的测量结果后,还可以将第i个参考信号的测量结果与阈值进行比较,得到比较结果,然后将该比较结果通过第二指示信息发送给第一终端设备。示例性的,比较结果可以包括:第i个参考信号的测量结果与阈值(例如为第五阈值)的差值、差值范围或者差值区间,即第i个参考信号的测量结果减去第五阈值得到的值、或者第i个参考信号的测量结果减去第五阈值得到的值所在的区间,或者第五阈值减去第i个参考信号的测量结果得到的值,或者第五阈值减去第i个参考信号的测量结果得到的值所在的区间。这种情况下,第i个参考信号的测量结果对应的第二指示信息可以用于指示:第i个参考信号的测量结果与第五阈值的比较结果(以差值为例进行说明)。这种情况下,S1130中的反馈信息中包括K个第二指示信息。每个第二指示信息用于指示一个参考信号的测量结果与第五阈值的比较结果。Optionally, in some possible implementations of the present application, after the first terminal device detects the measurement result of a certain reference signal (assuming it is the i-th reference signal), it can also compare the measurement result of the i-th reference signal with the threshold to obtain a comparison result, and then send the comparison result to the first terminal device through the second indication information. Exemplarily, the comparison result may include: the difference, difference range or difference interval between the measurement result of the i-th reference signal and the threshold (for example, the fifth threshold), that is, the interval where the value obtained by subtracting the fifth threshold from the measurement result of the i-th reference signal, or the interval where the value obtained by subtracting the fifth threshold from the measurement result of the i-th reference signal, or the interval where the value obtained by subtracting the measurement result of the i-th reference signal from the fifth threshold, or the interval where the value obtained by subtracting the measurement result of the i-th reference signal from the fifth threshold. In this case, the second indication information corresponding to the measurement result of the i-th reference signal can be used to indicate: the comparison result of the measurement result of the i-th reference signal and the fifth threshold (taking the difference as an example). In this case, the feedback information in S1130 includes K second indication information. Each piece of second indication information is used to indicate a comparison result between a measurement result of a reference signal and a fifth threshold.

可选的,第五阈值可以为:第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间当前最佳的波束对对应的参考信号的测量值(例如为RSRP、SINR、BLER等)。本申请实施例中对于第五阈值的取值不作限制。Optionally, the fifth threshold may be: a measurement value of a reference signal corresponding to the current best beam pair between the first terminal device and the second terminal device (eg, RSRP, SINR, BLER, etc.) There is no limitation on the value of the fifth threshold in the embodiment of the present application.

可选的,第五阈值也可以是预定义的、预配置的、或者是网络设备通过DCI、RRC信令、SIB信息或MIB信息指示或配置给第一终端设备和第二终端设备的,或者是由第一终端设备通过SCI或PC5 RRC信令指示或配置给第二终端设备的,或者是由第二终端设备通过SCI或PC5 RRC信令指示或配置给第一终端设备的。Optionally, the fifth threshold may be predefined, preconfigured, or indicated or configured by the network device to the first terminal device and the second terminal device through DCI, RRC signaling, SIB information or MIB information, or indicated or configured by the first terminal device to the second terminal device through SCI or PC5 RRC signaling, or indicated or configured by the second terminal device to the first terminal device through SCI or PC5 RRC signaling.

可选的,一个第二指示信息的长度可以为X比特,则在S1130中,反馈信息中包括K个第二指示信息,反馈信息的长度可以为K×X比特,通过这种方式,可以进一步的降低需要反馈的数据量,第二指示信息所需要的通信资源更少,反馈信息只需要K×X比特,降低了反馈信息的长度,进一步的降低通信资源的消耗。Optionally, the length of a second indication information may be X bits. In this case, in S1130, the feedback information includes K second indication information, and the length of the feedback information may be K×X bits. In this way, the amount of data that needs to be fed back can be further reduced, and the second indication information requires fewer communication resources. The feedback information only requires K×X bits, which reduces the length of the feedback information and further reduces the consumption of communication resources.

例如,一个第二指示信息的长度可以为4比特,则可以利用这个4比特的指示信息来量化一个参考信号的测量结果和第五阈值的差值。For example, the length of a second indication information may be 4 bits, and the 4-bit indication information may be used to quantify the difference between a measurement result of a reference signal and the fifth threshold.

示例性的,如果一个第二指示信息的长度为4比特,则这4比特可以有16种不同状态或者取值,假设:第i个参考信号的测量结果为RSRPi,第五阈值为RSRPt,4比特的指示信息中,相邻的两种比特状态(转换成10进制即为相邻的两个数值)指示的结果的差值或者步长(step size)为1dB。例如,4比特的第二指示信息的取值为“0000”,表示RSRPi-RSRPt=-8dB,“0001”表示RSRPi-RSRPt=-7dB,“0010”表示RSRPi-RSRPt=-6dB,“0011”表示RSRPi-RSRPt=-5dB,“0100”表示RSRPi-RSRPt=-4dB,以此类推,“0011”表示RSRPi-RSRPt=0dB;“0101”表示RSRPi-RSRPt<=1dB;“0110”表示RSRPi-RSRPt=2dB。即用4比特来量化这个差值。换句话说,4bit的第二指示信息不同比特状态可以用来表征(或者指示)一个阈值集合{-8dB,-7dB,…7dB,8dB}。进一步可选的,相邻两个差值之间的步长可以是(预)配置的,或者预定义的,例如两个差值相差1dB。Exemplarily, if the length of a second indication information is 4 bits, then these 4 bits can have 16 different states or values. Assume that: the measurement result of the i-th reference signal is RSRP i , the fifth threshold is RSRP t , and in the 4-bit indication information, the difference or step size of the results indicated by two adjacent bit states (converted to decimal, that is, two adjacent numerical values) is 1 dB. For example, the value of the 4-bit second indication information is "0000", indicating RSRP i -RSRP t = -8dB, "0001" indicating RSRP i -RSRP t = -7dB, "0010" indicating RSRP i -RSRP t = -6dB, "0011" indicating RSRP i -RSRP t = -5dB, "0100" indicating RSRP i -RSRP t = -4dB, and so on, "0011" indicating RSRP i -RSRP t = 0dB; "0101" indicating RSRP i -RSRP t <= 1dB; "0110" indicating RSRPi-RSRPt = 2dB. That is, 4 bits are used to quantify the difference. In other words, different bit states of the 4-bit second indication information can be used to represent (or indicate) a threshold set {-8dB, -7dB, ... 7dB, 8dB}. Further optionally, the step size between two adjacent difference values may be (pre)configured or predefined, for example, the difference between the two difference values is 1 dB.

例如,结合图12所示的例子,假设:参考信号1的测量结果第五阈值的差值为Δ1,参考信号2的测量结果第五阈值的差值为Δ2,参考信号3的测量结果第五阈值的差值为Δ3,参考信号4的测量结果第五阈值的差值为Δ4。则在时隙9中,第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送的反馈信息中包括的内容可以如图15所示的,参考信号1(波束1)、至参考信号4(波束4)分别对应的第二指示信息可以指示参考信号的测量结果第五阈值的差值。For example, in conjunction with the example shown in FIG12 , it is assumed that: the difference of the fifth threshold of the measurement result of reference signal 1 is Δ1, the difference of the fifth threshold of the measurement result of reference signal 2 is Δ2, the difference of the fifth threshold of the measurement result of reference signal 3 is Δ3, and the difference of the fifth threshold of the measurement result of reference signal 4 is Δ4. Then, in time slot 9, the content included in the feedback information sent by the second terminal device to the first terminal device may be as shown in FIG15 , and the second indication information corresponding to reference signal 1 (beam 1) to reference signal 4 (beam 4) respectively may indicate the difference of the fifth threshold of the measurement result of the reference signal.

当然,第i个参考信号的测量结果与第五阈值的比较结果除了差值之外,还可以包括其他情况,例如用于量化一个参考信号的测量结果和第五阈值的差值范围或者差值区间。示例性的,第i个参考信号的测量结果与第五阈值的比较结果可以包括:第i个参考信号的测量结果与第五阈值 的差值在某个范围内。在这种情况下,第i个参考信号的测量结果对应的第二指示信息可以用于指示:第i个参考信号的测量结果与第五阈值的差值在某个范围内。例如,如果一个第二指示信息的长度为4比特,假设:第i个参考信号的测量结果为RSRPi,第五阈值为RSRPt,第i个参考信号对应4比特的指示信息(例如为“0000”),4比特的指示信息中,相邻的两种比特状态(转换成10进制即为相邻的两个数值)指示的结果的差值或者步长(step size)为1dB。例如,4比特的第二指示信息的取值为“0000”,表示RSRPi-RSRPt<=-8dB,“0001”表示-8dB<RSRPi-RSRPt<=-7dB,“0010”表示-7dB<RSRPi-RSRPt<=-6dB,“0011”表示-6dB<RSRPi-RSRPt<=-5dB,“0100”表示-5dB<RSRPi-RSRPt<=-4dB,以此类推,“0101”表示0dB<RSRPi-RSRPt<=1dB;“0110”表示1dB<RSRPi-RSRPt<=2dB。即用4比特来量化这个差值对应的区间。进一步可选的,相邻两个差值区间之间的步长可以是(预)配置的,或者预定义的,例如两个差值区间相差1dB。Of course, the comparison result between the measurement result of the i-th reference signal and the fifth threshold value may include other situations besides the difference, such as a difference range or a difference interval between the measurement result of a reference signal and the fifth threshold value. Exemplarily, the comparison result between the measurement result of the i-th reference signal and the fifth threshold value may include: The difference is within a certain range. In this case, the second indication information corresponding to the measurement result of the ith reference signal can be used to indicate that the difference between the measurement result of the ith reference signal and the fifth threshold is within a certain range. For example, if the length of a second indication information is 4 bits, assuming that: the measurement result of the ith reference signal is RSRP i , the fifth threshold is RSRP t , the ith reference signal corresponds to 4 bits of indication information (for example, "0000"), and in the 4 bits of indication information, the difference or step size of the result indicated by the two adjacent bit states (converted to decimal, that is, two adjacent numerical values) is 1dB. For example, the value of the 4-bit second indication information is "0000", indicating RSRP i -RSRP t <=-8dB, "0001" indicating -8dB<RSRP i -RSRP t <=-7dB, "0010" indicating -7dB<RSRP i -RSRP t <=-6dB, "0011" indicating -6dB<RSRP i -RSRP t <=-5dB, "0100" indicating -5dB<RSRP i -RSRP t <=-4dB, and so on, "0101" indicating 0dB<RSRP i -RSRP t <=1dB;"0110" indicating 1dB<RSRP i -RSRP t <=2dB. That is, 4 bits are used to quantize the interval corresponding to the difference. Further optionally, the step size between two adjacent difference intervals can be (pre) configured or predefined, for example, the two difference intervals differ by 1dB.

可选的,在本申请一些可能的实现方式中,第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间在波束维护的过程中也可以是基于载波聚合的场景下进行的,也就是说,第一终端设备可以在多个载波上分别向第二终端设备发送参考信号。在这种情况下,在每个载波上,每个参考信号可以对应一个第一指示信息或者一个第二指示信息,反馈信息中需要包括多个载波上的参考信号分别对应的第一指示信息或者第二指示信息。这多个第一指示信息或者多个第二指示信息在反馈信息的排列顺序可以为:按照先载波增序后时域(例如为时隙)增序的方式排列,或者按照先时域(例如为时隙)增序后载波增序的方式排列。本申请实施例在此不作限制。Optionally, in some possible implementations of the present application, the beam maintenance between the first terminal device and the second terminal device may also be carried out in a scenario based on carrier aggregation, that is, the first terminal device may send reference signals to the second terminal device on multiple carriers. In this case, on each carrier, each reference signal may correspond to a first indication message or a second indication message, and the feedback information needs to include the first indication message or the second indication message corresponding to the reference signals on multiple carriers. The arrangement order of these multiple first indication messages or multiple second indication messages in the feedback information may be: first in increasing order of carrier and then in increasing order of time domain (for example, time slot), or first in increasing order of time domain (for example, time slot) and then in increasing order of carrier. The embodiments of the present application are not limited here.

应该理解的是,由于需要上报或者需要维护的波束对信息是双方(即第一终端设备和第二终端设备)已知的,所以第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间知道有几个波束对(即多少个参考信号)的反馈信息需要上报,因此需要反馈的量(参考信号的个数)也是互相已知的。It should be understood that since the beam pair information that needs to be reported or maintained is known to both parties (i.e., the first terminal device and the second terminal device), the first terminal device and the second terminal device know how many beam pairs (i.e., how many reference signals) feedback information needs to be reported, so the amount required for feedback (the number of reference signals) is also known to each other.

还应该理解的是,第一终端设备和第二终端设备之间需要约定一个一起反馈的时隙位置,即用于发送反馈信息的第一时频资源的时域位置对于第一终端设备和第二终端设备是已知的。It should also be understood that a time slot position for common feedback needs to be agreed upon between the first terminal device and the second terminal device, that is, the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource used to send feedback information is known to the first terminal device and the second terminal device.

在一些可能的实现方式中,第一时频资源的时域位置可以通过K个参考信号中第i个参考信号所在的时域资源和第一取值确定,第一取值用于指示:K个参考信号中第i个参考信号所在的时域位置与所述第一时频资源的时域位置之间的时域偏移值,i的取值为1,2…,K。In some possible implementations, the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource can be determined by the time domain resource where the i-th reference signal among K reference signals is located and a first value, where the first value is used to indicate: the time domain offset value between the time domain position where the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals is located and the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource, where the value of i is 1, 2…, K.

例如,结合图12所示的例子,K的取值为4,第1个参考信号(参考信号1)所在的时域资源为时隙1,则对于第1个参考信号,第一取值可以为8,第一时频资源的时域位置则为时隙9。第2个参考信号(参考信号2)所在的时域资源为时隙3,则对于第2个参考信号,第一取值可以为6,第一时频资源的时域位置则为时隙9。第3个参考信号(参考信号3)所在的时域资源为时隙5,则对于第3个参考信号,第一取值可以为4,第一时频资源的时域位置则为时隙9。第4个参考信号(参考信号4)所在的时域资源为时隙7,则对于第4个参考信号,第一取值可以为2,第一时频资源的时域位置则为时隙9。在图12所示的例子中,4个参考信号对应的第一取值集合为{2,4,6,8}。如果第二终端设备确定需要在时隙9向第一终端设备发送反馈信息,则根据第一取值集合,第二终端设备可以确定出:在时隙9上向第一终端设备发送反馈信息中,包括:时隙1上的参考信号1对应的第一指示信息或者第二指示信息、时隙3上的参考信号2对应的第一指示信息或者第二指示信息、时隙5上的参考信号3对应的第一指示信息或者第二指示信息、时隙7上的参考信号4对应的第一指示信息或者第二指示信息。For example, in conjunction with the example shown in FIG12, the value of K is 4, and the time domain resource where the first reference signal (reference signal 1) is located is time slot 1. For the first reference signal, the first value may be 8, and the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource is time slot 9. The time domain resource where the second reference signal (reference signal 2) is located is time slot 3. For the second reference signal, the first value may be 6, and the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource is time slot 9. The time domain resource where the third reference signal (reference signal 3) is located is time slot 5. For the third reference signal, the first value may be 4, and the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource is time slot 9. The time domain resource where the fourth reference signal (reference signal 4) is located is time slot 7. For the fourth reference signal, the first value may be 2, and the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource is time slot 9. In the example shown in FIG12, the first value set corresponding to the four reference signals is {2, 4, 6, 8}. If the second terminal device determines that it needs to send feedback information to the first terminal device in time slot 9, then based on the first value set, the second terminal device can determine: the feedback information sent to the first terminal device in time slot 9 includes: the first indication information or the second indication information corresponding to the reference signal 1 on time slot 1, the first indication information or the second indication information corresponding to the reference signal 2 on time slot 3, the first indication information or the second indication information corresponding to the reference signal 3 on time slot 5, and the first indication information or the second indication information corresponding to the reference signal 4 on time slot 7.

可选的,作为一种可能的实现方式,第一时频资源的时域位置可以第一终端设备通过信令指示给第二终端设备的。例如,第一时频资源的时域位置为时隙n,时隙n可以是第一终端设备通过物理侧行控制信道(physical sidelink control channel,PSCCH)指示给第二终端设备的。第一取值集合可以是预定义的或者第一终端设备通过信令指示给第二终端设备的。第二终端设备获取了第一取值集合以及第一时频资源的时域位置后,假设:第一取值集合为{m1,m2,m3,m4},第一时频资源的时域位置为时隙n,则第二终端设备可以确定出:在时隙n上,需要反馈:时隙n-m1上的参考信号(波束)的第一指示信息或者第二指示信息、时隙n-m2上的参考信号(波束)的第一指示信息或者第二指示信息、时隙n-m3上的参考信号(波束)的第一指示信息或者第二指示信息、时隙n-m4上的参考信号(波束)的第一指示信息或者第二指示信息。和半静态码本确定过程类似。通过上述的方式,可以使得第二终端设备准确的确定出第一时频资源的时域位置,提高了 反馈信息发送的准确性和效率。第一终端设备和第二终端设备对于第一时频资源的时域位置以及第一时频资源上反馈的是哪些参考信息的信息理解一致,保证了反馈信息发送的成功率和有效性。Optionally, as a possible implementation method, the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource can be indicated to the second terminal device by the first terminal device through signaling. For example, the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource is time slot n, and time slot n can be indicated to the second terminal device by the first terminal device through a physical sidelink control channel (PSCCH). The first value set can be predefined or indicated to the second terminal device by the first terminal device through signaling. After the second terminal device obtains the first value set and the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource, assuming that: the first value set is {m1, m2, m3, m4}, and the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource is time slot n, the second terminal device can determine that: on time slot n, it is necessary to feedback: the first indication information or the second indication information of the reference signal (beam) on time slot n-m1, the first indication information or the second indication information of the reference signal (beam) on time slot n-m2, the first indication information or the second indication information of the reference signal (beam) on time slot n-m3, and the first indication information or the second indication information of the reference signal (beam) on time slot n-m4. Similar to the semi-static codebook determination process. Through the above method, the second terminal device can accurately determine the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource, which improves Accuracy and efficiency of sending feedback information. The first terminal device and the second terminal device have consistent understanding of the time domain location of the first time-frequency resource and which reference information is fed back on the first time-frequency resource, ensuring the success rate and effectiveness of sending feedback information.

可选的,作为另一种可能的实现方式,第一终端设备在第i个时频资源上向第二终端设备发送参考信号时,可以将该参考信号(波束)对应的第一取值发送给第二终端设备,第二终端设备根据第i个时频资源的时域位置以及第一取值,假设第一取值为m,第i个时频资源的时域位置为时隙n,便可以确定需要在第n+m个时隙上向第一终端设备发送反馈信息,反馈信息包括:用于指示第i个参考信号的测量结果是否满足条件的第一指示信息,或者用于指示第i个参考信号的测量结果与阈值的比较结果的第二指示信息中的至少一个。对于任意一个参考信号,第二终端设备均可以通过这种方式确定出在哪个时隙上向第一终端设备发送该参考信号的反馈信息。通过上述的方式,也可以使得第二终端设备准确的确定出第一时频资源的时域位置,提高了反馈信息发送的准确性和效率。第一终端设备和第二终端设备对于第一时频资源的时域位置以及第一时频资源上反馈的是哪些参考信息的信息理解一致,保证了反馈信息发送的成功率和有效性。Optionally, as another possible implementation method, when the first terminal device sends a reference signal to the second terminal device on the i-th time-frequency resource, the first value corresponding to the reference signal (beam) can be sent to the second terminal device. The second terminal device can determine the need to send feedback information to the first terminal device on the n+m-th time slot based on the time domain position of the i-th time-frequency resource and the first value, assuming that the first value is m and the time domain position of the i-th time-frequency resource is time slot n. The feedback information includes: at least one of the first indication information for indicating whether the measurement result of the i-th reference signal meets the condition, or the second indication information for indicating the comparison result of the measurement result of the i-th reference signal with the threshold. For any reference signal, the second terminal device can determine in this way on which time slot to send the feedback information of the reference signal to the first terminal device. In the above manner, the second terminal device can also accurately determine the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource, thereby improving the accuracy and efficiency of sending feedback information. The first terminal device and the second terminal device have a consistent understanding of the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource and which reference information is fed back on the first time-frequency resource, thereby ensuring the success rate and effectiveness of sending the feedback information.

应该理解的是,在本申请实施例中,K个时频资源的时频位置可以是第一终端设备通过信令指示给第二终端设备的,换句话说,第二终端设备是知道在那些时频资源上接收参考信号。示例性的,该信令可以包括SCI。It should be understood that in the embodiment of the present application, the time-frequency positions of the K time-frequency resources may be indicated by the first terminal device to the second terminal device through signaling. In other words, the second terminal device knows which time-frequency resources to receive the reference signal. Exemplarily, the signaling may include SCI.

可选的,K个时频资源作为一个整体,可以周期性出现的,例如如图13所示的。Optionally, the K time-frequency resources as a whole may appear periodically, for example, as shown in FIG. 13 .

可选的,K个时频资源也可是周期性出现的,例如如图16所示的,K个时频资源是周期性的,K个时频资源中相邻两个时频之间的时间间隔相同。Optionally, the K time-frequency resources may also appear periodically. For example, as shown in FIG. 16 , the K time-frequency resources are periodic, and the time interval between two adjacent time-frequency resources in the K time-frequency resources is the same.

还应该理解的是,在本申请实施例中,第二终端设备在第一时频资源上发送反馈信息的发送波束(第三波束)以及第一终端设备在第一时频资源上接收反馈信息的接收波束(第二波束)可以是第一终端设备和第二终端设备提前协商确定好的。换句话说,第一终端设备知道在对应的位置需要用什么波束接收反馈信息,第二终端设备知道在对应的位置需要用什么波束发送反馈信息,例如第二终端设备和第一终端设备用最佳波束对分别发送和接收反馈信息。可选的,第二波束和/或第三波束可以预定义的,或者可以是预配置(或者配置)的。本申请实施例在此不作限制。It should also be understood that in the embodiment of the present application, the transmission beam (third beam) by which the second terminal device sends feedback information on the first time-frequency resource and the receiving beam (second beam) by which the first terminal device receives feedback information on the first time-frequency resource may be determined in advance by negotiation between the first terminal device and the second terminal device. In other words, the first terminal device knows what beam is needed to receive feedback information at the corresponding position, and the second terminal device knows what beam is needed to send feedback information at the corresponding position, for example, the second terminal device and the first terminal device use the best beam pair to send and receive feedback information, respectively. Optionally, the second beam and/or the third beam may be predefined, or may be preconfigured (or configured). The embodiment of the present application is not limited here.

在本申请一些可能的实现方式中,由于波束受遮挡影响大,如果第二终端设备对维护的波束顺序和个数接收正常,那采用上述的反馈信息的方式可以很大程度上降低需要反馈的数据量。但是,如果某一个波束对出现异常接收异常,可能会导致第二终端设备发送的反馈信息对应的参考信号数量(即波束数量)与第一终端设备发送的参考信号数量(即波束数量)不一致,第一终端设备和第二终端设备对反馈信息的理解不一致,反馈信息会失效。In some possible implementations of the present application, since the beam is greatly affected by occlusion, if the second terminal device receives the maintained beam sequence and number normally, the above-mentioned feedback information method can greatly reduce the amount of data that needs to be fed back. However, if a beam pair has an abnormal reception abnormality, it may cause the number of reference signals (i.e., the number of beams) corresponding to the feedback information sent by the second terminal device to be inconsistent with the number of reference signals (i.e., the number of beams) sent by the first terminal device, and the first terminal device and the second terminal device have inconsistent understandings of the feedback information, and the feedback information will become invalid.

因此,针对上述的问题,作为一种可能的实现方式,第一终端设备在K个时频资源上分别向第二终端设备发送参考信号时,可以在发送每个参考信号同时向第二终端设备发送一个指示信息(也可以称为第三指示信息),第三指示信息用于指示:按照K个参考信号在时域上从早到晚的顺序,当前参考信号是第几个参考信号,或者用于指示:截止到当前参考信号,第一终端设备发送的参考信号总数,或者用于指示第一终端设备发送的参考信号的累计数量,或者用于指示第一终端设备发送的参考信号的序号、索引或者排列。第一终端设备在K个时频资源中,在每个时频资源上向第二终端设备发送一个参考信号和一个第三指示信息,则需要发送K个第三指示信息,每个第三指示信息对应一个参考信号或者对应一个波束。换句话说,第三指示信息用于指示第一终端设备和第二终端设备当前做的第几次波束维护,第三指示信息类似于C-DAI的作用。通过第三指示信息,第二终端设备就可以有效的判断某一个参考信号(或者波束)的可能漏收或者是这个波束出现了问题,对于后面的波束接收就可以快速调整,并且可以提高接收参考信号的准确性和效率,可以准确的确定出每个参考信号对应的测量结果,保证了反馈信息的准确性。Therefore, in response to the above-mentioned problem, as a possible implementation method, when the first terminal device sends reference signals to the second terminal device on K time-frequency resources respectively, it can send an indication information (also referred to as the third indication information) to the second terminal device while sending each reference signal. The third indication information is used to indicate: according to the order of the K reference signals from early to late in the time domain, the current reference signal is which reference signal, or is used to indicate: the total number of reference signals sent by the first terminal device as of the current reference signal, or is used to indicate the cumulative number of reference signals sent by the first terminal device, or is used to indicate the sequence number, index or arrangement of the reference signal sent by the first terminal device. The first terminal device sends a reference signal and a third indication information to the second terminal device on each time-frequency resource among the K time-frequency resources, and then needs to send K third indication information, and each third indication information corresponds to a reference signal or a beam. In other words, the third indication information is used to indicate which beam maintenance the first terminal device and the second terminal device are currently performing. The third indication information is similar to the function of C-DAI. Through the third indication information, the second terminal device can effectively determine the possible leakage of a reference signal (or beam) or the problem with the beam, and can quickly adjust the subsequent beam reception. It can also improve the accuracy and efficiency of receiving reference signals, and can accurately determine the measurement results corresponding to each reference signal, thereby ensuring the accuracy of the feedback information.

对于第二终端设备而言,第三指示信息用于指示;第二终端设备接收的参考信号的累计数量,或者用于指示第二终端设备接收的参考信号的序号、索引或者排列。第二终端设备在K个时频资源上接收K参考信号时,在每个时频资源上接收一个参考信号和一个第三指示信息,则需要接收K个第三指示信息。For the second terminal device, the third indication information is used to indicate the cumulative number of reference signals received by the second terminal device, or is used to indicate the sequence number, index or arrangement of the reference signals received by the second terminal device. When the second terminal device receives K reference signals on K time-frequency resources, it receives one reference signal and one third indication information on each time-frequency resource, and then needs to receive K third indication information.

例如,结合图17所示的例子,K的取值为4,第1个参考信号(参考信号1)所在的时域资源为时隙1,第2个参考信号(参考信号2)所在的时域资源为时隙3,第3个参考信号(参考信 号3)所在的时域资源为时隙5,第4个参考信号(参考信号4)所在的时域资源为时隙7。第一终端设备在发送第1个参考信号时,可以向第二终端设备发送一个指示信息,用于指示:截止到当前参考信号(第1个参考信号),第一终端设备发送的参考信号总数,对于第1个参考信号,指示信息指示的值可以为0,表示:截止到当前参考信号(第1个参考信号),第一终端设备发送的参考信号总数为1个。第一终端设备在发送第2个参考信号时,可以向第二终端设备发送一个指示信息,用于指示:截止到当前参考信号(第2个参考信号),第一终端设备发送的参考信号总数,对于第2个参考信号,指示信息指示的值可以为1,表示:截止到当前参考信号(第2个参考信号),第一终端设备发送的参考信号总数为2个。第一终端设备在发送第3个参考信号时,可以向第二终端设备发送一个指示信息,用于指示:截止到当前参考信号(第3个参考信号),第一终端设备发送的参考信号总数,对于第3个参考信号,指示信息指示的值可以为2,表示:截止到当前参考信号(第3个参考信号),第一终端设备发送的参考信号总数为3个。第一终端设备在发送第4个参考信号时,可以向第二终端设备发送一个指示信息,用于指示:截止到当前参考信号(第4个参考信号),第一终端设备发送的参考信号总数,对于第4个参考信号,指示信息指示的值可以为3,表示:截止到当前参考信号(第4个参考信号),第一终端设备发送的参考信号总数为4个。For example, in combination with the example shown in FIG17 , the value of K is 4, the time domain resource where the first reference signal (reference signal 1) is located is time slot 1, the time domain resource where the second reference signal (reference signal 2) is located is time slot 3, and the time domain resource where the third reference signal (reference signal 2) is located is time slot 4. The time domain resource where the fourth reference signal (reference signal 3) is located is time slot 5, and the time domain resource where the fourth reference signal (reference signal 4) is located is time slot 7. When sending the first reference signal, the first terminal device may send an indication message to the second terminal device to indicate: as of the current reference signal (the first reference signal), the total number of reference signals sent by the first terminal device. For the first reference signal, the value indicated by the indication message may be 0, indicating: as of the current reference signal (the first reference signal), the total number of reference signals sent by the first terminal device is 1. When sending the second reference signal, the first terminal device may send an indication message to the second terminal device to indicate: as of the current reference signal (the second reference signal), the total number of reference signals sent by the first terminal device. For the second reference signal, the value indicated by the indication message may be 1, indicating: as of the current reference signal (the second reference signal), the total number of reference signals sent by the first terminal device is 2. When the first terminal device sends the third reference signal, it may send an indication message to the second terminal device, indicating: the total number of reference signals sent by the first terminal device as of the current reference signal (the third reference signal). For the third reference signal, the value indicated by the indication message may be 2, indicating: the total number of reference signals sent by the first terminal device as of the current reference signal (the third reference signal) is 3. When the first terminal device sends the fourth reference signal, it may send an indication message to the second terminal device, indicating: the total number of reference signals sent by the first terminal device as of the current reference signal (the fourth reference signal). For the fourth reference signal, the value indicated by the indication message may be 3, indicating: the total number of reference signals sent by the first terminal device as of the current reference signal (the fourth reference signal) is 4.

第二终端设备接收参考信号时,假设:正确接收到第1个、第3个参考信号以及第4个参考信号,没有接收到第2个参考信号。第二终端设备根据第1个参考信号对应的指示信息指示的值为0,以及第3个参考信号对应的指示信息指示的值为2,便可以确定出没有接收到第2个参考信号,第2个参考信号对应的指示信息指示的值为1。When the second terminal device receives the reference signal, it is assumed that the first, third and fourth reference signals are correctly received, and the second reference signal is not received. The second terminal device can determine that the second reference signal is not received and the value indicated by the indication information corresponding to the second reference signal is 1, based on the value indicated by the indication information corresponding to the first reference signal being 0 and the value indicated by the indication information corresponding to the third reference signal being 2.

在确定出没有接收到第2个参考信号后,作为一种可能的实现方式,例如,第二终端设备可以确定第2个参考信号的测量结果为0,例如第2个参考信号的RSRP、RSRQ、SNR、或者SINR的值为0。从而根据第2个参考信号的测量结果,确定第2个参考信号是否满足条件,或者确定第2个参考信号的测量结果与阈值的比较结果,从而在时隙9上将用于指示参考信号2的测量结果是否满足条件的第一指示信息,或者用于指示参考信号2的测量结果与阈值的比较结果的第二指示信息发送给第一终端设备。也就是说,第二终端设备可以根据指示信息,确定哪些波束或者参考信号没有接收到,提高接收参考信号的准确性和效率。并且,保证了反馈信息的准确性。After determining that the second reference signal is not received, as a possible implementation method, for example, the second terminal device can determine that the measurement result of the second reference signal is 0, for example, the RSRP, RSRQ, SNR, or SINR value of the second reference signal is 0. Therefore, based on the measurement result of the second reference signal, it is determined whether the second reference signal meets the condition, or the comparison result of the measurement result of the second reference signal with the threshold is determined, so that the first indication information indicating whether the measurement result of reference signal 2 meets the condition, or the second indication information indicating the comparison result of the measurement result of reference signal 2 with the threshold is sent to the first terminal device in time slot 9. In other words, the second terminal device can determine which beams or reference signals are not received based on the indication information, thereby improving the accuracy and efficiency of receiving reference signals. In addition, the accuracy of the feedback information is guaranteed.

在确定出没有接收到第2个参考信号后,作为另一种可能的实现方式,第二终端设备在使用波束接收参考信号时,后一个参考信号的接收波束信息可以根据前一个参考信号的接收波束信息确定的。在这种情况下,在确定了第2个参考信号(波束)没有接收到,因此,第二终端设备可以根据第三个波束(第3个参考信号的波束)调整得到第四个波束(第4个参考信号的波束),然后利用第四个波束接收第4个参考信号,即可以实现后面的波束接收快速调整,提高接收参考信号的准确性和效率。After determining that the second reference signal has not been received, as another possible implementation method, when the second terminal device uses a beam to receive a reference signal, the receiving beam information of the subsequent reference signal can be determined based on the receiving beam information of the previous reference signal. In this case, after determining that the second reference signal (beam) has not been received, the second terminal device can adjust the third beam (beam of the third reference signal) to obtain the fourth beam (beam of the fourth reference signal), and then use the fourth beam to receive the fourth reference signal, that is, the subsequent beam reception can be quickly adjusted to improve the accuracy and efficiency of receiving reference signals.

本申请提供的侧行链路上信息传输的方法,在同一个时间单内反馈多个参考信号(即多个波束)的测量结果与阈值的比较结果、或者反馈多个参考信号的测量结果是否满足条件,而不是直接反馈多个参考信号的测量结果,不同的参考信号对应不同的波束方向。而用于指示比较结果或者测量结果是否满足条件的信息长度是少于用于指示测量结果的信息长度,可以有效降低需要反馈的数据量,减少了反馈信息的长度以及反馈信息所需要的通信资源,从而降低了对通信资源消耗。The method for information transmission on the side link provided by the present application feeds back the comparison results of the measurement results of multiple reference signals (i.e., multiple beams) with the threshold value in the same time unit, or feeds back whether the measurement results of multiple reference signals meet the conditions, rather than directly feeding back the measurement results of multiple reference signals, and different reference signals correspond to different beam directions. The length of the information used to indicate whether the comparison result or the measurement result meets the conditions is less than the length of the information used to indicate the measurement result, which can effectively reduce the amount of data that needs to be fed back, reduce the length of the feedback information and the communication resources required for the feedback information, thereby reducing the consumption of communication resources.

应理解,上述只是为了帮助本领域技术人员更好地理解本申请实施例,而非要限制本申请实施例的范围。本领域技术人员根据所给出的上述示例,显然可以进行各种等价的修改或变化,例如,上述方法实施例中的某些步骤可以不必须的,或者可以新加入某些步骤等。或者上述任意两种或者任意多种实施例的组合。这样的修改、变化或者组合后的方案也落入本申请实施例的范围内。It should be understood that the above is only to help those skilled in the art better understand the embodiments of the present application, rather than to limit the scope of the embodiments of the present application. According to the above examples given, those skilled in the art can obviously make various equivalent modifications or changes. For example, some steps in the above method embodiments may not be necessary, or some new steps may be added. Or a combination of any two or any multiple embodiments. Such modifications, changes or combined solutions also fall within the scope of the embodiments of the present application.

还应理解,本申请实施例中的方式、情况、类别以及实施例的划分仅是为了描述的方便,不应构成特别的限定,各种方式、类别、情况以及实施例中的特征在不矛盾的情况下可以相结合。It should also be understood that the division of the methods, situations, categories and embodiments in the embodiments of the present application is only for the convenience of description and should not constitute a special limitation. The features of various methods, categories, situations and embodiments can be combined without contradiction.

还应理解,在本申请的实施例中涉及的各种数字编号仅为描述方便进行的区分,并不用来限制本申请的实施例的范围。上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行 顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It should also be understood that the various numerical numbers involved in the embodiments of the present application are only for the convenience of description and are not intended to limit the scope of the embodiments of the present application. The sequence should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation on the implementation process of the embodiments of the present application.

还应理解,上文对本申请实施例的描述着重于强调各个实施例之间的不同之处,未提到的相同或相似之处可以互相参考,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。It should also be understood that the above description of the embodiments of the present application focuses on emphasizing the differences between the various embodiments. The same or similar points that are not mentioned can be referenced to each other. For the sake of brevity, they will not be repeated here.

以上结合图1至图17对本申请实施例法做了详细说明。以下,结合图18至图20对本申请实施例通信装置进行详细说明。The above embodiment of the present application is described in detail in conjunction with Figures 1 to 17. Below, the communication device of the embodiment of the present application is described in detail in conjunction with Figures 18 to 20.

本实施例可以根据上述方法,对终端设备(包括上述的第一终端设备和第二终端)进行功能模块的划分。例如,可以对应各个功能,划分为各个功能模块,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块可以采用硬件的形式实现。需要说明的是,本实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。In this embodiment, the terminal device (including the first terminal device and the second terminal device) can be divided into functional modules according to the above method. For example, it can be divided into various functional modules corresponding to various functions, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module. The above integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware. It should be noted that the division of modules in this embodiment is schematic and is only a logical function division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation.

需要说明的是,上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的相关内容,均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述,此处不再赘述。It should be noted that the relevant contents of each step involved in the above method embodiment can all be referred to the functional description of the corresponding functional module, which will not be repeated here.

本申请实施例提供的终端设备(包括上述的第一终端设备和第二终端),用于执行上述方法实施例提供任一种侧行链路上信息传输的方法,因此可以达到与上述实现方法相同的效果。在采用集成的单元的情况下,终端设备可以包括处理模块、存储模块和通信模块。其中,处理模块可以用于对终端设备的动作进行控制管理。例如,可以用于支持终端设备执行处理单元执行的步骤。存储模块可以用于支持存储程序代码和数据等。通信模块,可以用于支持终端设备与其他设备的通信。The terminal device provided in the embodiment of the present application (including the first terminal device and the second terminal mentioned above) is used to perform any method of information transmission on the side link provided in the above method embodiment, so that the same effect as the above implementation method can be achieved. In the case of an integrated unit, the terminal device may include a processing module, a storage module and a communication module. Among them, the processing module can be used to control and manage the actions of the terminal device. For example, it can be used to support the terminal device to execute the steps performed by the processing unit. The storage module can be used to support the storage of program codes and data, etc. The communication module can be used to support the communication between the terminal device and other devices.

其中,处理模块可以是处理器或控制器。其可以实现或执行结合本申请公开内容所描述的各种示例性的逻辑方框,模块和电路。处理器也可以是实现计算功能的组合,例如包含一个或多个微处理器组合,数字信号处理(digital signal processing,DSP)和微处理器的组合等等。存储模块可以是存储器。通信模块具体可以为射频电路、蓝牙芯片、Wi-Fi芯片等与其他电子设备交互的设备。Among them, the processing module can be a processor or a controller. It can implement or execute various exemplary logic boxes, modules and circuits described in conjunction with the disclosure of this application. The processor can also be a combination that implements computing functions, such as a combination of one or more microprocessors, a combination of digital signal processing (DSP) and a microprocessor, etc. The storage module can be a memory. The communication module can specifically be a radio frequency circuit, a Bluetooth chip, a Wi-Fi chip, or other devices that interact with other electronic devices.

示例性地,图18示出了本申请实施例的通信装置1800的示意性框图。该通信装置1800可以对应上述方法1100中描述的第一终端设备或者第二终端设备,也可以是应用于第一终端设备或者第二终端设备的芯片或组件,并且,该通信装置1800中各模块或单元分别用于执行上述方法1100中第一终端设备或者第二终端设备所执行的各动作或处理过程。Exemplarily, FIG18 shows a schematic block diagram of a communication device 1800 according to an embodiment of the present application. The communication device 1800 may correspond to the first terminal device or the second terminal device described in the above method 1100, or may be a chip or component applied to the first terminal device or the second terminal device, and each module or unit in the communication device 1800 is respectively used to execute each action or processing process performed by the first terminal device or the second terminal device in the above method 1100.

如图18所示,该通信装置1800包括处理模块1810(或者也可称为处理单元1810)和接口模块1820(或者也可称为接口单元1820)。接口模块1820用于在处理模块1810的驱动下执行具体的信号收发。As shown in FIG18 , the communication device 1800 includes a processing module 1810 (or also referred to as a processing unit 1810 ) and an interface module 1820 (or also referred to as an interface unit 1820 ). The interface module 1820 is used to perform specific signal transmission and reception under the drive of the processing module 1810 .

在一些实施例中:In some embodiments:

接口模块1820用于:在K个时频资源上分别向第二终端设备发送K个参考信号,K个时频资源中不同的时频资源在时域上不重叠,K为大于1的整数;The interface module 1820 is used to: send K reference signals to the second terminal device on K time-frequency resources respectively, where different time-frequency resources among the K time-frequency resources do not overlap in the time domain, and K is an integer greater than 1;

接口模块1820还用于:在第一时频资源上接收来自第二终端设备的反馈信息,反馈信息包括:用于指示K个参考信号的测量结果是否满足条件的第一指示信息,或者用于指示K个参考信号的测量结果与阈值的比较结果的第二指示信息中的至少一种。The interface module 1820 is also used to: receive feedback information from the second terminal device on the first time-frequency resource, the feedback information including: first indication information for indicating whether the measurement results of the K reference signals meet the conditions, or at least one of second indication information for indicating the comparison results of the measurement results of the K reference signals with the threshold.

本申请实施例提供通信装置,在同一个时间单内(第一时频资源上)接收第二终端设备反馈多个参考信号(即多个波束)的测量结果与阈值的比较结果、或者多个参考信号的测量结果是否满足条件,而不是直接反馈多个参考信号的测量结果,不同的参考信号对应不同的波束方向。而用于指示比较结果或者测量结果是否满足条件的信息长度是少于用于指示测量结果的信息长度,可以有效降低需要反馈的数据量,减少了反馈信息的长度以及反馈信息所需要的通信资源,从而降低了对通信资源消耗。The embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which receives the comparison result of the measurement results of multiple reference signals (i.e., multiple beams) fed back by the second terminal device within the same time unit (on the first time-frequency resource) and the threshold, or whether the measurement results of multiple reference signals meet the conditions, instead of directly feeding back the measurement results of multiple reference signals, and different reference signals correspond to different beam directions. The length of the information used to indicate whether the comparison result or the measurement result meets the condition is less than the length of the information used to indicate the measurement result, which can effectively reduce the amount of data that needs to be fed back, reduce the length of the feedback information and the communication resources required for the feedback information, thereby reducing the consumption of communication resources.

在一些可能的实现方式中,K个时频资源中不同的时频资源对应不同的波束方向。In some possible implementations, different time-frequency resources among the K time-frequency resources correspond to different beam directions.

示例性的,参考信号的测量结果和阈值的比较结果可以包括差值(参考信号的测量结果减去阈值得到的值,或者阈值减去参考信号的测量结果得到的值)。Exemplarily, the comparison result between the measurement result of the reference signal and the threshold may include a difference value (a value obtained by subtracting the threshold from the measurement result of the reference signal, or a value obtained by subtracting the measurement result of the reference signal from the threshold).

在一些可能的实现方式中,满足条件包括:K个参考信号在连续N次测量中每次测量结果均大于或者等于第一阈值,第一指示信息指示:K个参考信号在连续N次测量中每次测量结果均大于或者等于第一阈值,N为大于或者等于1的整数,其中,每次测量结果均包括K个参考信号的 测量结果。示例性的,反馈信息中只包括一个第一指示信息,反馈信息中第一指示信息的长度可以为1比特,用于指示连续N次测量中每次测量结果均大于或者等于第一阈值(即用于指示满足条件)。或者用于指示:用于指示连续N次测量中每次测量结果均小于或者等于第一阈值(即用于指示不满足条件)。其中,每次测量结果均包括K个参考信号的测量结果。可以进一步的降低需要反馈的数据量,反馈信息或者第一指示信息只需要1比特,进一步的降低通信资源的消耗。In some possible implementations, the condition is satisfied including: each measurement result of the K reference signals in N consecutive measurements is greater than or equal to a first threshold, and the first indication information indicates: each measurement result of the K reference signals in N consecutive measurements is greater than or equal to the first threshold, N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and each measurement result includes the K reference signals. Measurement results. Exemplarily, the feedback information includes only one first indication information, and the length of the first indication information in the feedback information can be 1 bit, which is used to indicate that each measurement result in N consecutive measurements is greater than or equal to the first threshold (i.e., used to indicate that the condition is met). Or used to indicate: used to indicate that each measurement result in N consecutive measurements is less than or equal to the first threshold (i.e., used to indicate that the condition is not met). Each measurement result includes the measurement results of K reference signals. The amount of data that needs to be fed back can be further reduced, and the feedback information or the first indication information only requires 1 bit, further reducing the consumption of communication resources.

在一些可能的实现方式中,K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量结果满足条件包括:K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量结果和第二阈值的比较结果在阈值范围内,或者,K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量结果和第二阈值的比较结果大于或者等于第三阈值中的至少一个,i的取值为1,2…,K,反馈信息包括K个第一指示信息,第i个参考信号对应的第一指示信息用于指示:第i个参考信号的测量结果满足条件或者第i个参考信号的测量结果不满足条件。一个第一指示信息的长度可以为1比特,也可以大于1比特,例如为2比特或者3比特等。In some possible implementations, the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals satisfies the condition including: the comparison result of the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals and the second threshold is within the threshold range, or the comparison result of the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals and the second threshold is greater than or equal to at least one of the third thresholds, i is 1, 2…, K, and the feedback information includes K first indication information, and the first indication information corresponding to the i-th reference signal is used to indicate: the measurement result of the i-th reference signal satisfies the condition or the measurement result of the i-th reference signal does not satisfy the condition. The length of one first indication information may be 1 bit, or may be greater than 1 bit, such as 2 bits or 3 bits.

在一些可能的实现方式中,K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量结果满足条件包括:K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量结果大于或者等于第四阈值,i的取值为1,2…,K,反馈信息包括K个第一指示信息,第i个参考信号的测对应的第一指示信息用于指示:第i个参考信号的测量结果满足条件或者第i个参考信号的测量结果不满足条件。一个第一指示信息的长度可以为1比特,也可以大于1比特,例如为2比特或者3比特等。In some possible implementations, the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals satisfies a condition including: the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals is greater than or equal to a fourth threshold, i is 1, 2…, K, and the feedback information includes K first indication information, and the first indication information corresponding to the measurement of the i-th reference signal is used to indicate: the measurement result of the i-th reference signal satisfies the condition or the measurement result of the i-th reference signal does not satisfy the condition. The length of one first indication information may be 1 bit, or may be greater than 1 bit, for example, 2 bits or 3 bits.

在一些可能的实现方式中,第二指示信息用于指示:K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量结果和第五阈值的比较结果,i的取值为1,2…,K,反馈信息包括K个第二指示信息。一个第二指示信息用于指示一个参考信号的测量结果与第五阈值的比较结果。In some possible implementations, the second indication information is used to indicate: a comparison result between a measurement result of an i-th reference signal among K reference signals and a fifth threshold, where i is 1, 2, ..., K, and the feedback information includes K second indication information. One second indication information is used to indicate a comparison result between a measurement result of a reference signal and the fifth threshold.

在一些可能的实现方式中,第一时频资源的时域位置是根据第一取值和K个参考信号中第i个参考信号所在的时域资源确定,第一取值用于指示:K个参考信号中第i个参考信号所在的时域位置与第一时频资源的时域位置之间的时域偏移值,i的取值为1,2…,K。In some possible implementations, the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource is determined based on a first value and the time domain resource where the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals is located, and the first value is used to indicate: the time domain offset value between the time domain position where the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals is located and the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource, and the value of i is 1, 2…, K.

在一些可能的实现方式中,第一时频资源对应第二波束(接收波束),第二波束是预定义的或者预配置的。In some possible implementations, the first time-frequency resource corresponds to a second beam (receiving beam), and the second beam is predefined or preconfigured.

在一些可能的实现方式中,接口模块1820还用于:在K个时频资源上分别向第二终端设备发送K个参考信号和第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示;通信装置1800发送的参考信号的累计数量,或者第三指示信息用于指示通信装置1800发送的参考信号的序号、索引或者排列。换句话说,第三指示信息用于指示通信装置1800和第二终端设备当前做的第几次波束维护,第三指示信息类似于C-DAI的作用。通过第三指示信息,第二终端设备就可以有效的判断某一个参考信号(或者波束)的可能漏收或者是这个波束出现了问题,对于后面的波束接收就可以快速调整,并且可以提高接收参考信号的准确性和效率,可以准确的确定出每个参考信号对应的测量结果,保证了反馈信息的准确性。每个时频资源上可以发送一个第三指示信息。例如。通信装置1800在第i个时频资源上向第二终端设备发送第i个参考信号和第i个第三指示信息,第i个第三指示信息用于指示;通信装置1800发送的参考信号的累计数量为i,或者用于指示通信装置1800发送的参考信号的序号、索引或者排列。In some possible implementations, the interface module 1820 is also used to: send K reference signals and third indication information to the second terminal device on K time-frequency resources, respectively, and the third indication information is used to indicate; the cumulative number of reference signals sent by the communication device 1800, or the third indication information is used to indicate the sequence number, index or arrangement of the reference signal sent by the communication device 1800. In other words, the third indication information is used to indicate the number of beam maintenance currently performed by the communication device 1800 and the second terminal device, and the third indication information is similar to the role of C-DAI. Through the third indication information, the second terminal device can effectively determine the possible leakage of a certain reference signal (or beam) or the problem with the beam, and the subsequent beam reception can be quickly adjusted, and the accuracy and efficiency of the received reference signal can be improved, and the measurement result corresponding to each reference signal can be accurately determined, thereby ensuring the accuracy of the feedback information. A third indication information can be sent on each time-frequency resource. For example. The communication device 1800 sends the i-th reference signal and the i-th third indication information to the second terminal device on the i-th time-frequency resource, and the i-th third indication information is used to indicate; the cumulative number of reference signals sent by the communication device 1800 is i, or is used to indicate the sequence number, index or arrangement of the reference signals sent by the communication device 1800.

在一些可能的实现方式中,该参考信号包括:CSI-RS、SSB、S-SSS、S-PSS或者DMRS中的至少一种。In some possible implementations, the reference signal includes: at least one of: CSI-RS, SSB, S-SSS, S-PSS or DMRS.

在一些可能的实现方式中,该参考信号的测量结果包括:参考信号的RSRP、参考信号的RSRQ、参考信号的SNR、或者参考信号的SINR中的至少一种。In some possible implementations, the measurement result of the reference signal includes: at least one of: RSRP of the reference signal, RSRQ of the reference signal, SNR of the reference signal, or SINR of the reference signal.

在一些可能的实现方式中,第一时频资源的时域资源为至少一个OFDM符号、至少一个时隙、或者至少一个子帧,K个时频资源中第i个时频资源的时域资源为至少一个OFDM符号、至少一个时隙或者至少一个子帧,i的取值为1,2…,K。In some possible implementations, the time domain resources of the first time-frequency resource are at least one OFDM symbol, at least one time slot, or at least one subframe, and the time domain resources of the i-th time-frequency resource among K time-frequency resources are at least one OFDM symbol, at least one time slot, or at least one subframe, where the value of i is 1, 2…, K.

在另一些实施例中:In other embodiments:

接口模块1820用于:在K个时频资源上分别接收来自第一终端设备的K个参考信号,K个时频资源中不同的时频资源在时域上不重叠,K为大于1的整数;The interface module 1820 is used to: receive K reference signals from the first terminal device on K time-frequency resources respectively, where different time-frequency resources among the K time-frequency resources do not overlap in the time domain, and K is an integer greater than 1;

接口模块1820还用于:在第一时频资源向第一终端设备发送反馈信息,反馈信息包括:用于指示该通信装置在K个时频资源上对K个参考信号进行测量的测量结果是否满足条件的第一指示 信息,或者用于指示K个参考信号的测量结果与阈值的比较结果的第二指示信息中的至少一种。The interface module 1820 is also used to: send feedback information to the first terminal device on the first time-frequency resource, and the feedback information includes: a first indication for indicating whether the measurement result of the communication device measuring the K reference signals on the K time-frequency resources meets the condition information, or at least one of second indication information used to indicate a comparison result of the measurement results of the K reference signals with a threshold.

本申请实施例提供通信装置,在同一个时间单内(第一时频资源上)反馈多个参考信号(即多个波束)的测量结果与阈值的比较结果、或者反馈多个参考信号的测量结果是否满足条件,而不是直接反馈多个参考信号的测量结果,不同的参考信号对应不同的波束方向。而用于指示比较结果或者测量结果是否满足条件的信息长度是少于用于指示测量结果的信息长度,可以有效降低需要反馈的数据量,减少了反馈信息的长度以及反馈信息所需要的通信资源,从而降低了对通信资源消耗。The embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which feeds back the comparison results of the measurement results of multiple reference signals (i.e., multiple beams) with the threshold value in the same time unit (on the first time-frequency resource), or feeds back whether the measurement results of multiple reference signals meet the conditions, instead of directly feeding back the measurement results of multiple reference signals, and different reference signals correspond to different beam directions. The length of the information used to indicate whether the comparison result or the measurement result meets the condition is less than the length of the information used to indicate the measurement result, which can effectively reduce the amount of data that needs to be fed back, reduce the length of the feedback information and the communication resources required for the feedback information, thereby reducing the consumption of communication resources.

在一些可能的实现方式中,在一些可能的实现方式中,K个时频资源中不同的时频资源对应不同的波束方向。In some possible implementations, different time-frequency resources among the K time-frequency resources correspond to different beam directions.

示例性的,参考信号的测量结果和阈值的比较结果可以包括差值(参考信号的测量结果减去阈值得到的值,或者阈值减去参考信号的测量结果得到的值)。Exemplarily, the comparison result between the measurement result of the reference signal and the threshold may include a difference value (a value obtained by subtracting the threshold from the measurement result of the reference signal, or a value obtained by subtracting the measurement result of the reference signal from the threshold).

在一些可能的实现方式中,满足条件包括:K个参考信号在连续N次测量中每次测量结果均大于或者等于第一阈值,第一指示信息指示:K个参考信号在连续N次测量中每次测量结果均大于或者等于第一阈值,N为大于或者等于1的整数,其中,每次测量结果均包括K个参考信号的测量结果。示例性的,反馈信息中只包括一个第一指示信息,反馈信息中第一指示信息的长度可以为1比特,用于指示连续N次测量中每次测量结果均大于或者等于第一阈值(即用于指示满足条件)。或者用于指示:用于指示连续N次测量中每次测量结果均小于或者等于第一阈值(即用于指示不满足条件)。其中,每次测量结果均包括K个参考信号的测量结果。可以进一步的降低需要反馈的数据量,反馈信息或者第一指示信息只需要1比特,进一步的降低通信资源的消耗。In some possible implementations, the condition is satisfied including: each measurement result of K reference signals in N consecutive measurements is greater than or equal to a first threshold, and the first indication information indicates: each measurement result of K reference signals in N consecutive measurements is greater than or equal to the first threshold, N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and each measurement result includes the measurement results of K reference signals. Exemplarily, the feedback information includes only one first indication information, and the length of the first indication information in the feedback information may be 1 bit, which is used to indicate that each measurement result in N consecutive measurements is greater than or equal to the first threshold (i.e., used to indicate that the condition is satisfied). Or used to indicate: used to indicate that each measurement result in N consecutive measurements is less than or equal to the first threshold (i.e., used to indicate that the condition is not satisfied). Wherein, each measurement result includes the measurement results of K reference signals. The amount of data required for feedback can be further reduced, and the feedback information or the first indication information only requires 1 bit, further reducing the consumption of communication resources.

在一些可能的实现方式中,K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量结果满足条件包括:K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量结果和第二阈值的比较结果在阈值范围内,或者,K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量结果和第二阈值的比较结果大于或者等于第三阈值中的至少一个,i的取值为1,2…,K,反馈信息包括K个第一指示信息,第i个参考信号的测对应的第一指示信息用于指示:第i个参考信号的测量结果满足条件或者第i个参考信号的测量结果不满足条件。一个第一指示信息的长度可以为1比特,也可以大于1比特,例如为2比特或者3比特等。In some possible implementations, the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals satisfies the condition including: the comparison result of the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals and the second threshold is within the threshold range, or the comparison result of the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals and the second threshold is greater than or equal to at least one of the third thresholds, i is 1, 2…, K, and the feedback information includes K first indication information, and the first indication information corresponding to the measurement of the i-th reference signal is used to indicate: the measurement result of the i-th reference signal satisfies the condition or the measurement result of the i-th reference signal does not satisfy the condition. The length of one first indication information may be 1 bit, or may be greater than 1 bit, such as 2 bits or 3 bits.

在一些可能的实现方式中,K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量结果满足条件包括:K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量结果大于或者等于第四阈值,i的取值为1,2…,K,反馈信息包括K个第一指示信息,第i个参考信号的测量结果对应的第一指示信息用于指示:第i个参考信号的测量结果满足条件或者第i个参考信号的测量结果不满足条件。一个第一指示信息的长度可以为1比特,也可以大于1比特,例如为2比特或者3比特等。In some possible implementations, the condition that the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals satisfies includes: the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals is greater than or equal to a fourth threshold, i is 1, 2…, K, and the feedback information includes K first indication information, and the first indication information corresponding to the measurement result of the i-th reference signal is used to indicate: the measurement result of the i-th reference signal satisfies the condition or the measurement result of the i-th reference signal does not satisfy the condition. The length of one first indication information may be 1 bit, or may be greater than 1 bit, for example, 2 bits or 3 bits.

在一些可能的实现方式中,第二指示信息用于指示:K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量结果和第五阈值的比较结果,i的取值为1,2…,K,反馈信息包括K个第二指示信息。一个第二指示信息用于指示一个参考信号的测量结果与第五阈值的比较结果。In some possible implementations, the second indication information is used to indicate: a comparison result between a measurement result of an i-th reference signal among K reference signals and a fifth threshold, where i is 1, 2, ..., K, and the feedback information includes K second indication information. One second indication information is used to indicate a comparison result between a measurement result of a reference signal and the fifth threshold.

在一些可能的实现方式中,第一时频资源的时域位置是根据第一取值和K个参考信号中第i个参考信号所在的时域资源确定,第一取值用于指示:K个参考信号中第i个参考信号所在的时域位置与第一时频资源的时域位置之间的时域偏移值,i的取值为1,2…,K。In some possible implementations, the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource is determined based on a first value and the time domain resource where the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals is located, and the first value is used to indicate: the time domain offset value between the time domain position where the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals is located and the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource, and the value of i is 1, 2…, K.

在一些可能的实现方式中,第一时频资源对应第三波束(发送波束),第三波束是预定义的或者预配置的。In some possible implementations, the first time-frequency resource corresponds to a third beam (transmitting beam), and the third beam is predefined or preconfigured.

在一些可能的实现方式中,接口模块1820还用于:在K个时频资源上分别接收来自第一终端设备的K个参考信号和第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示;该通信装置接收的参考信号的累计数量,或者第三指示信息用于指示该通信装置接收的参考信号的序号、索引或者排列。换句话说,第三指示信息用于指示通信装置1800和第一终端设备当前做的第几次波束维护,第三指示信息类似于C-DAI的作用。In some possible implementations, the interface module 1820 is also used to: receive K reference signals and third indication information from the first terminal device on K time-frequency resources respectively, the third indication information is used to indicate; the cumulative number of reference signals received by the communication device, or the third indication information is used to indicate the sequence number, index or arrangement of the reference signal received by the communication device. In other words, the third indication information is used to indicate the number of beam maintenance currently performed by the communication device 1800 and the first terminal device, and the third indication information is similar to the function of C-DAI.

在一些可能的实现方式中,该参考信号包括:CSI-RS、SSB、S-SSS、S-PSS或者DMRS中的至少一种。In some possible implementations, the reference signal includes: at least one of: CSI-RS, SSB, S-SSS, S-PSS or DMRS.

在一些可能的实现方式中,该参考信号的测量结果包括:参考信号的RSRP、参考信号的RSRQ、参考信号的SNR、或者参考信号的SINR中的至少一种。 In some possible implementations, the measurement result of the reference signal includes: at least one of: RSRP of the reference signal, RSRQ of the reference signal, SNR of the reference signal, or SINR of the reference signal.

在一些可能的实现方式中,第一时频资源的时域资源为至少一个OFDM符号、至少一个时隙、或者至少一个子帧,K个时频资源中第i个时频资源的时域资源为至少一个OFDM符号、至少一个时隙或者至少一个子帧,i的取值为1,2…,K。In some possible implementations, the time domain resources of the first time-frequency resource are at least one OFDM symbol, at least one time slot, or at least one subframe, and the time domain resources of the i-th time-frequency resource among K time-frequency resources are at least one OFDM symbol, at least one time slot, or at least one subframe, where the value of i is 1, 2…, K.

进一步的,该通信装置1800还可以包括存储模块(单元),接口模块(单元)1820可以是收发器、输入/输出接口或接口电路。存储单元用于存储接口模块1820和处理模块1810执行的指令。处理模块1810、接口模块1820和存储单元相互耦合,存储单元存储指令,处理模块1810用于执行存储单元存储的指令,接口模块1820用于在处理模块1810的驱动下执行具体的信号收发。Further, the communication device 1800 may also include a storage module (unit), and the interface module (unit) 1820 may be a transceiver, an input/output interface, or an interface circuit. The storage unit is used to store instructions executed by the interface module 1820 and the processing module 1810. The processing module 1810, the interface module 1820, and the storage unit are coupled to each other, the storage unit stores instructions, the processing module 1810 is used to execute the instructions stored in the storage unit, and the interface module 1820 is used to perform specific signal transmission and reception under the drive of the processing module 1810.

应理解,通信装置1800中各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程请参照前文中结合方法1100中相关实施例的第一终端设备或者第二终端相关的描述,为了简洁,这里不加赘述。It should be understood that the specific process of each unit in the communication device 1800 executing the above corresponding steps can be found in the previous description of the first terminal device or the second terminal in the relevant embodiment of the method 1100. For the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.

应理解,接口模块1820可以是收发器、输入/输出接口或接口电路。存储单元可以是存储器。处理模块1810可由处理器实现。It should be understood that the interface module 1820 may be a transceiver, an input/output interface or an interface circuit. The storage unit may be a memory. The processing module 1810 may be implemented by a processor.

图19所示的为本申请提供的另一通信装置1900的示意性框图。如图19所示,通信装置1900可以包括处理器1910、存储器1920、收发器1930和总线系统1940。通信装置1900的各个组件通过总线系统1940耦合在一起,其中总线系统1940除包括数据总线之外,还可以包括电源总线、控制总线和状态信号总线等。但是为了清楚说明起见,在图19中将各种总线都标为总线系统1940。为便于表示,图19中仅是示意性画出。FIG. 19 is a schematic block diagram of another communication device 1900 provided by the present application. As shown in FIG. 19 , the communication device 1900 may include a processor 1910, a memory 1920, a transceiver 1930, and a bus system 1940. The various components of the communication device 1900 are coupled together through the bus system 1940, wherein the bus system 1940 may include a power bus, a control bus, and a status signal bus in addition to a data bus. However, for the sake of clarity, various buses are labeled as bus system 1940 in FIG. 19 . For ease of representation, FIG. 19 is only schematically drawn.

图18所示的通信装置1800或图19所示的通信装置1900能够实现前述方法1100的各个实施例中第一终端设备或者第二终端设备执行的步骤。类似的描述可以参考前述对应的方法中的描述。为避免重复,这里不再赘述。The communication device 1800 shown in FIG18 or the communication device 1900 shown in FIG19 can implement the steps performed by the first terminal device or the second terminal device in each embodiment of the aforementioned method 1100. Similar descriptions can refer to the descriptions in the aforementioned corresponding methods. To avoid repetition, they are not described here.

还应理解,图18所示的通信装置1800或图19所示的通信装置1900可以为终端设备,或者,终端设备可以包括图18所示的通信装置1800或图19所示的通信装置1900。It should also be understood that the communication device 1800 shown in Figure 18 or the communication device 1900 shown in Figure 19 may be a terminal device, or the terminal device may include the communication device 1800 shown in Figure 18 or the communication device 1900 shown in Figure 19.

还应该理解的是,本申请中的终端设备也可以是支持该终端设备实现该方法的芯片、芯片系统、或处理器等,本申请实施例在此不做限制。It should also be understood that the terminal device in the present application may also be a chip, a chip system, or a processor that supports the terminal device to implement the method, and the embodiments of the present application are not limited here.

还应理解,以上装置中单元的划分仅仅是一种逻辑功能的划分,实际实现时可以全部或部分集成到一个物理实体上,也可以物理上分开。且装置中的单元可以全部以软件通过处理元件调用的形式实现;也可以全部以硬件的形式实现;还可以部分单元以软件通过处理元件调用的形式实现,部分单元以硬件的形式实现。例如,各个单元可以为单独设立的处理元件,也可以集成在装置的某一个芯片中实现,此外,也可以以程序的形式存储于存储器中,由装置的某一个处理元件调用并执行该单元的功能。这里该处理元件又可以称为处理器,可以是一种具有信号处理能力的集成电路。在该实现过程中,上述方法的各步骤或以上各个单元可以通过处理器元件中的硬件的集成逻辑电路实现或者以软件通过处理元件调用的形式实现。It should also be understood that the division of units in the above device is only a division of logical functions. In actual implementation, they can be fully or partially integrated into one physical entity, or they can be physically separated. And the units in the device can all be implemented in the form of software calling through processing elements; they can also be all implemented in the form of hardware; some units can also be implemented in the form of software calling through processing elements, and some units can be implemented in the form of hardware. For example, each unit can be a separately established processing element, or it can be integrated in a certain chip of the device. In addition, it can also be stored in the memory in the form of a program, and called and executed by a certain processing element of the device. The processing element here can also be called a processor, which can be an integrated circuit with signal processing capabilities. In the implementation process, each step of the above method or each unit above can be implemented by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor element or in the form of software calling through a processing element.

在一个例子中,以上任一装置中的单元可以是被配置成实施以上方法的一个或多个集成电路,例如:一个或多个专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC),或,一个或多个数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP),或,一个或者多个现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA),或这些集成电路形式中至少两种的组合。再如,当装置中的单元可以通过处理元件调度程序的形式实现时,该处理元件可以是通用处理器,例如中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU)或其它可以调用程序的处理器。再如,这些单元可以集成在一起,以片上系统(system-on-a-chip,SOC)的形式实现。In one example, the unit in any of the above devices may be one or more integrated circuits configured to implement the above method, such as one or more application specific integrated circuits (ASIC), or one or more digital signal processors (DSP), or one or more field programmable gate arrays (FPGA), or a combination of at least two of these integrated circuit forms. For another example, when the unit in the device can be implemented in the form of a processing element scheduler, the processing element can be a general-purpose processor, such as a central processing unit (CPU) or other processor that can call a program. For another example, these units can be integrated together and implemented in the form of a system-on-a-chip (SOC).

图20为本申请提供的一种终端设备2000的结构示意图。上述通信装置1800或者通信装置1900可以配置在该终端设备2000中。或者,该通信装置1800或者通信装置1900本身可以即为该终端设备2000。或者说,该终端设备2000可以执行上述方法1100中第一终端设备或者第二终端设备执行的动作。可选的,为了便于说明,图20仅示出了终端设备的主要部件。如图20所示,终端设备2000包括处理器、存储器、控制电路、天线以及输入输出装置。FIG20 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a terminal device 2000 provided by the present application. The above-mentioned communication device 1800 or communication device 1900 can be configured in the terminal device 2000. Alternatively, the communication device 1800 or communication device 1900 itself can be the terminal device 2000. In other words, the terminal device 2000 can execute the actions performed by the first terminal device or the second terminal device in the above-mentioned method 1100. Optionally, for ease of explanation, FIG20 only shows the main components of the terminal device. As shown in FIG20, the terminal device 2000 includes a processor, a memory, a control circuit, an antenna, and an input and output device.

处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,以及对整个终端设备进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据,例如用于支持终端设备执行上述侧行链路上信息传输的方法实施例中所描述的动作。存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据,例如存储上述实施例中所描述的码本。控制电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理。控制电路和天线一起也可 以叫做收发器,主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号。输入输出装置,例如触摸屏、显示屏,键盘等主要用于接收用户输入的数据以及对用户输出数据。The processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and to control the entire terminal device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program, for example, to support the terminal device to perform the actions described in the above-mentioned method embodiment for information transmission on the side link. The memory is mainly used to store software programs and data, for example, to store the codebook described in the above-mentioned embodiment. The control circuit is mainly used to convert the baseband signal and the radio frequency signal and to process the radio frequency signal. The control circuit and the antenna can also be used together. It is called a transceiver, which is mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves. Input and output devices, such as touch screens, display screens, keyboards, etc., are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users.

当终端设备开机后,处理器可以读取存储单元中的软件程序,解释并执行软件程序的指令,处理软件程序的数据。当需要通过无线发送数据时,处理器对待发送的数据进行基带处理后,输出基带信号至射频电路,射频电路将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到终端设备时,射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号,将射频信号转换为基带信号,并将基带信号输出至处理器,处理器将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。When the terminal device is turned on, the processor can read the software program in the storage unit, interpret and execute the instructions of the software program, and process the data of the software program. When data needs to be sent wirelessly, the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and outputs the baseband signal to the RF circuit. The RF circuit performs RF processing on the baseband signal and then sends the RF signal outward in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna. When data is sent to the terminal device, the RF circuit receives the RF signal through the antenna, converts the RF signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor. The processor converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.

本领域技术人员可以理解,为了便于说明,图20仅示出了一个存储器和处理器。在实际的终端设备中,可以存在多个处理器和存储器。存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等,本申请实施例对此不做限制。Those skilled in the art will appreciate that, for ease of explanation, FIG. 20 shows only one memory and processor. In an actual terminal device, there may be multiple processors and memories. The memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device, etc., which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.

例如,处理器可以包括基带处理器和中央处理器,基带处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,中央处理器主要用于对整个终端设备进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据。图20中的处理器集成了基带处理器和中央处理器的功能,本领域技术人员可以理解,基带处理器和中央处理器也可以是各自独立的处理器,通过总线等技术互联。本领域技术人员可以理解,终端设备可以包括多个基带处理器以适应不同的网络制式,终端设备可以包括多个中央处理器以增强其处理能力,终端设备的各个部件可以通过各种总线连接。该基带处理器也可以表述为基带处理电路或者基带处理芯片。该中央处理器也可以表述为中央处理电路或者中央处理芯片。对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理的功能可以内置在处理器中,也可以以软件程序的形式存储在存储单元中,由处理器执行软件程序以实现基带处理功能。For example, the processor may include a baseband processor and a central processing unit. The baseband processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and the central processing unit is mainly used to control the entire terminal device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program. The processor in Figure 20 integrates the functions of the baseband processor and the central processing unit. Those skilled in the art will understand that the baseband processor and the central processing unit may also be independent processors, interconnected by technologies such as buses. Those skilled in the art will understand that the terminal device may include multiple baseband processors to adapt to different network formats, and the terminal device may include multiple central processing units to enhance its processing capabilities. The various components of the terminal device may be connected through various buses. The baseband processor may also be described as a baseband processing circuit or a baseband processing chip. The central processing unit may also be described as a central processing circuit or a central processing chip. The function of processing the communication protocol and communication data may be built into the processor, or may be stored in the storage unit in the form of a software program, and the processor executes the software program to implement the baseband processing function.

示例性的,在本申请实施例中,可以将具有收发功能的天线和控制电路视为终端设备2000的收发单元2001,将具有处理功能的处理器视为终端设备2000的处理单元2002。如图20所示,终端设备2000包括收发单元2001和处理单元2002。收发单元也可以称为收发器、收发机、收发装置等。可选的,可以将收发单元2001中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元,将收发单元2001中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元,即收发单元2001包括接收单元和发送单元。示例性的,接收单元也可以称为接收机、接收器、接收电路等,发送单元可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。Exemplarily, in the embodiment of the present application, the antenna and the control circuit with transceiver functions can be regarded as the transceiver unit 2001 of the terminal device 2000, and the processor with processing function can be regarded as the processing unit 2002 of the terminal device 2000. As shown in FIG. 20, the terminal device 2000 includes a transceiver unit 2001 and a processing unit 2002. The transceiver unit can also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiver device, etc. Optionally, the device used to implement the receiving function in the transceiver unit 2001 can be regarded as a receiving unit, and the device used to implement the sending function in the transceiver unit 2001 can be regarded as a sending unit, that is, the transceiver unit 2001 includes a receiving unit and a sending unit. Exemplarily, the receiving unit can also be referred to as a receiver, a receiver, a receiving circuit, etc., and the sending unit can be referred to as a transmitter, a transmitter or a sending circuit, etc.

应理解,本申请实施例中,该处理器可以为中央处理单元(central processing unit,CPU),该处理器还可以是其他通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。It should be understood that in the embodiments of the present application, the processor may be a central processing unit (CPU), or other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSP), application-specific integrated circuits (ASIC), field programmable gate arrays (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc. A general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor, etc.

还应理解,本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM,DR RAM)。It should also be understood that the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memories. Among them, the non-volatile memory may be a read-only memory (ROM), a programmable read-only memory (PROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), or a flash memory. The volatile memory may be a random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache. By way of example and not limitation, many forms of random access memory (RAM) are available, such as static RAM (SRAM), dynamic random access memory (DRAM), synchronous DRAM (SDRAM), double data rate SDRAM (DDR SDRAM), enhanced SDRAM (ESDRAM), synchronous link DRAM (SLDRAM), and direct rambus RAM (DR RAM).

上述实施例,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或其他任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,上述实施例可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。该计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令或计算机程序。在计算机上加载或执行该计算机指令或计算机程序时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例的流程或功能。该计算机可以为通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。该计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计 算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,该计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。该计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集合的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。该可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,DVD)、或者半导体介质。半导体介质可以是固态硬盘。The above embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any other combination thereof. When implemented by software, the above embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions or computer programs. When the computer instructions or computer programs are loaded or executed on a computer, the processes or functions according to the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device. The computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or downloaded from a computer. A computer-readable storage medium is transmitted to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions can be transmitted from one website, computer, server or data center to another website, computer, server or data center by wired (e.g., infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means. The computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or data center that contains one or more available media sets. The available medium can be a magnetic medium (e.g., a floppy disk, a hard disk, a tape), an optical medium (e.g., a DVD), or a semiconductor medium. The semiconductor medium can be a solid-state hard disk.

本申请实施例还提供了一种通信系统,该通信系统包括:上述的第一终端设备和上述的第二终端设备。可选的,该通信系统还可以包括上述的网络设备。The embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, the communication system comprising: the above-mentioned first terminal device and the above-mentioned second terminal device. Optionally, the communication system may also include the above-mentioned network device.

本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读介质,用于存储计算机程序代码,该计算机程序包括用于执行上述方法1100中本申请实施例的侧行链路上信息传输方法的指令。该可读介质可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)或随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM),本申请实施例对此不做限制。The embodiment of the present application further provides a computer readable medium for storing computer program code, wherein the computer program includes instructions for executing the method for transmitting information on the side link of the embodiment of the present application in the above method 1100. The readable medium may be a read-only memory (ROM) or a random access memory (RAM), which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.

本申请还提供了一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品包括指令,当该指令被执行时,以使得第一终端设备执行对应于上述方法的终端设备操作,或者,以使得第二终端设备执行对应于上述方法的终端设备操作。The present application also provides a computer program product, which includes instructions. When the instructions are executed, a first terminal device performs a terminal device operation corresponding to the above method, or a second terminal device performs a terminal device operation corresponding to the above method.

本申请实施例还提供了一种系统芯片,该系统芯片包括:处理单元和通信单元,该处理单元,例如可以是处理器,该通信单元例如可以是输入/输出接口、管脚或电路等。该处理单元可执行计算机指令,以使该通信装置内的芯片执行上述本申请实施例提供的任一种侧行链路上信息传输的方法。The embodiment of the present application further provides a system chip, which includes: a processing unit and a communication unit, the processing unit, for example, may be a processor, and the communication unit, for example, may be an input/output interface, a pin or a circuit, etc. The processing unit may execute computer instructions to enable the chip in the communication device to execute any of the sidelink information transmission methods provided in the above embodiments of the present application.

可选地,上述本申请实施例中提供的任意一种通信装置可以包括该系统芯片。Optionally, any one of the communication devices provided in the above-mentioned embodiments of the present application may include the system chip.

可选地,该计算机指令被存储在存储单元中。Optionally, the computer instructions are stored in a storage unit.

可选地,该存储单元为该芯片内的存储单元,如寄存器、缓存等,该存储单元还可以是该终端内的位于该芯片外部的存储单元,如ROM或可存储静态信息和指令的其他类型的静态存储设备,RAM等。其中,上述任一处提到的处理器,可以是一个CPU,微处理器,ASIC,或一个或多个用于控制上述的主系统信息传输的方法的程序执行的集成电路。该处理单元和该存储单元可以解耦,分别设置在不同的物理设备上,通过有线或者无线的方式连接来实现该处理单元和该存储单元的各自的功能,以支持该系统芯片实现上述实施例中的各种功能。或者,该处理单元和该存储器也可以耦合在同一个设备上。Optionally, the storage unit is a storage unit within the chip, such as a register, a cache, etc. The storage unit may also be a storage unit within the terminal that is located outside the chip, such as a ROM or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, RAM, etc. Among them, the processor mentioned in any of the above may be a CPU, a microprocessor, an ASIC, or one or more integrated circuits for controlling the execution of the program of the above-mentioned method for main system information transmission. The processing unit and the storage unit may be decoupled and respectively arranged on different physical devices, and connected by wire or wireless means to implement the respective functions of the processing unit and the storage unit, so as to support the system chip to implement the various functions in the above-mentioned embodiments. Alternatively, the processing unit and the memory may also be coupled on the same device.

可以理解,本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM,DR RAM)。It can be understood that the memory in the embodiments of the present application can be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or can include both volatile and non-volatile memories. Among them, the non-volatile memory can be a read-only memory (ROM), a programmable read-only memory (PROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), or a flash memory. The volatile memory can be a random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache. By way of example and not limitation, many forms of random access memory (RAM) are available, such as static RAM (SRAM), dynamic random access memory (DRAM), synchronous DRAM (SDRAM), double data rate SDRAM (DDR SDRAM), enhanced SDRAM (ESDRAM), synchronous link DRAM (SLDRAM), and direct rambus RAM (DR RAM).

本申请中出现的术语“上行”和“下行”,用于在特定场景描述数据/信息传输的方向,比如,“上行”方向一般是指数据/信息从终端向网络侧传输的方向,或者分布式单元向集中式单元传输的方向,“下行”方向一般是指数据/信息从网络侧向终端传输的方向,或者集中式单元向分布式单元传输的方向,可以理解,“上行”和“下行”仅用于描述数据/信息的传输方向,该数据/信息传输的具体起止的设备都不作限定。The terms "uplink" and "downlink" appearing in this application are used to describe the direction of data/information transmission in specific scenarios. For example, the "uplink" direction generally refers to the direction of data/information transmission from the terminal to the network side, or the direction of data/information transmission from a distributed unit to a centralized unit, and the "downlink" direction generally refers to the direction of data/information transmission from the network side to the terminal, or the direction of data/information transmission from a centralized unit to a distributed unit. It can be understood that "uplink" and "downlink" are only used to describe the transmission direction of data/information, and the specific starting and ending devices of the data/information transmission are not limited.

在本申请中可能出现的对各种消息/信息/设备/网元/系统/装置/动作/操作/流程/概念等各类客体进行了赋名,可以理解的是,这些具体的名称并不构成对相关客体的限定,所赋名称可随着场景,语境或者使用习惯等因素而变更,对本申请中技术术语的技术含义的理解,应主要从其在技 术方案中所体现/执行的功能和技术效果来确定。In this application, various objects such as various messages/information/equipment/network elements/systems/devices/actions/operations/processes/concepts that may appear are named. It is understandable that these specific names do not constitute a limitation on the relevant objects. The names given may change with factors such as scenarios, contexts or usage habits. The technical meaning of the technical terms in this application should be understood mainly from their technical It is determined by the functions and technical effects embodied/implemented in the technical solution.

本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,本申请的实施例中的方法可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机程序或指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序或指令时,全部或部分地执行本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机程序或指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者通过所述计算机可读存储介质进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是集成一个或多个可用介质的服务器等数据存储设备。Those of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that the methods in the embodiments of the present application may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented using software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer programs or instructions. When the computer program or instruction is loaded and executed on a computer, the process or function described in the embodiments of the present application is executed in whole or in part. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device. The computer program or instruction may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted via the computer-readable storage medium. The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that a computer can access or a data storage device such as a server that integrates one or more available media.

所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and brevity of description, the specific working processes of the systems, devices and units described above can refer to the corresponding processes in the aforementioned method embodiments and will not be repeated here.

在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,该单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in the present application, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, devices and methods can be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only schematic. For example, the division of the unit is only a logical function division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation, such as multiple units or components can be combined or integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed. Another point is that the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed can be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, which can be electrical, mechanical or other forms.

所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place or distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.

另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.

所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、随机存取。If the functions are implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, they can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application can be essentially or partly embodied in the form of a software product that contributes to the prior art. The computer software product is stored in a storage medium and includes several instructions for a computer device (which can be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the methods described in each embodiment of the present application. The aforementioned storage media include: USB flash drives, mobile hard disks, read-only memory (ROM), and random access.

以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。 The above is only a specific implementation of the present application, but the protection scope of the present application is not limited thereto. Any person skilled in the art who is familiar with the present technical field can easily think of changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in the present application, which should be included in the protection scope of the present application. Therefore, the protection scope of the present application should be based on the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (29)

一种侧行链路上信息传输的方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A method for transmitting information on a side link, characterized in that the method comprises: 第一终端设备在K个时频资源上分别向第二终端设备发送K个参考信号,所述K个时频资源中不同的时频资源在时域上不重叠,K为大于1的整数;The first terminal device sends K reference signals to the second terminal device on K time-frequency resources respectively, where different time-frequency resources among the K time-frequency resources do not overlap in the time domain, and K is an integer greater than 1; 所述第一终端设备在第一时频资源上接收来自所述第二终端设备的反馈信息,所述反馈信息包括:用于指示所述K个参考信号的测量结果是否满足条件的第一指示信息,或者用于指示所述K个参考信号的测量结果与阈值的比较结果的第二指示信息中的至少一种。The first terminal device receives feedback information from the second terminal device on a first time-frequency resource, the feedback information including: first indication information for indicating whether the measurement results of the K reference signals meet a condition, or at least one of second indication information for indicating a comparison result of the measurement results of the K reference signals with a threshold. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述K个时频资源中不同的时频资源对应不同的波束方向。The method according to claim 1 is characterized in that different time-frequency resources among the K time-frequency resources correspond to different beam directions. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述满足条件包括:所述K个参考信号在连续N次测量中每次测量结果均大于或者等于第一阈值,所述第一指示信息指示:所述K个参考信号在连续N次测量中每次测量结果均大于或者等于所述第一阈值,N为大于或者等于1的整数,其中,每次测量结果均包括所述K个参考信号的测量结果。The method according to claim 1 or 2 is characterized in that the satisfying condition includes: each measurement result of the K reference signals in N consecutive measurements is greater than or equal to a first threshold, and the first indication information indicates: each measurement result of the K reference signals in N consecutive measurements is greater than or equal to the first threshold, N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and each measurement result includes the measurement results of the K reference signals. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量结果满足条件包括:所述K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量结果和第二阈值的比较结果在阈值范围内,或者,所述K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量结果和第二阈值的比较结果大于或者等于第三阈值中的至少一个,i的取值为1,2…,K,所述反馈信息包括K个所述第一指示信息,所述第i个参考信号的测量结果对应的第一指示信息用于指示:所述第i个参考信号的测量结果满足条件或者所述第i个参考信号的测量结果不满足条件。The method according to claim 1 or 2 is characterized in that the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals satisfies the condition including: a comparison result of the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals and a second threshold is within a threshold range, or a comparison result of the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals and the second threshold is greater than or equal to at least one of a third threshold, and the value of i is 1, 2…, K, and the feedback information includes K first indication information, and the first indication information corresponding to the measurement result of the i-th reference signal is used to indicate: the measurement result of the i-th reference signal satisfies the condition or the measurement result of the i-th reference signal does not satisfy the condition. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量结果满足条件包括:所述K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量结果大于或者等于第四阈值,i的取值为1,2…,K,所述反馈信息包括K个所述第一指示信息,所述第i个参考信号的测量结果对应的第一指示信息用于指示:所述第i个参考信号的测量结果满足条件或者所述第i个参考信号的测量结果不满足条件。The method according to claim 1 or 2 is characterized in that the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals satisfies the condition including: the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals is greater than or equal to a fourth threshold, the value of i is 1, 2…, K, and the feedback information includes K first indication information, and the first indication information corresponding to the measurement result of the i-th reference signal is used to indicate: the measurement result of the i-th reference signal satisfies the condition or the measurement result of the i-th reference signal does not satisfy the condition. 根据权利要求3至5中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息的长度为1比特。The method according to any one of claims 3 to 5 is characterized in that the length of the first indication information is 1 bit. 根据权利要求1至6中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二指示信息用于指示:所述K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量结果和第五阈值的比较结果,i的取值为1,2…,K,所述反馈信息包括K个所述第二指示信息。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 6 is characterized in that the second indication information is used to indicate: a comparison result between a measurement result of an i-th reference signal among the K reference signals and a fifth threshold, where i is 1, 2…, K, and the feedback information includes K pieces of the second indication information. 根据权利要求1至7中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一时频资源的时域位置是根据第一取值和所述K个参考信号中第i个参考信号所在的时域资源确定,所述第一取值用于指示:所述K个参考信号中第i个参考信号所在的时域位置与所述第一时频资源的时域位置之间的时域偏移值,i的取值为1,2…,K。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7 is characterized in that the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource is determined based on a first value and the time domain resource where the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals is located, and the first value is used to indicate: the time domain offset value between the time domain position where the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals is located and the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource, and the value of i is 1, 2…, K. 根据权利要求1至8中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一时频资源对应第二波束,所述第二波束是预定义的或者预配置的。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 8 is characterized in that the first time-frequency resource corresponds to a second beam, and the second beam is predefined or preconfigured. 根据权利要求1至9中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一终端设备在K个时频资源上分别向第二终端设备发送K个参考信号,包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 9, characterized in that the first terminal device sends K reference signals to the second terminal device on K time-frequency resources respectively, comprising: 所述第一终端设备在K个时频资源上分别向第二终端设备发送K个参考信号和第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示;所述第一终端设备发送的参考信号的累计数量,或者所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第一终端设备发送的参考信号的序号、索引或者排列。The first terminal device sends K reference signals and third indication information to the second terminal device on K time-frequency resources respectively, and the third indication information is used to indicate; the cumulative number of reference signals sent by the first terminal device, or the third indication information is used to indicate the sequence number, index or arrangement of the reference signal sent by the first terminal device. 根据权利要求1至10中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述参考信号包括:CSI-RS、SSB、S-SSS、S-PSS或者DMRS中的至少一种。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 10 is characterized in that the reference signal includes: at least one of CSI-RS, SSB, S-SSS, S-PSS or DMRS. 根据权利要求1至11中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述参考信号的测量结果包括:参考信号的RSRP、参考信号的RSRQ、参考信号的SNR、或者参考信号的SINR中的至少一种。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 11 is characterized in that the measurement result of the reference signal comprises: at least one of RSRP of the reference signal, RSRQ of the reference signal, SNR of the reference signal, or SINR of the reference signal. 根据权利要求1至12中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一时频资源的时域资源为至少一个OFDM符号、至少一个时隙、或者至少一个子帧,所述K个时频资源中第i个时频资 源的时域资源为至少一个OFDM符号、至少一个时隙或者至少一个子帧,i的取值为1,2…,K。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 12, characterized in that the time domain resource of the first time-frequency resource is at least one OFDM symbol, at least one time slot, or at least one subframe, and the i-th time-frequency resource among the K time-frequency resources is The time domain resource of the source is at least one OFDM symbol, at least one time slot or at least one subframe, and the value of i is 1, 2..., K. 一种侧行链路上信息传输的方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A method for transmitting information on a side link, characterized in that the method comprises: 第二终端设备在K个时频资源上分别接收来自第一终端设备的K个参考信号,所述K个时频资源中不同的时频资源在时域上不重叠,K为大于1的整数;The second terminal device receives K reference signals from the first terminal device on K time-frequency resources respectively, where different time-frequency resources among the K time-frequency resources do not overlap in the time domain, and K is an integer greater than 1; 所述第二终端设备在第一时频资源向所述第一终端设备发送反馈信息,所述反馈信息包括:用于指示所述第二终端设备在所述K个时频资源上对所述K个参考信号进行测量的测量结果是否满足条件的第一指示信息,或者用于指示所述K个参考信号的测量结果与阈值的比较结果的第二指示信息中的至少一种。The second terminal device sends feedback information to the first terminal device in a first time-frequency resource, and the feedback information includes: first indication information for indicating whether a measurement result of the K reference signals measured by the second terminal device on the K time-frequency resources satisfies a condition, or at least one of second indication information for indicating a comparison result of the measurement result of the K reference signals with a threshold. 根据权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述K个时频资源中不同的时频资源对应不同的波束方向。The method according to claim 14 is characterized in that different time-frequency resources among the K time-frequency resources correspond to different beam directions. 根据权利要求14或15所述的方法,其特征在于,所述满足条件包括:所述K个参考信号在连续N次测量中每次测量结果均大于或者等于第一阈值,所述第一指示信息指示:所述K个参考信号在连续N次测量中每次测量结果均大于或者等于所述第一阈值,N为大于或者等于1的整数,其中,每次测量结果均包括所述K个参考信号的测量结果。The method according to claim 14 or 15 is characterized in that the satisfying condition includes: each measurement result of the K reference signals in N consecutive measurements is greater than or equal to a first threshold, and the first indication information indicates: each measurement result of the K reference signals in N consecutive measurements is greater than or equal to the first threshold, N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and each measurement result includes the measurement results of the K reference signals. 根据权利要求14或15所述的方法,其特征在于,所述K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量结果满足条件包括:所述K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量结果和第二阈值的比较结果在阈值范围内,或者,所述K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量结果和第二阈值的比较结果大于或者等于第三阈值中的至少一个,i的取值为1,2…,K,所述反馈信息包括K个所述第一指示信息,所述第i个参考信号的测量结果对应的第一指示信息用于指示:所述第i个参考信号的测量结果满足条件或者所述第i个参考信号的测量结果不满足条件。The method according to claim 14 or 15 is characterized in that the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals satisfies the condition including: a comparison result of the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals and a second threshold is within a threshold range, or a comparison result of the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals and the second threshold is greater than or equal to at least one of a third threshold, and the value of i is 1, 2…, K, and the feedback information includes K first indication information, and the first indication information corresponding to the measurement result of the i-th reference signal is used to indicate: the measurement result of the i-th reference signal satisfies the condition or the measurement result of the i-th reference signal does not satisfy the condition. 根据权利要求14或15所述的方法,其特征在于,所述K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量结果满足条件包括:所述K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量结果大于或者等于第四阈值,i的取值为1,2…,K,所述反馈信息包括K个所述第一指示信息,所述第i个参考信号的测量结果对应的第一指示信息用于指示:所述第i个参考信号的测量结果满足条件或者所述第i个参考信号的测量结果不满足条件。The method according to claim 14 or 15 is characterized in that the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals satisfies the condition including: the measurement result of the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals is greater than or equal to a fourth threshold, the value of i is 1, 2…, K, the feedback information includes K first indication information, and the first indication information corresponding to the measurement result of the i-th reference signal is used to indicate: the measurement result of the i-th reference signal satisfies the condition or the measurement result of the i-th reference signal does not satisfy the condition. 根据权利要求16至18中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息的长度为1比特。The method according to any one of claims 16 to 18 is characterized in that the length of the first indication information is 1 bit. 根据权利要求14至19中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二指示信息用于指示:所述K个参考信号中第i个参考信号的测量结果和第五阈值的比较结果,i的取值为1,2…,K,所述反馈信息包括K个所述第二指示信息。The method according to any one of claims 14 to 19 is characterized in that the second indication information is used to indicate: a comparison result between a measurement result of an i-th reference signal among the K reference signals and a fifth threshold, where i is 1, 2…, K, and the feedback information includes K pieces of the second indication information. 根据权利要求14至20中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一时频资源的时域位置是根据第一取值和所述K个参考信号中第i个参考信号所在的时域资源确定,所述第一取值用于指示:所述K个参考信号中第i个参考信号所在的时域位置与所述第一时频资源的时域位置之间的时域偏移值,i的取值为1,2…,K。The method according to any one of claims 14 to 20 is characterized in that the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource is determined based on a first value and the time domain resource where the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals is located, and the first value is used to indicate: the time domain offset value between the time domain position where the i-th reference signal among the K reference signals is located and the time domain position of the first time-frequency resource, and the value of i is 1, 2…, K. 根据权利要求14至21中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一时频资源对应第三波束,所述第三波束是预定义的或者预配置的。The method according to any one of claims 14 to 21 is characterized in that the first time-frequency resource corresponds to a third beam, and the third beam is predefined or preconfigured. 根据权利要求14至22中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二终端设备在K个时频资源上分别接收来自第一终端设备的K个参考信号,包括:The method according to any one of claims 14 to 22, characterized in that the second terminal device receives K reference signals from the first terminal device on K time-frequency resources respectively, comprising: 所述第二终端设备在所述K个时频资源上分别接收来自所述第一终端设备的K个参考信号和第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示;所述第二终端设备接收的参考信号的累计数量,或者所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第二终端设备接收的参考信号的序号、索引或者排列;The second terminal device receives K reference signals and third indication information from the first terminal device on the K time-frequency resources respectively, where the third indication information is used to indicate: a cumulative number of reference signals received by the second terminal device, or the third indication information is used to indicate a sequence number, index or arrangement of the reference signals received by the second terminal device; 所述方法还包括:The method further comprises: 所述第二终端设备根据接收到的参考信号和所述第三指示信息,确定所述K个参考信号的测量结果。The second terminal device determines the measurement results of the K reference signals based on the received reference signal and the third indication information. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:用于执行如权利要求1至13中任一项所述方法的各个步骤的单元,或者用于执行如权利要求14至23中任一项所述方法的各个步骤的单元。A communication device, characterized in that it comprises: a unit for executing each step of the method as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 13, or a unit for executing each step of the method as claimed in any one of claims 14 to 23. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括至少一个处理器和接口电路,所述至少一个处理器用 于执行:如权利要求1至13中任一项所述方法,或者如权利要求14至23中任一项所述方法。A communication device, characterized in that it comprises at least one processor and an interface circuit, wherein the at least one processor is used To perform: the method as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 13, or the method as claimed in any one of claims 14 to 23. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:处理器,所述处理器与存储器耦合,所述存储器用于存储程序或指令,当所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时,使得所述装置执行:如权利要求1至13中任一项所述方法,或者如权利要求14至23中任一项所述方法。A communication device, characterized in that it includes: a processor, the processor is coupled to a memory, the memory is used to store programs or instructions, when the program or instructions are executed by the processor, the device executes: the method as described in any one of claims 1 to 13, or the method as described in any one of claims 14 to 23. 一种终端设备,其特征在于,所述终端设备包括:权利要求24至26中任一项所述的通信装置。A terminal device, characterized in that the terminal device comprises: the communication device according to any one of claims 24 to 26. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机可读存储介质中存储了计算机程序,所述计算机程序包括程序指令,所述程序指令当被处理器执行时使所述处理器执行:如权利要求1至13中任一项所述方法,或者如权利要求14至23中任一项所述方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that a computer program is stored in the computer-readable storage medium, and the computer program includes program instructions, and when the program instructions are executed by a processor, the processor executes: the method as described in any one of claims 1 to 13, or the method as described in any one of claims 14 to 23. 一种芯片,其特征在于,包括:处理器,用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,使得安装有所述芯片的通信设备执行:如权利要求1至13中任一项所述方法,或者如权利要求14至23中任一项所述方法。 A chip, characterized in that it includes: a processor, used to call and run a computer program from a memory, so that a communication device equipped with the chip executes: a method as described in any one of claims 1 to 13, or a method as described in any one of claims 14 to 23.
PCT/CN2024/125553 2023-10-25 2024-10-17 Method for transmitting information on sidelink and communication apparatus Pending WO2025087146A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202311398111.8A CN119893583A (en) 2023-10-25 2023-10-25 Method and communication device for information transmission on side link
CN202311398111.8 2023-10-25

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2025087146A1 true WO2025087146A1 (en) 2025-05-01

Family

ID=95425126

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2024/125553 Pending WO2025087146A1 (en) 2023-10-25 2024-10-17 Method for transmitting information on sidelink and communication apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN119893583A (en)
WO (1) WO2025087146A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN110418307A (en) * 2018-04-26 2019-11-05 华为技术有限公司 A kind of method for wireless communications, device
CN113015202A (en) * 2019-12-18 2021-06-22 联发科技(新加坡)私人有限公司 Side link measurement configuration and reporting method and user equipment
CN115866741A (en) * 2021-09-24 2023-03-28 维沃移动通信有限公司 Reference signal transmission method, device and related equipment
WO2023128595A1 (en) * 2021-12-30 2023-07-06 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for operation of apparatus in wireless communication system, and apparatus using said method

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN110418307A (en) * 2018-04-26 2019-11-05 华为技术有限公司 A kind of method for wireless communications, device
CN113015202A (en) * 2019-12-18 2021-06-22 联发科技(新加坡)私人有限公司 Side link measurement configuration and reporting method and user equipment
CN115866741A (en) * 2021-09-24 2023-03-28 维沃移动通信有限公司 Reference signal transmission method, device and related equipment
WO2023128595A1 (en) * 2021-12-30 2023-07-06 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for operation of apparatus in wireless communication system, and apparatus using said method

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN119893583A (en) 2025-04-25

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US12127165B2 (en) Transmission resource determining method and apparatus
US10973023B2 (en) Terminal and radio communication method
CN114499803B (en) Method for sending data, communication device, and computer storage medium
US11528731B2 (en) Communication method and communications apparatus
CN110932820B (en) Method for transmitting and receiving uplink control information and communication device
KR20230070061A (en) Prioritization of scheduling request and ack/nack
US20230171796A1 (en) Information transmission method, resource determination method and apparatuses
KR102857916B1 (en) Wireless communication method, device and communication system
CN112997433B (en) Method for HARQ transmission and communication device
CN112312513B (en) Method and apparatus for link failure recovery
CN114402637B (en) Communication method and communication device
WO2021057494A1 (en) Method of channel state information reporting and related device
WO2017132986A1 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting control data
EP4142400B1 (en) Resource determination method and apparatus
US11785471B2 (en) Method for transmitting information and receiving information and communication device
WO2019192500A1 (en) Communication method and communication set
US12063676B2 (en) Inter-modulation avoidance for transmission on different frequencies
CN116456382A (en) Side-link communication method and device
TWI871724B (en) Resource cancellation method and user equipment
WO2025087146A1 (en) Method for transmitting information on sidelink and communication apparatus
US20240205905A1 (en) Communication method and device
US20250301353A1 (en) User equipment and base station involved in spatial/frequency domain measurement
WO2025066780A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2025208510A1 (en) Information processing method and apparatus, and communication system
WO2025208489A1 (en) Configuration method and apparatus, device, medium, and program product

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 24881511

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1